The Korean War: An Exhaustive Chronology

1 The Korean War

ALSO

BY

BUD HANNINGS

Forts of the United States: An Historical Dictionary, 16th through 19th Centuries (McFarland, 2006)

The Korean War An Exhaustive Chronolog y BUD HANNINGS Foreword by General P. X. Kelley, 28th Commandant, USMC (Ret.)

Volume 1 (foreword; preface; prologue; acronyms and abbreviations; January 5, 1950–September 22, 1950)

McFarland & Company, Inc., Publishers Jefferson, North Carolina, and London

Volume 1 LIBRARY

OF

CONGRESS CATALOGUING-IN-PUBLICATION DATA

Hannings, Bud. The Korean war : an exhaustive chronology / Bud Hannings ; foreword by General P.X. Kelley, 28th Commandant, USMC (Ret.). p. cm. Includes index. 3 volume set— ISBN-13: 978-0-7864-2814-4 illustrated case binding : 50# alkaline paper 1. Korean War, 1950–1953 — Chronology. 2. Korean War, 1950–1953. 3. Korean War, 1950–1953 — United States — Chronology. 4. United Nations — Armed Forces — Korea — Chronology. I. Title. DS918.H336 2007 951.904'20202 — dc22 2007010570 British Library cataloguing data are available ©2007 Bud Hannings. All rights reserved No part of this book may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic or mechanical, including photocopying or recording, or by any information storage and retrieval system, without permission in writing from the publisher. On the cover: Situation Map of Korea, November 25, 1950; Elements of Eighth Army retire from Sunch’on and move south towards P’yongyang, December 2, 1950 Manufactured in the United States of America

McFarland & Company, Inc., Publishers Box 611, Jefferson, North Carolina 28640 www.mcfarlandpub.com

Contents • Volume 1 • Foreword, by General P. X. Kelley, 28th Commandant, USMC (Ret.) 1 Preface

3

Prologue: The Prelude to War

7

Acronyms and Abbreviations

15

Chronology: January 5, 1950– September 22, 1950 23

• Volume 2 • Chronology: September 23, 1950– November 12, 1951 403

• Volume 3 • Chronology: November 13, 1951– September 6, 1953 803 Appendices 1. Eighth Army, Order of Battle 2. Major Combat Events

975

981

3. United Nations Command, Senior Military Commanders 4. U.S. Air Force Commanders

985

5. Medal of Honor Recipients

988

v

983

Contents

vi 6. Major U.S. Air Force Units

994

7. U.S. Marine Units

997

8. U.S. Naval Vessels

999

9. U.S. Naval Air Units

1002

10. Carrier-Based and Non–Carrier-Based Squadrons 11. U.S. Naval Vessels Sunk or Damaged in Action 12. Numbers of U.S. Navy and Corps Personnel Killed and Wounded Marine 13. U.S. Aces of the Korean War 14. U.S. Army Command Strength 15. U.S. Army Battle Casualties 16. Foreign Nation Forces Bibliography

1021

General Index

1025

Military Units Index

1016

1018

1069

1009

1013

1014 1017

1003

Foreword by General P. X. Kelley, 28th Commandant, USMC (Ret.) A desperate withdrawal quickly followed the initial invasion as the friendly forces pulled back from the 38th Parallel towards Pusan. The U.S. Marines arrived there during early August to bolster the U.S. Eighth Army as it battled for survival. Soon after, during September, as part of the strategic plan to conduct an amphibious assault against Inchon, the U.S. Eighth Army initiated its breakout from the Pusan Perimeter. The book chronicles the perilous landing of the U.S. Marines at Inchon on 15 September, the subsequent drive to recapture Seoul, and the simultaneous advance of the U.S. Eighth Army as it moved to join the U.S. X Corps. From there, the book chronicles the U.S. X Corps as the cruel Korean winter set in, as if synchronized with the crossing of the Yalu River by the Chinese armies. Of particular significance is the fierce and difficult combat under the worst possible weather conditions after the U.S. Marines became surrounded by hordes of Chinese at the Chosin Reservoir. During their movement to Hungnam, the reader is reminded of Admiral Chester Nimitz’s famous comment during the World War II Battle of Iwo Jima, “Uncommon valor was a common virtue.” Throughout this spectacular three-volume work, the reader will encounter the setbacks, the triumphs, and the agonies of the fighting men on the ground, moving from foxhole to

Bud Hannings has done a masterful job in providing current and future generations with what can accurately be called the most complete and authoritative chronology ever compiled about the Korean War. All who read it will understand and fully comprehend why those who endured this most difficult confiict chafe when the war is referred to as a “Police Action.” The Korean War: An Exhaustive Chronolog y is a superbly and skillfully written compendium of the often-called “Forgotten War.” It tells of the extreme hardships and privations suffered by the Soldiers, Sailors, Airmen and Marines on the ground, in the air and at sea as they struggle to stem the tide of a seemingly unstoppable enemy. This is not a book on grand strategy. Rather, its primary focus is on the extraordinary achievements of small units and individuals. The confiict began on June 25, 1950, when without warning tens of thousands of North Koreans surged over the border into South Korea and only one American soldier stood in their way as they attacked towards Seoul. This chronology begins when a scant American Task Force is sent to Korea from nearby Japan to become the first U.S. unit to engage the enemy. It then chronicles the other units that follow from Japan and the United States, as well as from other countries that participated under the fiag of the United Nations.

1

Foreword by General P. X. Kelley foxhole, rice paddy to rice paddy and hill to hill. Readers may better understand the thrill of being in the cockpit of a Corsair being catapulted from the deck of a U.S. Navy carrier or the clamor in the turret of a naval gun. They can also crawl alongside a dirty infantryman, the “Queen of Battle,” during a tortuous advance against an enemy machine gun or invincible tank. Eventually, readers will join in the negotiations at Panmunjom during the final days of the confiict when the repatriated United Nations forces arrive at Freedom Village. Readers can then close the cover with the knowledge that those who served in Korea upheld the highest traditions of the American fighting men, while accomplishing a dual set

2 of noble achievements — the containment of Communism and the sharing of one of their most cherished possessions: freedom. No one who reads this book will ever think of the Korean War as the “Forgotten War.” And no one will ever forget the sacrifices that were borne by Americans and their counterparts from the United Nations. The Americans who served in the Korean War, like those who came before them and those that followed, all have additional bonds: the instinctive nature of their privilege to defend their country and their fiag and their determination to share their valor in the defense of others seeking freedom from tyranny.

Preface ingly never-ending clashes that ranged from direct assaults to ambushes. It is possible to follow an infantry division or regiment on a daily basis (with regard to combat) from the early days of the confiict until the final shots were fired on 27 July 1953. All activity initiated by Eighth Army, X Corps, the 1st Provisional Marine Brigade (later 1st Marine Division) and the ROKs Corps is depicted. Although the primary coverage points to the U.S. forces, the book simultaneously tracks the entire U.N. ground force. Fifty-three nations joined the struggle against the Communist aggression in Korea, but the heaviest burden was carried by the Americans. Fifteen additional nations committed combat troops; of those, Turkey and Great Britain were the only countries to field more than one battalion. South Korean forces included sixteen infantry divisions. In contrast, the Chinese Communists funneled thousands of troops into Korea to swell the ranks of the North Korean forces. Later, toward the end of 1950, several hundred thousand Chinese troops unexpectedly and openly joined the fight. In the meantime, although it was not made public, Soviet pilots were often the opponents of American aviators during the frequent clashes in the skies over Korea. The book does not confine itself to the infantry troops. All units are detailed, including accompanying artillery, armor and other support contingents, including airborne forces. The book also concentrates on the smaller

The purpose of this book is to provide a detailed account of the combat actions of the Korean War for serious students of history and for those with an interest in the U.S. military. The book aims to provide an accurate and factual depiction of the everyday occurrences from the minor engagements to the major battles that were fought by ground, air and naval forces. Prior to the beginning of the chronology is a prologue, “The Prelude to War,” a brief overview of the situation in the Pacific with regard to Korea and Japan at the termination of World War II. This section displays the early intent of the Kremlin to dominate in Asia by first gaining control of Korea. At the same time, it summarizes the ongoing crisis in Europe and the Mideast during the same time period, to give the reader a wide view of the Kremlin’s intentions. In Europe the Soviets boldly made their moves, but in the Pacific, their operations remained clandestine. Showing the buildup to the war, the chronology begins in January 1950. From the invasion of South Korea on 25 June 1950, it covers the activities of the U.S. Army and the United States Marines on a daily basis. It documents the formidable efforts of the U.S. Air Force and the U.S. Navy to hold the line while the American ground forces were preparing to react to the massive invasion across the 38th Parallel by the Communists against the newly created Republic of South Korea. The book provides an easily accessible route to both the major battles and the seem-

3

Preface contingents and the actions of individual soldiers, sailors and Marines. One hundred and thirty-one men who served during the war in Korea received the Medal of Honor. Of those, ninety-four made the ultimate sacrifice. The actions of those individuals, with rare exception, are detailed in the book on the date of the action. One of the recipients, Tibor Rubin, whose period of eligibility for the award encompassed 1950–1953 did not receive his award until 23 September 2005, when it was presented by President George W. Bush. The book also closely follows the naval blockade of Korea and the air war against enemy targets in North Korea, as well as the close-air support missions. In conjunction with the comprehensive coverage, an overview of the war summarizes the confiict, highlights the various engagements and follows the see-saw battles that dominated the first six months of the war and the bloody months of combat that followed. Within the summary, the dates of the respective actions are listed, which provides the researcher or reader with a direct route to the identical action in the book, where the incident or action is covered in more detail. Hardships and dangers the ground troops faced can be found in almost every paragraph. The constant warfare raged from the east coast to the west coast and from Pusan to the south by the sea to the Yalu River in the north at the border with Manchuria. There was no easy ground in Korea, nor did the troops get to enjoy many fair skies. U.S. troops spent three Christmases in Korea and usually they were fighting in torrential heat during the monsoon season, when the roads became fiooded and the bridges were washed out. Or, they were heavily engaged along icy slopes and primitive frozen mountain roads in weather that dropped way below zero. The enemy, a formidable foe, faced the same elements, but they more easily adapted to it. Some of the names of major battles that were seared into the minds of those who served are Oman, Kum River, Naktong Bulge, In-

4 chon, Chosin Reservoir, Koto-ri, Hamhung and Bloody Ridge. Others included Heartbreak Ridge, the Punch Bowl, Bunker Hill, Vegas Cities, the Hook and Pork Chop Hill. Each was a colossal confiagration that can never be fully described by a single pen or by a thousand. Nonetheless, whether it was a major battle or a minor skirmish in Korea, it was most probably under grueling circumstances. During 1951, the strategy on winning the war changed dramatically. Eighth Army received orders to cancel all offensives and take a defensive posture. The orders arrived in conjunction with the decision not to fight for complete victory. Nonetheless, permission was still granted to conduct strong patrols. While the confiict changed to a contest for the hills, and later towards the end of the year, descended into stalemate, the confrontations did not become less ruthless. The book continues with comprehensive coverage of the respective units until the culmination of the war. The text does not place any emphasis on the political elements of the war, but it does contain information regarding the strategy in Washington and the differences between General MacArthur and the president as well as the Joint Chiefs of Staff. Nor does the book provide an in-depth study of the strategies mapped out by the High Command, but it does provide an overview of the U.N. strategy as well as that of the Communists. Researching the facts contained herein was challenging because of the enormous depth and breadth of the confiict. However, thanks to the meticulous records of the armed forces, including the official volumes done by the respective services and the individual military historical centers, Leatherneck magazine and Infantry magazine, as well as other distinguished works on the Korean War (listed in the bibliography), the endeavor was not tedious. The author was not faced with the problem of discerning fact from fiction and for that I am sincerely grateful to all of our armed forces. All photographs are from the United

5 States Air Force, United States Army, United States Marine Corps, United States Navy, Department of Defense and the National Archives. It should be noted that the records of the Communist forces — including the Chinese, North Koreans and Soviets — were unavailable. Consequently, the references to their activity and casualties were accumulated from the records of the U.S. armed forces. The most difficult part of the prolonged project was how to capture the full picture of the war and condense

Preface it. With that in mind, the project was undertaken and completed to the best of my ability. I hope that the book will be considered a fair and accurate portrayal of the war. The book was purposely written in the present tense to give an immediate feel for the tribulations endured by the troops on the battlefields of the harsh Korean terrain for a period of three years, two months and two days. When the confiict ended on 27 July 1953, the troops knew they were not going to spend their fourth straight Christmas on a Korean field of battle.

This page intentionally left blank

Prologue: The Prelude to War them, but to no avail. It remained a Japanese possession and it was kept as a police state. During 1943 at the Cairo Conference, the Allies, including the Russians, proclaimed that Korea would become a free nation at the appropriate time. On 16 August 1945, Josef Stalin demanded that the Soviets be permitted to deploy occupational troops in Japanese territory in the northern sector of Hokkaido; however, President Truman immediately refused the request. While the Russians continued to circumvent the U.S. to find a way into Japan, American armed forces began to occupy the country. A vanguard arrived in Japan on 28 August. On 7 September 1945, British, French, Soviet and U.S. forces paraded in Berlin in honor of V-J Day. The grand parade was nearly cancelled due to the obstinacy of the Russians, who demanded to be first in the parade line. Nevertheless, it became the final combined parade. Soon after, the Communists began to openly attempt to instigate trouble, not only in Germany and Europe, but in other countries, including Greece, Iran, Turkey, the Philippines and Korea. On 8 September, the U.S. 24th Corps (6th, 7th and 40th Infantry Divisions), commanded by Major General John R. Hodge, was ordered to Korea. Hodge became the commander of U.S. Army forces in Korea. He discovered upon his arrival that the Russians

Korea, known as the Hermit Kingdom, played no major part in the confiagration known as World War II; however, it was to become the foundation of the Communists’ plan to bring Asia under the total domination of Moscow. While the Allies confronted the postwar situation in Europe, Stalin — in addition to complicating matters at every turn in Europe — devoted much time to launching longterm plans to test the mettle of the free world in Korea. During mid–July 1945, President Harry Truman arrived in Berlin to attend the Potsdam Conference. At the time, Russia had not yet declared war against Japan and the conference did not focus on Asia. On 12 August 1945, shortly after the U.S. dropped two atomic bombs on Japan, the Soviets declared war on Japan. Russian troops were immediately dispatched from Manchuria into Korea, initiating the first signal of Russian intentions. The Russians portended that the presence of their troops was to facilitate the surrender of Japanese troops, but there had been no official agreement between Russia and the U.S. to bisect Korea. Korea, until the 20th century, had been an independent nation, nestled between China, Russia and Japan. During 1910, the Japanese annexed it for future colonization and as a catapult for entry into Asia. After the conclusion of World War I, the Korean people had thought the great nations would find compassion for

7

Prologue had halted at the 38th Parallel as agreed, alleviating the tension for the occupation force. The U.S. troops began to accept the surrender of Japanese troops below the 38th Parallel. On 9 September 1945, the Japanese at Seoul officially relinquished their control over Korea to the U.S. 7th Division. By mid–November 1945, it was determined that the anticipated 25,000-man Korean police force should be bolstered by a Korean national defense force. The Korean Air Force was to amount to one transport squadron and two fighter squadrons. In addition, the combined strength of the Korean Navy and Coast Guard would stand at 4,500 troops. The findings were sent to Washington. Later during a meeting in Moscow (between the U.S. and the Soviets), it was agreed to form a provisional government for all of Korea. In the meantime, the U.S. continued to shrink its armed forces in the Pacific and in Europe, while the Soviets continued to build their strength. The Soviets maintained a relatively low profile with regard to Korea, but not Europe, nor the Mideast. Russia tested the U.S. in Berlin during March of 1946 by moving into the U.S. zone and removing railroad tracks. Meanwhile, the Soviets still resisted removing their troops from Iran. It was during that same period that Winston Churchill, speaking at a college conference in the U.S., described the situation in Eastern Europe and coined the phrase “Iron Curtain.” By May of 1946, the joint United States– USSR Commission, which had been authorized during the Moscow Conference of the Foreign Ministers of the U.S. and the Soviet Union for the purpose of bringing about a unified Korea, made no progress. During 1947, the commission returned to the table, but still no progress was made. Consequently, the U.S. took the question of Korean independence and unification to the United Nations, rather than waste more time with the Russians. The U.N. discussed the issue in September 1947. In March 1947, the conference of Foreign

8 Ministers convened in Moscow. During the same month, President Truman, concerned with the spread of Communism, proclaimed what became known as the Truman Doctrine. The Truman Doctrine made it emphatically clear that the U.S. would oppose Communism and its expansion plans, wherever it became necessary. Truman later stated that his speech was “America’s answer to the surge of Communist tyranny.” By spring of 1947, the situation in Korea remained fiuid, the tensions between the U.S. and the Soviet Union had not lessened, and still there was no progress on unification. Meanwhile, the Soviets raised the stakes in Europe by seizing control of Hungary. By summer, the Soviets attempted to gain power in Greece. The city of Berlin became a powder keg. In September 1947 the Korean people received a disturbing bit of news when it became known that the Joint Chiefs of Staff sent a letter concerning Korea to Secretary of State Dean Acheson, informing him that there was little U.S. strategic interest there. The letter also offered the opinion that there was no need to continue maintaining the “present troops and bases in Korea.” The United Nations in October 1947 adopted in principle a resolution drafted by the U.S. that called for the establishment of a temporary commission to oversee elections in Korea. However, the Soviet Union refused to cooperate. The Russians barred U.N. representatives from entering its controlled portion of Korea. Nonetheless, during February 1948, it was decided that the elections would be held in May. General Douglas MacArthur informed the Joint Chiefs of Staff that in his opinion, a South Korean army was not feasible. He said the U.S. forces in Korea were unable to provide sufficient protection. He suggested that the Constabulary be increased to 50,000 men. Meanwhile, the North Koreans made an aggressive move. On 8 February 1948, the communists announced that the North Korean provisional

9 government had established the Korean People’s Army. The Russians initiated their withdrawal from Korea during February 1948; however, many advisors remained behind. In addition, the Russians left tanks and aircraft behind. By spring of 1948, the condition of the U.S. armed forces was quite poor. The Soviets, aware of the deterioration of the American military, had been steadily raising the stakes in Europe, while continuing their meddling in Asia. During April 1948, Truman again reiterated his displeasure with the Russians and with the French. The French had been unable to sustain their zone in Berlin by themselves and concluded that they would join with the Americans and British. Truman was aware of Soviet intentions in Korea and Japan, but the priority had become Europe. Subsequent to the problems in Berlin, Truman stated: “For the first year after the war, the British and Americans made every effort to make a joint control succeed. The Russians, however, with a good assist from the French, defeated these efforts.” On 10 May 1948, free elections were held in Korea, but the citizens of North Korea were forbidden from participating. About 95 percent of the eligible populace in South Korea voted and elected a National Assembly. Soon after, on the 31st, the newly elected representatives gathered in Seoul and elected Syngman Rhee, a staunch anticommunist, as president for a fouryear term. The election process worked well, despite the Communists’ attempts to disrupt the historical event. By that time, the South Koreans were nearly on their own. By mid–1949, the only U.S. troops in the country were advisors and their numbers barely reached 500 men. To make the situation more tenuous, by the end of the summer the U.S. eliminated Korea as a defense responsibility for General MacArthur. The troops in Korea at that time were placed under the jurisdiction of John J. Muccio, the U.S. ambassador to Korea, as part of the U.S. plan for a total pull-out, leaving a supposedly solid country to govern itself.

Prologue During the summer of 1948 there were no outward signs of violence by the Communists in Asia, but Europe continued to reach the brink of disaster. The Russians, prevented from landing troops in Japan and unable to totally halt the spread of democracy in Korea, tightened the noose in Berlin by initiating a blockade during June 1948. The U.S. and Britain stood determined to thwart the Russians by starting an airlift. The French, although part of the Allied force in Berlin, had no transport planes and played no part in the operation. By 25 June, C47s began to arrive in Berlin with food and supplies. The planes continued the operation nonstop, 24 hours a day to maintain the city and prevent the people from starving until the Russians finally relented and lifted the blockade. On 15 August 1948, Syngman Rhee was inaugurated president of South Korea. His inauguration brought about the end of U.S. occupation in Korea. The U.S. began to transfer its authority to the new government. The South Koreans began to call the Constabulary the National Defense Army, but the term was not acknowledged by the United States. During the transitional period, the U.S. agreed to maintain the training of the Constabulary forces and the Korean Coast Guard. The American advisors were to be reassigned to the Overstrength Detachment, Headquarters, USAFIK, to be reorganized as a Provisional Military Advisory Group (PMAG). On 26 August, John J. Muccio, recently appointed special assistant to Korea by President Truman, established a U.S. diplomatic mission in the capital. Muccio also retained the rank of ambassador, with authorization by the president to negotiate the impending withdrawal of U.S. troops from Korea. The phase-out began on 15 September. By October 1948, more trouble began to brew. Members of the Constabulary ignited an insurrection. On 19 October, the S.K. 14th Regiment, under orders to quash the turmoil, received U.S. rifies; however, the unit contained some Communist NCOs. The unit had been

Prologue ordered to the island of Chej-do to assist forces already there. The unit was ordered to move out before the rifies were distributed to prevent the Communists from getting them. The Communist NCOs instigated mutiny. The rebels seized Yosu and imprisoned some loyalists. The progress of the insurrection was halted by the 21st and by the 25th it was eliminated. The newly created Republic of South Korea was officially recognized by the U.S. on 1 January 1949. Shortly thereafter, on 15 January, the U.S. 24th Corps left Korea for Japan, where it would disband. The remaining units were to depart during March. During that same month, the Soviets agreed to supply and arm six North Korean infantry divisions and three mechanized contingents. In addition, the Soviets committed to equip eight battalions of Constabulary troops who were to operate near the 38th Parallel and they committed to deliver 100 Soviet fighter planes, thirty light and medium bombers and twenty reconnaissance planes. As the Russians equipped and trained the North Koreans, the activity was relatively quiet. Although the U.S. was in the process of withdrawing its troops from Korea and had signed an agreement with the South Koreans, the U.N. Security Council decided during March 1949, that the U.S.— rather than the U.N.— should pay the expenses of arming the present force of 65,000 men. At the time, sufficient equipment to arm 50,000 troops had been, or was about to be, transferred from the Americans to the South Koreans. The U.N. also decided that the U.S. should supply some ships and equipment, valued at about one million dollars, to the Korean Coast Guard. And the U.N., not the U.S. Congress, also decided that legislative action should be forthcoming to get permanent financial aid for Korea from a U.S. assistance program for free nations. That legislation emerged and was signed into law by President Truman in October 1949. Despite the obvious Soviet build-up in Europe and the intelligence that indicated So-

10 viet intent to dominate Asia, too, the U.S. continued to thin its fighting forces. Towards the latter part of March, President Truman appointed Louis A. Johnson, a lawyer, as secretary of defense. Johnson was conspicuously no friend of the U.S. armed forces and he was an obvious adversary to the Marine Corps and Navy. Johnson intended to help eliminate both branches of the service. Johnson believed that amphibious invasions were extinct following the close of World War II and he was convinced the Air Force could replace the U.S. Navy. Back in the States, the armed forces were not faring too well with the politicians. On 23 April 1949, the U.S. Navy received a startling surprise as Secretary of Defense Johnson aborted a $188 million project that cost the Navy its anticipated super-carrier, the USS United States. Johnson’s action severely hindered the Navy’s postwar aviation plans and he nearly killed off Marine aviation with the same blow. Although there were many concerns about Soviet expansion, there were no thoughts of how the U.S. Navy and the Marine Corps would be the last chance to keep the U.S. from being driven from Korea the following year. Only intervention by Congressman Carl Vinson saved Marine Corps aviation. Inter-service rivalry by that time had reached a dangerous level. Meanwhile, the Kremlin continued to maintain the blockade of West Berlin, but the city continued to receive food and supplies by air delivery without interruption. The Russians also ignited activity in North Korea to incite trouble in Asia. On 3 May 1949, North Korean Communist troops launched a raid in the vicinity of Kaesong in the Republic of South Korea. This clash was followed by hundreds of similar skirmishes during the next six months. Many of the exchanges were minor, but both sides sustained high casualties. The Communists also initiated guerrilla activity in South Korea. While the tension continued to build in Korea, the Soviets began to lessen tension in Berlin. On 4 May, the Russians agreed to lift the blockade, ending the futile attempt to starve the West

11 Berliners. The blockade officially terminated on 12 May 1949. By June 1949, more evidence emerged regarding the Kremlin’s activities in Korea and the entry of the Communist Chinese. A clandestine operation run by General MacArthur’s headquarters in Japan discovered information about Chinese fiying into Pyongyang under the pretense of being war refugees. Other intelligence verified that the North Koreans and the Chinese Communists were controlled by the Kremlin. About 2,000 reports fiowed into headquarters in Tokyo and from there they were forwarded to the States. The intelligence also validated the inability of Syngman Rhee to meet a Communist attack, primarily because of the lack of planes and tanks. The South Koreans’ armor consisted of some half-tracks and scout cars and their air force encompassed only a few planes. On 1 July 1949, the Provisional Advisory Group, earlier organized to assist the South Korean Armed Forces, became the official connection between the U.S. and Korea following the departure of USAFIK. It became the U.S. military advisory group to the Republic of Korea, known as KMAG. The members of KMAG, coming under the American Diplomatic Mission, received diplomatic immunity. The newly formed South Korean units had to contend with the numerous actions initiated by the North Korean regular forces and with the evergrowing guerrilla units. The KMAG advisors also supported the S.K. Coast Guard, which had about ninety vessels, of which only forty were seaworthy. Consequently, the S.K. Coast guard was outclassed by the smugglers and pirates who maintained their exploits with little interruption. The North Korean Communists opened a strong attack against the South Korean Ongjin Peninsula during August 1949. The incursion began strongly and brought severe fighting, but the South Koreans were able to prevail. The Communists were driven back beyond the 38th Parallel. Later, on 1 September, intelligence reports forwarded from Far East

Prologue Command to Washington indicated that since the previous June, one Chinese division had trickled into North Korea from Antung, Manchuria. In conjunction, the Chinese on 21 September announced the establishment of the People’s Republic of China, with the capital in Beijing (a name restored from the Chinese Nationalists’ Peiping), under the wing of the Soviets. The Communist republic was first led by Mao Tse-tung. During February of 1950, the Chinese and Soviets fastened the bond further by signing a friendship pact in Moscow. Soon after, on the 23rd, President Truman announced to the nation that the Soviet Union had detonated an atomic bomb. Back in Washington, D.C., the House Armed Services Committee held hearings on 19 October that focused on the possibility of the extinction of the U.S. Navy and Marine Corps. One witness, General Omar Bradley, chairman of the Joint Chiefs of Staff, read his statement, which unraveled like a tirade rather than an objective viewpoint. Bradley concluded his statement with a prophecy: “I also predict that large scale amphibious operations will never occur again.” On 27 October, Admiral Louis E. Denfeld (chief of naval operations), who had appeared as a witness during the House hearings to defend the role of the Navy, was fired by Defense Secretary Johnson. On 8 December, General Headquarters Intelligence in Japan received a report from its agents in Korea. The information included the number of North Korean divisions, which stood between four and eight, bolstered by separate brigades. Their aircraft were documented as Soviet-made and included 60 to 70 planes. They also had about 35 to 40 Soviet T-34 tanks. Headquarters was also informed that the winter would prevent any hostilities, but that during April and May of 1950, Communist action was very possible. The situation in Asia at the beginning of 1950 remained poor. The occupation troops still based in Japan had fallen far from their effectiveness during World War II. On 5 January

Prologue 1950, President Truman proclaimed that the United States would not initiate, either directly or indirectly, any military action to intercede on behalf of the Nationalist Chinese under Chiang Kai-shek on Formosa. Within a week, the situation in the Far East became more confusing. Korea was placed on the chopping block when the secretary of state proclaimed that the U.S. would act to defend Japan, the Philippines and Okinawa. Korea was eliminated from the protection of U.S. forces, which in turn signaled to the Russians that Korea was an easy target for Communist expansion. On the 20th, more alarming information reached Far East Command from the operatives in Korea. The intelligence suggested a Communist invasion of South Korea would be launched during either March or April of 1950. The report, which was forwarded to Washington, detailed the movement of the North Korean forces and of the continual arrivals of new Chinese units. Nonetheless, the signs of imminent danger failed to push the U.S. towards defending South Korea. By 1 March 1950, the House of Representatives’ Armed Services Committee issued a report that publicized its 1949 investigations. It recommended that important air warfare roles should be given to the Navy and Marine Corps and it urged increased combined training. The demise of the Navy and Marine Corps was shelved. During April, in response to a request from General MacArthur for instructors (U.S. Navy and Marine Corps) to train the U.S. Army troops in amphibious warfare, the Marine Corps was eager to accommodate MacArthur, particularly because of the recent stinging remarks by General Bradley. In the meantime, the clouds of war were stirring in Korea. By mid–April, the Communists ordered all North Koreans living within three miles of the 38th Parallel to abandon their homes. Soon after, North Korean troops and guerrillas occupied the empty living quarters. The activity was picked up by MacArthur’s op-

12 erators in Korea, turned in to headquarters and from there forwarded to Washington. By May of 1950, it became even clearer that the reaches of Communism had been causing havoc around the globe. Secretary of State Dean Acheson, while in Paris, announced that the U.S. was going to provide military aid to Cambodia, France, Laos and Vietnam to bolster the respective struggles against the rebels in French Indochina, who had been described as Communists. There was no mention of aid for South Korea, which left the message that Korea was on its own. The Communists essentially signaled their intentions on 8 June, when the newspapers in Pyongyang, North Korea, published a manifesto claiming that a parliament would be elected during August and that a meeting was scheduled to convene in Seoul on the 15th of August. On 15 June, the KMAG announced the grim circumstances and stated that because of a lack of equipment the South Korean armed forces could withstand an enemy invasion no longer than fifteen days. By the 23rd, following an upsurge in incursions, one KMAG advisor, Lt. Colonel Thomas McPhail, became convinced that an attack was imminent. He based his conclusions on intelligence gathered while engaging guerrillas. McPhail’s intelligence had discovered fresh infantry units, camoufiaged tanks and antiaircraft batteries, all deployed within striking distance of the South Korean positions below the 38th Parallel. Lt. Colonel McPhail convinced General Kim, the S.K. 6th Division commander, to cancel all weekend leaves and to ensure that all defensive fortifications were fully manned at their positions that guarded the approaches to Chunchon. McPhail forwarded the intelligence to headquarters, but still, the information did not sound any alarms. Things remained quiet along the 38th Parallel on 24 June. The tranquility provided the enemy with additional opportunities to finalize preparations for the invasion scheduled to commence on the following day. The South Koreans had four divisions and one regiment

13 positioned to react to hostilities if they developed, but of those, only four regiments and one battalion were deployed near the front below the 38th Parallel. The bulk of the forces were

Prologue based to the rear. To add to the crisis, many of the troops and KMAG advisors were on weekend liberty on the morning of the 25th when the colossal offensive began.

This page intentionally left blank

Acronyms and Abbreviations This list is not all-inclusive, but it includes the military terms most commonly used during the Korean War period, as well as other standard abbreviations and acronyms.

ADCOM— Air (later, Aerospace) Defense Command (see also, ADC) ADM— Admiral Admin— Administration AdmO— Administration Order Adv Tn— Advanced Trainer ADVON— Advanced Echelon AE— Ammunition Ship AE— Aviation Electrician’s Mate (USN) AEF— American Expeditionary Force AEMS— Armament and Electronics Maintenance Squadron AerialDel Plat— Aerial Delivery Platoon AETC— Air Education and Training Command AEW— Airborne Early Warning AF— Aviation Photographer’s Mate (USN) AF— Air Force AF— Store Ship AFA— Armored Field Artillery AFB— Air Force Base AFFE— Army Forces Far East AFCON— Air Force–controlled AFHRA— Air Force Historical Research Agency AFLC— Air Force Logistics Command Afid— Airfield AFMC— Air Force Materiel Command AFOUA—Air Force Outstanding Unit Award AFRC— Air Force Reserve Command AFRES— Air Force Reserve AFRTC— Air Force Reserve Training Center AFS— Air Force Station AFSC— Air Force Systems Command AFSOC—Air Force Special Operations Command

AA— Airman Apprentice (USN) AAA— Antiaircraft artillery AAB— Army Air Base AAC— Alaskan Air Command AAF— Army Air Forces AAFld— Army Air Field AB— Air Base AB–Aviation Boatswain’s Mate (USN) ABCCC— Airborne Battlefield Command Control and Communication ABG— Air Base Group Abn— Airborne AbnRCT— Airborne Regimental Combat Team ABW— Air Base Wing AC— Air Controlman AC— Symbol following some photo negative numbers, denoting a black and white negative AC&CS— Airborne Command and Control Squadron ACC— Air Combat Command ACE— Accelerated Co-Pilot Enrichment Program AcofS— Assistant Chief of Staff ACW— Air Control Wing AD— Aviation Machinist Mate (USN) AD— Douglas “Skyraider”: single-engine attack plane (USA) AD— Destroyer Tender ADC— Air Defense Command (see also ADCOM) ADC— Assistant Division Commander ADCOM— Advance Command and Liaison Group

15

Acronyms and Abbreviations AFSPC— Air Force Space Command AG— Aerographer’s Mate (USN) AGC— Amphibious Command Ship (Amphibious Force Flagship) AGO— Office of the Adjutant General AH— Hospital Ship AIA— Air Intelligence Agency Air DelPlat— Air Delivery Platoon AirO— Air Officer AirSptSec— Air Support Section AK— Aviation Storekeeper (USN) AK— Cargo Ship AKA— Assault (Attack) Cargo Ship AKL— Light Cargo Ship AKS— Stores Issue Ship AL— Aviation Electronic (USN) ALCE— Airlift Control Element ALCM— Air Launched Cruise Missile ALCS— Airborne Launch Control System AM— Aviation Structural Mechanic (USN) AM— Minesweeper AMC— Air Mobility Command AMIK— American Mission in Korea AMS— Auxiliary Motor Minesweeper or Minesweeper, Small AMPH Trac Bn— Amphibious Tractor Battalion AMPH TrkBn— Truck Battalion AMW— Air Mobility Wing AN— Airman (USN) ANG— Air National Guard ANGB— Air National Guard Base ANGLICO— Air and Naval Gunfire Liaison Company AO— Aviation Ordnance Man (USN) AO— Oiler AOG— Gasoline Tanker AP— Transport APA— Attack Transport APD— High Speed Transport Aprt— Airport ARADCOM— Army Air Defense Command ARB— Air Reserve Base ARFC— Air Reserve Flying Center ARG— Repair Ship-Internal Combustion Engine ARH— Repair Ship-Heavy Hull Damage ARL— Repair Ship–Landing Craft ARMDAmphBn— Armored Amphibious Battalion ARS— Salvage Vessel ART— Air Reserve Technician ARW— Air Refueling Wing

16 AS— Air Station ASCOM— Army Service Command ASP— Ammunition Supply Point Asst— Assistant AT— Antitank AT— Aviation Electronics Technician (AT) ATAR— Anti-tank Aircraft Rockets ATC— Air Training Command [1946–1993] (later, AETC); Air Transport Command [1942–1948] ATF— Ocean Tug–Fleet ATIS— Allied Translator and Interpreter Section ATTF— Alaska Tanker Task Force AU— Attack Model of Vought F4U “Corsair” Aux— Auxiliary AV— Seaplane Tender AVP— Seaplane Tender, Small AW— Automatic Weapons AW— Airlift Wing AWADS— Adverse Weather Aerial Delivery System B-26— Douglas “Invader”: twin-engine light bomber (USA) B-29— Boeing “Superfortress”: four-engine bomber (USA) BAR— Browning Automatic Rifie BB— Battleship Bchmstr Unit— Beachmaster Unit BCT— Battalion Combat Team BIRD DOG— Search and Rescue BLT— Battalion Landing Team BM— Boatswain’s Mate (USN) BMEWS— Ballistic Missile Early Warning System Bn— Battalion BomCom— Bomber Command Brig— Brigade Brig— Brigadier Brig Gen— Brigadier General BRIGGEN— Brigadier General BT— Boilerman (USN) Btry— Battery BuMed— Bureau of Medicine BW— Bombardment/Bomb Wing C-47/R4D— Douglas “Skytrain”: twin-engine transport plane CA— Heavy Cruiser CAP— Combat Air Patrol CAS— Close-Air Support Capt— Captain CBI— China-Burma-India Theater

17 CCF— Chinese Communist Forces (Korean War) CCTS— Combat Crew Training Squadron CCTW— Combat Crew Training Wing CDR— Commander CENTAF— Central Air Force CG— Commanding General CIC— Counter-Intelligence Corps (USA) CINCFE— Commander-in-Chief, Far East CINCLANT— Commander-in-Chief, Atlantic CINCPAC— Commander-in-Chief, Pacific Command CINCPACAF— Commander-in-Chief, Pacific Air Forces CINCPACFLT— Commander-in-Chief, Pacific Fleet CINCSAC— Commander-in-Chief, Strategic Air Command CINCUNC— Commander-in-Chief, United Nations Command CINCUSAFE— Commander-in-Chief, United States Air Forces in Europe CL— Light Cruiser CLAA— Light Antiaircraft Cruiser CMC— Commandant of the Marine Corps CNO— Chief of Naval Operations CO— Commanding Officer CO— Company COB— Collocated Operating Base Col— Colonel COMAirSupGrp— Commander Air Support Group ComCarCom— Combat Cargo Command COMCARDIV— Commander, Carrier Division Comd— Command COMFAIRJAP— Commander, Fleet Air Wing Japan ComFltAir Wing— Commander Fleet Air Wing COMNAGFE— Commander Naval Air Group Far East COMNAVFE— Commander, Naval Forces Far East COMNAVMARIANAS— Commander, Naval Forces Marianas COMO— Commodore ComPacFlt— Commander Pacific Fleet COMPHIBGRUONE— Commander Amphibious Group One COMPHIBPAC— Commander, Amphibious Forces Pacific COMSEVENTHFLT— Commander, Seventh Fleet

Acronyms and Abbreviations COMUNBLOCKANDCORTFOR— Commander, United Nations Blockading and Escort Force CONAD— Continental Air Defense Command CONLUS— Continental United States CONUS— Continental United States COS— Combined Operations Section CP— Command Post CPV— Chinese People’s Volunteers CPX— Command Post Exchange CR— Command Report C/S— Chief of Staff CS— Commissaryman (USN) CSG— Combat Service Group CSG— Combat Support Group CSUSA— Chief of Staff, U.S. Army CT— Communication Technician (USN) CTC— Civil Transport Corps CTE— Commander Task Element CTF— Commander Task Force CTG— Commander Task Group CTS— Combat Training Squadron CV— Aircraft Carrier CVA— Attack Aircraft Carrier CVE— Aircraft Carrier Escort CVG— Carrier Air Group CVL— Aircraft Carrier Light CZ— Canal Zone (in Panama) DAF— Department of the Air Force DC— Damage Controlman (USN) DD— Destroyer DDE— Destroyer Escort DDER— Radar Picket Destroyer Escort DDR— Radar Picket Destroyer DESDIV— Destroyer Division Det— Detachment DEW— Distant Early Warning DF— Disposition Form DFSC— Symbol denoting color photographic number DIS— Daily Intelligence Summary Div— Division DMS–Destroyer Minesweeper DMZ— Demilitarized Zone DOD— Department of Defense DOW— Died of Wounds DPRK— Democratic People’s Republic of Korea (North Korea) DRU— Direct Reporting Unit DT— Dental Technician (USN) DUC— Distinguished Unit Citation

Acronyms and Abbreviations DUKW— Amphibious Truck dy— Duty EAME— European-African-Middle Eastern ECIDE (U)— East Coast Island Defense Element (Unit) ECM— Electronic Countermeasures EM— Electrician’s Mate (USN) EMB Off— Embarkation Officer EngrBn— Engineer Battalion EngrPortConst Co— Engineer Port Construction Company (USA) EngrSpecBrig— Engineer Special Brigade (USA) ENS— Ensign Electronic Technician (USN) ETO— European Theater of Operations ETTF— European Tanker Task Force EUSAK— Eighth U.S. Army in Korea ERC— Enlisted Reserve Corps F2H— McDonnell “Banshee”: single-engine jet fighter (US) F2H-2P— Douglas “Skyknight”: twin-engine jet fighter (US) F3D— Douglas “Skyknight”: single-engine jet fighter (US) F3D-2— Douglas “Skyknight”: two-engine jet fighter (US) F4U— Chance Vought “Corsair”: single-engine fighter (US) F4U-5N— Chance Vought “Corsair” single engine night fighter F-51— North American “Mustang”: singleengine fighter (US) F7F-3N— Grumman “Tigercat” twin-engine night fighter F9F— Grumman “Panther”: single-engine jet fighter (US) F-80— Lockheed “Shooting Star”: single-engine jet fighter (US) F-86— North American “Sabre”: single-engine jet fighter (US) FA— Field artillery FA— Fireman (USN) FABn— Field Artillery Battalion FAC— Forward Air Control (controller) FBG— Fighter Bomber Group FAF— Fifth Air Force (later named PACAF) FAFIK— Fifth Air Force in Korea FASRon— Fleet Air Service Squadron FBHL— Force Beachhead Line FC— Fire Controlman FEAF— Far Eastern Air Forces FEAM Com— Far East Materiel Command

18 FEC— Far East Command FECOM— Far East Command FES— Far Eastern Squadron FICON— Fighter-Interceptor Carrier, Reconnaissance FL— Flight Leader Fld— Field FMF— Fleet Marine Force FMFLant— Fleet Marine Force, Atlantic FMFPac— Fleet Marine Force, Pacific FMS— Field Maintenance Squadron FN— Fireman (USN) FO— Forward Observer (artillery) FOA— Field Operating Agency FS— Fighter Squadron FSA— Fire Support Arms FSA— Fire Support Area FSCC— Fire Support Coordination Center Ft— Fort FT— Fire Control Technician FTW— Flying Training Wing Fum & BathPlat— Fumigation and Bath Platoon FW— Fighter Wing G-1— Personnel section of divisional or higher staff G-2— Intelligence section of divisional or higher staff G-3— Operations and training section of divisional or higher staff G-4— Logistics section of divisional or higher staff GCI— Ground Control Intercept Gen— General GHQ— General Headquarters GHQAF— General Headquarters Air Force GHQFEC— General Headquarters, Far East Command GLCM— Ground Launched Cruise Missile GM— Gunner’s Mate (USN) GO— General Order HA— Hospitalman Apprentice H&d— Harassing and Interdiction HE— High Explosive Hedron— Headquarters Squadrn HF— High Frequency Radio HM— Hospital Corpsman (USN) HMS— Her Majesty’s Ship HMAS— Her Majesty’s Australian Ship HMCS— Her Majesty’s Canadian Ship HMNZS— Her Majesty’s New Zealand Ship

19 HMR— Marine Helicopter Transport Squadron HN— Hospitalman (USN) HO3S-1— Sikorsky Helicopter HQ— Headquarters HqBn— Headquarters Battalion HqCo— Headquarters Company HQMC— Headquarters U.S. Marine Corps HqSq— Headquarters Squadron HRS-1— Sikorsky Single Engine Helicopter H & S Co— Headquarters and Service Company HTL-4— Bell Two-Place Helicopter I&R— Intelligence and Reconnaissance IBC— Iceland Base Command ICBM— Intercontinental Ballistic Missile ICM— Intercontinental Missile (i.e. the Snark) Inf Div— Infantry Division Intl— International IRBM— Intermediate Range Ballistic Missile IW— Intelligence Wing JANIS— Joint Army-Navy Intelligence Service (Studies) JCS— Joint Chiefs of Staff JIC— Joint Intelligence Committee JLC— Japan Logistical Command JML— Small Minesweeper, ex–Japanese JMS— Japanese Minesweeper Jnl— Journal JOC— Joint Operations Center JOG— Joint Operations Center JSPOG— Joint Strategic Plans and Operations Group JSSC— Joint Strategic Survey Committee JTF— Joint Task Force KATUSA— Korean Augmentation to the U.S. Army KCOMC— Korean Communication Zone (Also KComZ) KIA— Killed in Action K/KE— Symbols denoting photo color negative number KMAG— U.S. Military Advisory Group to the Republic of Korea KMC— Korean Marine Corps KMCRCT— Korean Marine Corps Regimental Combat Regiment KPR— Kimpo Provisional Regiment KTACS—Korean Tactical Air Control System KVA— Korean Volunteer Army LANTIRN— Low Altitude Navigation and Targeting Infrared System for Night LCDR— Lieutenant Commander

Acronyms and Abbreviations LCM— Landing Craft, Mechanized LCOL (also Lt. Col)–Lieutenant Colonel LCVP— Landing Craft, Vehicle and Personnel LG— Landing Ground LGB— Laser Guided Bomb Ln— Liaison LSD— Land Ship, Dock LSI(L)— Landing Ship, Infantry (Large) LSM— Landing Ship Medium LSMR— Landing Ship, Medium Rocket LST— Landing Ship, Tank LSTH— Landing Ship, Tank Casualty Evacuation LSU— Landing Ship, Utility 1LT— First Lieutenant 2LT— Second Lieutenant Lt— Lieutenant Lt Col (also LCOL)— Lieutenant Colonel LTGen— Lieutenant General LTJG— Lieutenant ( Junior Grade) LVT— Landing Vehicle, Tracked LVT(A)— Landing Vehicle, Tracked (Armored) M4A3E8— Flame Tank, Medium M45— Medium Tank MAC— Military Airlift Command (earlier called MATS) MAC— Military Armistice Commission MAG— Marine Aircraft Group Maj— Major Maj Gen— Major General MAJCOM— Major Command MAJCON— Major Command Controlled Mar— Marine (s) MASH— Mobile Army Surgical Hospital MASRT— Marine Air Support Radar Team MATS— Military Air Transport Service (later called MAC) MAW— Marine Air Wing MAW— Military Airlift Wing MBP— Main Battle Position MDL— Military Demarcation Line MDW— Medical Wing ME— Metalsmith (USN) MedAmb— CoMedical Ambulance Company, USA MedBn— Medical Battalion Memo— Memorandum MGCIS— Marine Ground Control Intercept Squadron MIA— Missing in Action MiG— Soviet Fighter Aircraft

Acronyms and Abbreviations MILSTAR— Military Strategic and Tactical Relay MISD— Military Intelligence Service Detachment (USA) MLR— Main Line of Resistance MM— Machinist’s Mate (USN) MMS— Munitions Maintenance Squadron MN— Mineman (USN) MOH— Medal of Honor MOS— Military Occupational Speciality Mosquito— North American AT-6 “Texan” Trainer, Single Engine Plane used as Airborne FAC and Target Spotting MP— Military Police MPCo— Military Police Company MPQ— Ground Radar Controlled Bombing MS— Manuscript Msg— Message MSR— Main supply route MSTS— Military Sea Transport Service MT— Motor Transport MTACS— Marine Tactical Air Control Squadron MTBn— Motor Transport Battalion MTO— Mediterranean Theater of Operations MUC— Meritorious Unit Commendation Muni— Municipal MW— Missile Wing NAF— Numbered Air Force NAS— Naval Air Station NASA— National Aeronautics and Space Administration NATO— North Atlantic Treaty Organization NavBchGru— Naval Beach Group NAVFE— Naval Forces, Far East NAVSTAR— Navigational Satellite Timing and Ranging NCAS— Night Close-Air Support NCO— Noncommissioned officer NEACP— National Emergency Airborne Command Post NGF— Naval Gun Fire NK— North Korea (n) NKA— North Korean Army NKPA— North Korean People’s Army NORAD— North American Air Defense Command NOTS— Naval Ordnance Test Station NPRJ— National Police Reserve of Japan NSC— National Security Council NUC— Navy Unit Commendation OCAC— Office of the Chief of the Air Corps

20 OCAFF— Office, Chief of Army Field Forces OCMH— Office, Chief of Military History OE-1— Cessna Single-Engine Light Observation Plane Off— Officer OG— Operations Group OL— Operating Location OMS— Organizational Maintenance Squadron ONI— Office of Naval Intelligence OOB— Order of Battle OP— Observation Post OPLR— Outpost Line of Resistance Opn— Operation Opno— Operation Order OpnPlan— Operation Plan ORC— Organized Reserve Corps ORDAmmCo— Ordnance Ammunition Company (USA) OrdBn— Ordnance Battalion OSA— Office of the Secretary of the Army OSI— Office of Strategic Intelligence OY— Consolidated Vultee Light Observation Plane PACAF— Pacific Air Forces (earlier called FEAF) PACCS— Post-attack Command and Control System PB4Y— Consolidated “Privateer”: four-engine patrol plane (USA) PBM— Martin “Mariner”: twin-engine fiying boat (USA) PC— Submarine Chaser PCE— Escort Amphibious Control Vessel PF— Frigate PH— Photographer’s Mate (USN) PhibGru— Amphibious Group PhibTraPacTraining— Command Amphibious Forces, Pacific Fleet PHILCOM— Philippines Command PLA— People’s Liberation Army Plat— Platoon PMAG— Provisional Military Advisory Group PO-2— Polikarpov: light night bomber biplane (Soviet) POW— Prisoner of War PR— Parachute Rigger (USN) Prov— Provisional PUC— Presidential Unit Citation QM— Quartermaster R4D— Douglass Transport (Navy and Marine designation of C-47) R5D— Douglas Four-Engine Transport (Navy and Marine designation of C-54)

21 RAAF— Royal Australian Air Force Rad— Radio RADM— Rear Admiral RAF— Royal Air Force (of Great Britain) R & D— Research and Development RB-26— Douglas “Invader”: twin-engine reconnaissance plane (USA) RCM— Electronic-countermeasure reconnaissance RcnCo— Reconnaissance Company RCT— Regimental Combat Team RD— Radarman (USN) Recon— Reconnaissance Reinf— Reinforced RESCAP— Rescue Combat Air Patrol RktBn— Rocket Battalion RM— Radioman RM— Royal Marines ROK— Republic of Korea (South Korea) ROKA— Republic of Korea Army ROKN— Republic of Korea Navy ROPE— Code name for aircraft decoy system Rpt— Report RQW— Rescue Wing RS— Reconnaissance Squadron RTAFB— Royal Thai(land) Air Force Base RTNAfid— Royal Thai(land) Navy Airfield RTU— Replacement Training Unit RW— Reconnaissance Wing RYCOM— Ryukyus Command SA— Seaman Apprentice SAC— Strategic Air Command SAC— Supporting Arms Center SAGE— Semi-automatic Ground Environment SANACC— State-Army-Navy-Air Force Coordinating Committee SAR— Special Action Report SCAB— Ship Control of Aircraft Bombing SCAJAP— Supreme Commander Allied Powers, Japan SCAP— Supreme Commander, Allied Powers SD— Steward (USN) SEA— Southeast Asia Sec— Section SecDef— Secretary of Defense SecNav— Secretary of the Navy ServBn— Service Battalion SFCP— Spotting Fire Command Post Sgd— Signed SGS— Secretary of the General Staff Sh— Ship’s Serviceman

Acronyms and Abbreviations SigBn— Signal Battalion SigRepCo— Signal Repair Company SK— Storekeeper (USN) SMS— Strategic Missile Squadron SMW— Strategic Missile Wing SMSMarine— Supply Squadron SN— Seaman SO— Sonarman (USN) SOA— Separate Operating Agency SOP— Standard Operating Procedure SOS— Special Operations Squadron SOW— Special Operations Wing SP— Shore Party SPBn— Shore Party Battalion SpOpnsCo— Special Operations Company (USA) SPTW— Support Wing SPW— Space Wing (prior to 1994 [see also SW]) SRAM— Short Range Attack Missile SRS— Strategic Reconnaissance Squadron SRW— Strategic Reconnaissance Wing Sta— Station SW— Strategic Wing prior to 1994; afterwards Space Wing SWA— Southwest Asia T/D— Table of Distribution T/O— Table of Organization TAC— Tactical Air Command TAC— Tactical Air Coordinator TacAir— Tactical Air TACC— Tactical Air Control Center TACP— Tactical Air Control Party TACRON— Tactical Air Control Squadron TAD— Tactical Air Direction TADC— Tactical Air Direction Center TAO— Tactical Air Observer T-AP— Transport Operated by MSTS TAR— Tactical Air Request TARCAP— Tactical Air Reconaissance Combat Air Patrol TAS— Tactical Airlift Squadron TASS— Tactical Air Support Squadron TAW— Tactical Airlift Wing TBM— General Motors “Avenger” Torpedo Bomber TCG— Troop Carrier Group TCVE— Military Sea Transportation Service Aircraft Ferry TCW— Troop Carrier Wing TE— Task Element TEWS— Tactical Electronic Warfare Squadron

Acronyms and Abbreviations TF— Task Force TFS— Tactical Fighter Squadron TFTG— Tactical Fighter Training Group TFTS— Tactical Fighter Training Squadron TFTW— Tactical Fighter Training Wing TFW— Tactical Fighter Wing TG— Task Group TH— Territory of Hawaii TkBn— Tank Battalion TM— Torpedoman’s Mate (USN) TMW— Tactical Missile Wing Tng— Training T/O— Table of Organization TO & E— Table of Organization and Equipment TOT— Time on Target TRK— Truck TRS— Tactical Reconnaissance Squadron TRW— Tactical Reconnaissance Wing prior to 1992; Training Wing after 1993 TTS— Tactical Training Squadron TU— Task Unit TUSLOG— The United States Logistics Group TW— Test Wing UDT— Underwater Demolition Team UF— Unit of Fire UN— United Nations UNC— United Nations Command UNCOK— United Nations Commission in Korea UNCURK— United Nations Commission for the Unification and Rehabilitation of Korea unkn— unknown US— United States (of America) USA— United States Army USAF— United States Air Force USAFA— United States Air Force Academy USAFE— United States Air Forces in Europe USAFIK— United States Army Forces in Korea USAMGIK— United States Army Military Government in Korea

22 USAR— U.S. Army Reserve USARPAC— United States Army, Pacific USCG— U.S. Coast Guard USMC— United States Marine Corps USMCR— United States Marine Corps Reserve USMILAT— U.S. Military Attaché USMA— U.S. Military Academy (West Point) USN— United States Navy USNAS— United States Naval Air Station USSTAF— United States Strategic Air Forces USSR— Union of Soviet Socialist Republics VA— Navy Attack Squadron VA— Veterans Administration VADM— Vice Admiral VFNavy— Fighter Squadron VHB— Very Heavy Bombardment VIP— Very Important Person(s) VNAF— Vietnamese Air Force (Republic of Vietnam or South Vietnam) VMF— Marine Fighter Squadron VMF(N)— Marine Night Fighter Squadron VMO— Marine Observation Type Aircraft (Squadron) VMR— Marine Transport Type Aircraft VMJ— Marine Photographic Squadron VT— Shell Equipped with Proximity Fuse WD— War Department WD— War Diary WG— Wing WESPAC— Western Pacific WIA— Wounded in Action WP— White Phosphorus Shell Yak-9— Yakovlev “Frank”: single-engine fighter (Soviet) Yak-18— Yakovlev: single-engine trainer (Soviet) YMS— Motor Minesweeper YN— Yeoman YTB— Harbor Tug, Big YW— District Barge ZI— Zone of Interior

THE CHRONOLOGY

1950 January 1950

An association known as IPR (Institute of Pacific Relations), since as early as the mid–1930s, according to the Internal Security Subcommittee of the U.S. Senate, has been dominated by pro–Communist and pro–Soviet sympathies. Also, the Reece committee, called to investigate tax-exempt foundations, notes: “Nor does the point need to be labored that the loss of China to the Communists may have been the most tragic event in our [U.S.] history, and one to which the foundation-supported Institute of Pacific Relations heavily contributed.” IPR is a private organization, branched in ten separate countries and composed of ten separate national councils, with its main Headquarters in New York. Wall Street plays a principal part in the success of IPR: its primary contributors include the Carnegie and Rockefeller foundations, funded by the Morgans and the Rockefellers. Also, Chase National Bank, National City Bank, Standard Oil, International Telephone and Telegraph and International General Electric contribute; contributions poured heavily into IPR, apparently due to the connection between them and the banking interests of the Rockefellers and the Morgans. As the U.S. nears entrance into the Korean Conflict, the Rhodes Conspiracy theory again surfaces (secret society to spread British upper-class lifestyle); the Round Table Groups extend their organization; in New York, according to Professor Carroll Quigley, the front for the organization is the Council on Foreign Relations, which in turn is a front for J.P. Morgan and Company. Quigley, later (1960s) acknowledges the conspiracy, stating: “There is a conspiracy, and I should know because I am closely connected to it.” Quigley, in his book proclaims: “This network which we may identify as round table groups has no aversion to cooperating with the Communists, or any other groups, and frequently does so.”

Negotiations between the South Korean Army and the National Police, brokered by KMAG (U.S. military advisory group to the Republic of Korea) advisors, have brought about a plan to train about 10,000 policemen for combat. The blueprint calls for twenty-two police battalions, each composed of 112 men. Initially, more than 100 police officers are sent to the Korean Army Infantry School to become familiarized with tactics and subsequently become military officers. The plan never really gets off the ground due to the lack of funding. By May, only one battalion is genuinely mustered for the field. Colonel Harold Krohn, KMAG advisor to the National Police, in a report dated June 15, states that no combat police battalions had been placed in the field prior to that month. The Army has great difficulty getting its units to receive training, as the Communists guerrillas maintain their activity, keeping the Army busy.

January 5 In the United States: President Truman proclaims that the United States will not initiate, either directly or indirectly, any Military action to intercede on behalf of the Nationalist Chinese under Chiang Kai-shek on Formosa. Chiang Kai-shek and his top aides fled from the mainland to Formosa during December, along with many of the nationalist troops. A Chinese Communist attack against the island stronghold is anticipated. Within a week, the situation in the Far East becomes more confusing when the secretary of state proclaims that the U.S. would act to defend Japan, the Philippines and Okinawa, eliminating Korea from the protection of U.S. forces. Nevertheless, the KMAG advisors continue to train the South Koreans. — In Guam: The Fleet Marine Force is removed from Guam. It returns to California. The final elements depart on 25 April. — In Japan: An intelligence report comes into Gen23

March 10, 1950 eral Headquarters indicating that the Communists in North Korea will launch an invasion of South Korea during March or April; it further defines the movement of the 3rd North Korean Division into the western sector of the 38th Parallel, the deployment of the 2nd North Korean Division to the south and continued arrivals of Chinese troops. These facts and the increasing size of the border Constabulary force point to military action. The reports are forwarded to Washington by the Far East Command, but the U.S. has shown little interest in defending Korea.

March 10

In Japan: Another intelligence report from Korea predicts a North Korean invasion as early as spring but undoubtedly by the fall, then pins it down: “Latest reports received that the North Korean P.A. [People’s Army] will invade South Korea in June.” MacArthur, again forwards the information to Washington. Korea is not under the responsibility of MacArthur, rather the State Department, and the few troops (500 advisors) still in Korea report to the American ambassador. The training of police combat battalions remains well behind schedule. About mid–March, the South Korean Army puts out a second memo intended to get all contingents through a thirteen-week training schedule (battalion) by June 1 and the regimental phase by the end of June.

March 15 In the United States: Congress approves a request for additional $10,970,000 in aid to Korea in response to a request from General William Roberts and Ambassador Muccio made in December 1949. Because of a priority position assigned to Korea by the Joint Chiefs of Staff, the bulk of requested equipment is not available in the war-reserve stocks and must be procured from commercial sources, which delays delivery. By June 25, the day the Communists invade South Korea, about $1,000 worth of supplies have been delivered and about $300,000 in Signal Corps equipment and spare parts are in transit. According to testimony given later during Congressional hearings, one KMAG officer stated that prior to the outbreak of hostilities, only about $250 worth of wire had been received in Korea. These developments greatly concern the KMAG advisors. April 1950

In Japan: In response to a recent request from General MacArthur for the Navy and Marine Corps to provide amphibious training for the Army troops in Japan, a Marine instruction team commanded by Col. Edward Forney arrives. The Marines jump at the opportunity to accommodate General MacArthur, especially considering General Bradley’s predicted demise of the corps. Subsequently, a small amphibious force and support elements, including aviation personnel, join the instructors in Japan.

April 5

The Seventh Fleet, commanded by Admiral Struble and based in the Philippines, is off the shores of Korea. Planes attached to Air Group 5 (top jettrained unit in the Pacific), zoom from the Valley Forge

24 and fly a parade formation over Inchon and Seoul, then several days later the jets repeat the ceremonial flight over Hong Kong. The Seventh Fleet comes under the jurisdiction of Admiral Radford, not General MacArthur.

April 15

In Japan: General Headquarters receives another of its intelligence documents; this one verifies that the Communists directed the evacuation of all civilians living within three miles of the 38th Parallel. Soon after evacuation, the memo advises, North Korean troops and guerrillas took over the empty living quarters. This information is dispatched to Washington.

May 9

In China: The Communist Chinese government announces it will release two American aviators that it has held since 19 October 1948, when their plane was forced down in Manchuria. The two men, Master Sergeant Elmer C. Bender, U.S. Marine Corps, and William C. Smith, U.S. Navy (electrician’s mate), state upon their release that they had to admit to espionage to get their release.

May 25 In Japan: Activity in North Korea is accelerating, according to an intelligence dispatch from operatives in Korea. The message discloses recent inspection of all Army units and it identifies seven different divisions. The message also reiterates its previously dispatched information concerning the infusion of Chinese troops. General Headquarters is informed about the compulsory service in the North Korean Armed Forces, confirming that between 100,000 and 150,000 youths have been inducted. General MacArthur and the Far East Command still have no authority over Korea or Formosa, as they have been the wards of the State Department. Nonetheless, MacArthur’s G-2 instinctively had formed a small and inconspicuous intelligence unit; Korean Liaison Office (KLO). Seemingly, the information contained in the nearly 2,000 messages forwarded to Washington had been disregarded. Within one month, a heavy price will be paid for the inattention. The South Korean Armed Forces are composed of ten divisions; however in direct opposition to MacArthur, the Koreans had been trained for Constabulary duty, not front line combat. In contrast, the North Koreans were well trained and their guns were pointed toward South Korea. Kaesong, which had been attacked by Communists in August 1949, is again raided during May 1950. Late May In the U.S. Far East Command: Extensive fleet exercises occur in the waters between the Philippine Islands and Korea, including warships of the Seventh Fleet and many of Vice Admiral Charles Turner Joy’s command (General MacArthur’s Naval commander). The operation takes place as ships are turning over, affording extra vessels. The Seventh Fleet, upon completion of the maneuvers, is scheduled to arrive back in Manila by the 4th of July, pay a subsequent visit to Hong Kong and stop in Japan during the summer.

25

June 1950

In the United States: U.S. Army strength is officially listed at 591,000, although its authorized strength is capped at 630,000. It is composed of ten combat divisions, nine separate regimental combat teams and the postwar Constabulary (Germany), which is approximate to one division. Of these, four divisions are deployed in Japan: the 7th (Honshu — northern sector), 24th (Kyushu), 25th (Honshu—southern sector) and the 1st Cavalry (Infantry), deployed in the Kanto Plain within the central sector of Honshu. Only the 1st Cavalry (Infantry) is at full strength. Although the division in Europe comprises a full complement, the remaining combat units are below full strength, including the battalion composition standing at two per regiment, rather than three. Artillery units are similarly reduced in size and equipment; firing batteries are depleted from three to two. Other exceptions are the 24th Regiment, 25th Division, which has a full complement of three battalions, and the 159th Field Artillery Battalion, which is composed of three firing batteries. In essence, American combat units stand at about 70 percent of full strength. To add to the concern, the tank units are using the light M24 tank. Available equipment for the U.S. Army qualifies as near archaic and has been exposed to extensive use during World War II. These figures contrast sharply to the 89 divisions that comprised the U.S. Army during 1945. During June, the U.S. Navy, comprised of 377,000 troops and 670 vessels (active), has nearly one-third of its vessels in the Pacific under the command of Admiral Arthur W. Radford, with 20 percent of this force stationed in the Far East at Tokyo, under the command of Vice Admiral Charles Turner Joy. Joy’s staff is composed of 29 officers. In addition, the U.S. Navy has about 4,300 operational aircraft of all types. The warships operating close to Japan are: Amphibious Force, under Rear Admiral J.H. Doyle—USS Arikara (ATT 98), USS Cavalier (APA 37), USS Mt. McKinley (AGC 7), USS Union (AKA 106) and the LST 611; Support Force, under Rear Admiral J. M. Higgins — Cruiser USS Juneau, Destroyers USS Colett, Dehaven, Mansfield and Swenson; and Auxiliary Motor Minesweepers — USS Chatterer, Kite, Mocking Bird, Osprey, Partridge and the Red Head. Since the initial days of occupation, their principal activity has been to patrol the waters of the Tsushima Strait to prevent smugglers from operating between Korea and Japan, and to patrol the waters off the Ryukyus to eliminate the Chinese pirate vessels (in southwest Japan, between Taiwan and Japan). The island chain, composed of Amami Islands (part of Kagoshima prefecture), the Okinawa Islands, and the Sakishima Islands, separates the East China Sea from the Philippine Sea. Other duties include displaying the U.S. colors at Japanese ports and maintaining training exercises to keep the fleet ready while holding vigil. Also, the Seventh Fleet, commanded by Vice Admiral Stru-

June 15, 1950 ble, is dispersed between Hong Kong, Sangley Point and Subic Bay (Philippines); it is composed of two carriers and eight destroyers and has fundamentally practiced its peacetime mission, spending a great amount of time displaying the U.S. flag in the various ports of the Orient. Seventh Fleet vessels are: the Carriers USS Rochester (CA) and USS Valley Forge (CV), the Destroyers USS Brush, USS Eversole, USS Fletcher, USS Maddox, USS S.N. Moore, USS Radford, USS Shelton and the USS Taussig. The Marine Corps’ is basically domiciled in the United States, with its 1st Marine Division at Camp Pendleton (West Coast) and the 2nd Marine Division stationed at Camp Lejeune, North Carolina, except for one battalion, which is in the Mediterranean with the fleet. Neither Marine division is at full strength. The journey by sea from the U.S. West Coast to Pusan, Korea, varies in time. Personnel make the trip in about sixteen days; however, travel time is much greater for the ships transporting heavy equipment and supplies. Also, at the beginning of June, the U.S. Air Force is composed of 48 Groups (Air Wings). Far East Air Forces (FEAF), the biggest contingent outside the continental U.S., is commanded by General George Stratemeyer and is composed of nine groups, outfitted with approximately 350 operational planes. Air Force fighter strength stands at 18 squadrons and troop strength stands at about 33,625 (officers and enlisted), although its authorized strength is 39,975. Total aircraft for FEAF is listed at 1,172, but the figure includes many in storage or being salvaged. The Military Air Transport Service, Pacific Division, operating between the U.S. and the Far East, is composed of about 60 four-engine transports, supplemented by MATS C-74s and C-97s. The planes shuttle between the States and Hawaii. This force will quadruple after the outbreak of war in Korea. The U.S. Reserve Forces total more than two and one-half million men, with the majority of the troops being in the National Guard and Organized Reserve Corps. The National Guard is composed of 325,000 troops and twenty-seven divisions, none at full strength. The Organized Reserve Corps stands at 186,000 troops, most of whom serve with combat support units and service contingents. In addition, the ROTC (Reserve Officer Training Corps) is composed of 219,000 students enrolled either in high school or college.

June 2

In the United States: The Naval Academy graduating class at Annapolis is composed of 690 midshipmen; forty-eight of these accept commissions in the Marine Corps.

June 15 The ongoing program to combat-train the South Korean police battalions and army units remains behind schedule. The bulk of the contingents have not completed the courses, but by this time, all Korean troops have fired their rifles for qualification. In conjunction, some police battalions replace S.K. Army units to handle internal security, which permits army

June 18, 1950 battalions to return to their bases to receive training. Schedules for the completion of training are again raised, and pushed back from June to July 31 for battalion courses and the end of October for regimental training. All the while, Korean leadership qualities have been below standard and slow coming. In related activity, KMAG reports that the Korean Coast Guard stands at only about 70 percent of capacity. It contains 105 vessels, but only 58 are serviceable and the number includes fishing vessels. There has been movement toward detaching the Coast Guard advisors and reassigning them under the State Department as a cost-cutting plan. KMAG stipulates that regardless of which department controls the expenses, the advisors are still quite necessary. In addition, the U.S. is in the process of reducing U.S. Army operations in Korea during fiscal 1951. The Korean Air Force contains ten Harvard trainers and consists of twelve operable liaison planes. KMAG makes it known that because of the current situation, including the condition of the armed forces and lack of operational equipment and supplies, the South Koreans will be able to mount only a defensive operation. If hostilities occur it is thought the South Koreans can hold no longer than fifteen days. KMAG also makes it clear that “Korea is threatened with the same disaster that befell China.” Simply put, KMAG sounds the alarm that the Communists could overrun Korea if they choose to ignite hostilities. The North Koreans have been on an escalating warfooting, supported by the Russians who have bolstered the North’s capabilities since the close of World War II. Several thousand North Koreans have received training in the Soviet Union and the Soviets have contributed large numbers of advisors and training instructors to assist the build-up. In addition, the North Koreans have received from the Russians great numbers of equipment, including artillery, fighter planes and tanks. In other activity, General William Roberts departs Korea. Colonel Sterling Wright, the chief of staff, assumes command of KMAG until Major Frank Keating arrives from the States. However, Keating chooses to retire rather than move to Korea. In the interim, Colonel Wright is instructed to remain until another replacement for Keating arrives. Lt. Colonel Carl Sturies has temporary control of the advisory group. Colonel Wright is scheduled to depart Korea to attend the Industrial College of the Armed Forces in the United States. — In the United States: At Quantico, Va., combat demonstrations are exhibited for President Truman to show him why the Marine Corps should receive a larger share of the budget. The Marines showcase an assault landing launched from carrier-based helicopters to spotlight the speed with which troops and their supplies can be ferried from the sea to targets behind enemy lines. The president expresses no desire to pass the buck and, in a touch of sarcasm, places his hand on a howitzer, implying that he puts his confidence in it.

26

June 18 In the Philippines: Admiral Struble, having been in the Philippines several days to confer with Louis Johnson, secretary of defense, and General Bradley, chairman, Joint Chiefs of Staff, departs Manila for Pearl Harbor to speak with Admiral Arthur Radford. The discussions in Manila focus primarily on the potential dangers that could prompt trouble in Japan, Indochina and even Formosa. Another topic is the cauldron simmering in the Philippines with the Huks, but Korea is not discussed, although it comes under the umbrella of the Seventh Fleet. General Bradley and Louis Johnson, during their stay in the Far East, also visit Japan. From Hawaii, Struble heads for the States for a conference with Admiral Forrest Sherman before attending his daughter’s wedding. In his absence, Rear Admiral J. M. Hoskins, commanding officer of Carrier Division 3, assumes temporary command of Seventh Fleet. June 23

Lt. Colonel Thomas McPhail, KMAG advisor to the Republic of Korea (ROK) 6th Division, has become concerned about possible enemy incursions. McPhail bases his conclusions on various missions his intelligence units have executed. Recent reconnaissance missions have uncovered new enemy infantry units, camouflaged tanks and antiaircraft batteries, all within striking distance of the South Korean positions below the 38th Parallel. Lt. Colonel McPhail convinces General Kim, the S.K. 6th Division commander, to cancel all weekend leaves and to ensure that all defensive fortifications are totally manned. The 6th S.K. Division guards the approaches to Chunchon, which during the past several weeks, has received its baptism under fire, while engaging enemy guerrillas who had crossed the border between Chunchon and Kangnung. The intelligence has been forwarded by McPhail to his superior officers, but there is still no thought of an enemy invasion. Meanwhile, other S.K. units, on either flank of the 6th Division, are unprepared and less trained as the weekend of the 23rd approaches.

June 24

There is no suspicion of an invasion by North Korea. Four South Korean divisions and one regiment are deployed defensively to react to hostilities, but only four regiments and one battalion are posted near the front lines below the 38th Parallel. The remainder are stationed to the rear. Many of the South Koreans and the KMAG advisors are on weekend liberty when the invasion occurs.

June 25–June 28

THE INVASION OF SOUTH KOREA At 0400 on June 25, the sudden roar of artillery and mortars, accompanied by the shriek of bugles and clanging armor, jolts the South Koreans and their American advisors into a hellish war. Blackened skies are illuminated by crimson streaks of unrelenting fire along the 38th Parallel, across the entire peninsula. The North Korean I Corps strikes southward with feverish pitch. It pounds against the Ongjin peninsula and the other border areas on the east, as they press toward Chunchon. After the initial

27 shock, South Korean units of the 17th Regiment return fire, but it is insufficient to halt the attack. Units of the N.K. II Corps stream across the border, ravaging everything in their path as they pounce on South Korean positions near Chunchon and Hongch’on, farther east. The blistering attack is not totally synchronized. Some of the staggered fire commences as late as 0500. Nonetheless, much of the potent firepower far outdistances anything in the South Korean arsenal. The flying terror creates a great deal of panic and confusion south of the border. North Korea, which has become an armed fortress through the support of the Kremlin, has quietly placed about seven infantry divisions and one armored division close to the 38th Parallel. Slightly to the rear are thousands of reinforcements. Subsequent to the invasion, the North Koreans will claim that they had reacted to a South Korean incursion and had ordered a counterattack, but on June 8, more than two weeks prior to the opening of hostilities, newspapers in Pyongyang (North Korea) proclaimed through a manifesto that a parliament would be elected during early August. In conjunction, a meeting is scheduled to convene in Seoul on August 15, making it clear that the Communists anticipated total control of Korea by mid–August. The postwar strategy of the Soviets (Bolsheviks) to gain power by cunning use of its satellites and fellow travelers has been unfolding according to plan. While the strategic eyes of the U.S. are focused on Europe, a tranquil and rainy Sunday morning is transformed into a cauldron of horror as about 90,000 crack North Korean troops, many trained in the Soviet Union, burst across the 38th Parallel, spearheaded by Soviet-made tanks. Swarms of screaming troops, foliage sprouting from their uniforms and helmets, attack and scorch the earth. The advance is effortless at many of the selected targets, as the South Koreans lack planes, tanks, and antitank weapons, which compels many of them to retreat in disarray. Synchronized unopposed air attacks also occur. Seoul, the embattled capital of South Korea, and Kimpo Airfield are struck by several air raids before day’s end. The ugly combination of air, ground and armor attacks wreaks havoc on soldiers and civilians alike. Crushed and burning buildings are commonplace. Throngs of bewildered civilians flee in absolute fright under the echo of guns. Trembling children are scattered about the line of retreat. Some children are dead, others are huddled in fear, adding to the gloom. The initial fighting during the contest is lopsided. Later, one South Korean who was there described the defense and likened it to “throwing eggs at a rock.” Observations after the fact reveal many South Korean dead who are piled in irregular layers and others, merely tossed in singular lines, lying prone in unnatural positions, their hands tied behind their backs.

June 25, 1950 Meanwhile, the American advisors, meager in number (fewer than 500), are unable to provide any genuine assistance. No U.S. combat troops are in Korea. Few aircraft remain and none of those are available to the South Koreans. The dilemma of the Americans is seriously compounded because few of the South Korean troops speak English. Once the North Koreans infiltrate, it is impossible to distinguish friend from foe. It becomes increasingly apparent that the United States is ill-prepared to immediately halt the Sovietbacked North Korean invaders and unprepared to neutralize Communist aggression in the Far East. However, at the moment, word of the invasion has not yet reached Washington. Incursions along the border have been frequently occurring for many months; therefore, the U.S. Embassy initially assumes it is just another pesky provocation. This conclusion is shattered at 1100, when North Korean Premier Kim Il Sung proclaims over the radio that a full-scale invasion had been launched. As the juggernaut begins moving west to east, the isolated Ongjin peninsula, bound on three sides by water and on the north by the 38th Parallel, is struck solidly by the N.K. I Corps. At about 0400, Ongjin, which covers about 26 air miles of mountainous terrain along the 38th Parallel, is pounded by artillery of the 14th Regiment, 6th North Korean Division and the Constabulary troops of the 3rd Brigade. These fierce artillery attacks are followed about onehalf hour later by ground forces. Swiftly, the beleaguered undermanned 17th Regiment (ROK), commanded by Colonel Paik. In Yup, and its five American advisors are imperiled. One battered battalion is wiped out. The remainder of the regiment is compelled to withdraw toward the sea. There is one ferry crossing, located on the eastern side of the peninsula, from where the boats travel across Haeju Bay to the mainland. Emergency calls from Ongjin are picked up in Seoul at 0600. By 0900, another desperate plea filters into headquarters. The message urgently requests air evacuation. Two American pilots flying L-5 planes depart Seoul and extricate the American advisors. Meanwhile, previously laid-out evacuation plans are set in motion to salvage the battered regiment. Three LSTs (landing ship tanks) answer the call and rescue the survivors on the following day. Farther east, across the water from the Ongjin peninsula, lies Kaesong. It is about two miles south of the 38th Parallel. The town is defended by two battalions of the 12th Regiment, 1st S.K. Division, which are deployed slightly north of the town. Another battalion is strung out about 20 miles to the west at Yonan. Meanwhile, the 13th Regiment holds positions east of Kaesong, near the Imjin River at Korangp’o-ri. Also, the 11th Regiment (reserve) and headquarters are deployed further south at Suisak, slightly north of Seoul. At approximately 0500, the 13th and 15th Regiments, N.K. 6th Division, crash

June 25, 1950

28

A Douglas C-54 military transport plane hit during a raid on Kimpo Airfield by North Korean planes on 28 June. across the border in a two-pronged move. Many troops spring from Songaksan (Hill 475), which spreads along the 38th Parallel above Kaesong. Another contingent, about regimental strength, arrives by train, using tracks that had been secretly re-laid north of the 38th Parallel just prior to the invasion. The sole American advisor at the 38th Parallel at the onset of the invasion is Captain Joseph R. Darrigo, who is awakened by the sounds of guns. Immediately he rushes into Kaesong, where he spots the enemy troops as they bounce from the rail cars. There is little time to react when the one-sided fight erupts. By 0930, Kaesong falls along with Yonan. The defenders are decimated. Only two companies of the S.K. 12th Regiment escape death or capture. Darrigo makes it safely to Munsan-ni. In conjunction, at daybreak in Seoul, Colonel Rockwell, USA, is contacted by S.K. Colonel Paik, who informs him of the invasion. Paik then phones headquarters at Suisak and orders the 11th Regiment and other contingents to rush to Munsan-ni-Korangp’o-ri and reinforce the 13th Regiment at the Imjin River Bridge, the predetermined spot to form a strong defense line. With great rapidity, the 13th Regiment reaches its destination and becomes engaged in fierce fighting for several days against elements of the N.K. 1st Division and its supporting tanks. Lacking antitank equipment, courageous yet reckless volunteers of the 13th Regiment affix explosives to themselves and individually charge the enemy

armor. Others board the tanks and attempt to drop grenades down the hatch. These and other types of suicidal actions near the Imjin Bridge knock out several tanks, but after the quick loss of about ninety men, few others volunteer. The Imjin River bridge at Munsan-ni is to be blown as soon as the 12th Regiment is safely across, but with the enemy on the heels of the regiment, the plan fails, and the bridge is seized intact. Enemy control of the key bridge creates additional problems for the weary defenders; however, despite the overwhelming enemy superiority, the S.K. 1st Division holds the line at Korangp’o-ri nearly three days before it withdraws to the Han River to escape envelopment and slaughter by the enemy units in the Uijongbu Corridor. Adding to the dreary plight of the S.K. 1st Division, American planes inadvertently attack them on the 28th. The aircraft, under orders to destroy enemy columns and decimate “organized troops north of the Han River,” strike the retreating unit with rockets and machine gun fire, causing heavy casualties. In a most unusual display of morale boosting, Colonel Paik, speaking to his men after the accidental raid, states: “You did not think the Americans would help us. Now you know better.” While the multi-pronged assault unwinds, the eye of the blistering attack moves full-throttle down the Uijongbu Corridor. Units of the N.K. 105th Armored Brigade smash into contingents of the S.K. 7th Division, commanded by Brigadier General Yu

29 Jai Hyung. The 1st Regiment, which is deployed along the 38th Parallel, feels the sting. During the initial fighting, which erupts about 0530, the 1st Regiment takes severe losses. Tanks of the N.K. 105th Armored Brigade support the 3rd and 4th N.K. Divisions as they penetrate toward Seoul. About 40 tanks of the 107th Tank Regiment, followed by the N.K. 4th Division, spring from positions near Yonch’on. They advance along the western road and drive toward Tongduch’on-ni and hammer the S.K. 3rd Regiment. One enemy unit, the 16th N.K. Regiment, sustains heavy losses before the South Koreans lose the town toward the end of the day. Synchronized with the 4th Division, the N.K. 3rd Division, bolstered by about 40 tanks of the 109th Tank Regiment, smash their way down the eastern route. They grind along the P’och’on Road (Kumhwa-Uijongbu-Seoul Road), which is defended by the S.K. 9th Regiment. As the enemy rumbles down the two separate highways which join at Uijongbu, the overmatched South Koreans take high casualties, prompting an ROK officer to send an emergency call to Seoul for reinforcements as early as 0830. He states that all available forces had been committed. The dual dagger of the enemy pushes forward. The N.K. 3rd Division reaches the steps of P’och’on, but pulls back during the night. On the morning of the 26th, the town is taken without opposition, which permits the 3rd Division to immediately drive toward Uijongbu. The S.K. Army High Command in Seoul reacts shortly after 0930 on the 25th. It sends reserve forces north to launch a counterattack in the Uijongbu Corridor. The first troops to begin rushing north are contingents of the 2nd S.K. Division at Taejon, commanded by General Lee Hyung Koon. At 1430, some American advisors, elements of the 5th Regiment and Division Headquarters move by rail from Taejon toward Seoul. Other KMAG advisors with the S.K. 2nd Division are scattered at other locations, such as Anjung-ni, Ch’ongju and Yongju. These advisors also rush to Seoul. At about darkness, contingents of the S.K. 5th Division depart Kwangju in southwest Korea heading north, and troops of the S.K. 3rd Division advance from Taegu, ninety miles below Seoul. Initially, the S.K. 3rd Division has little knowledge of the unfolding invasion. Its Commander, Colonel Yu Sung Yul, and the senior KMAG advisor, Lt. Colonel Rollins Emmerich, are in Chinju, attending a conference. They learn of the attack during their return to Taegu. By the time Emmerich arrives back at Taegu, at about 1800, elements of the S.K. 3rd Division and three KMAG advisors are en route to Seoul. Like the other American advisors, those in Taegu are unsure of what their role has become with the opening of hostilities. Meanwhile, back in the United States, during a specially called session of the U.N. General Assembly on the 25th, the North Koreans are directed to halt their aggression and return across the 38th Par-

June 25, 1950 allel, but the directive is ignored. Two days later, on the 27th, President Truman commits air and naval forces to aid the South Koreans. Soon after, at the request of General MacArthur, U.S. ground troops are on their way to Korea. Ironically, many in the U.S. thought the infantry and the amphibious forces had been rendered obsolete by the creation of the atomic bomb. But it is the infantry which gets the call to arms as the U.S. goes to war under the auspices of the United Nations. This is called a “police action.” Across the 38th Parallel, The N.K. 2nd Division (II Corps) moves from H’wachon, just above the border, to replace Constabulary troops, then attack Chunchon, a primary road junction near the border along the Pukhan River. The division anticipates an effortless early morning victory. The N.K. 7th Division advances from Inje toward Hongch’on, several miles farther south. To their surprise, the ROK 6th Division stands ready for the fight. No weekend passes had been handed out, and the unit is at full strength. The N.K. 2nd Division’s 6th Regiment winds down the river road, and the 4th Regiment moves over Peacock Mountain, both expecting to converge for victory at Chunchon. But determined resistance greets the advance. Heavily fortified concrete pillboxes scattered atop the crest of a towering hill just north of the town foil the plot. The 2nd Division’s incessant accurate fire delays the enemy timetable and scores well against the N.K. 6th Regiment. South Korean resistance is resolute, which forces the North Koreans to change strategy. On the 25th, the N.K. 7th Division en route to Hongch’on is ordered to pivot and reinforce the 2nd Division on the 25th. The farthest point of battle from the Ongjin peninsula is the east coast, where the remaining North Korean troops are staged in the vicinity of the Taebaek Mountains, near Inje. Their mission is to secure the eastern mountains. The N.K. 5th Division and the 766th Independent Unit, bolstered by guerrilla contingents, are perched for the border crossing. Facing the enemy is the S.K. 8th Division, which is deployed in a near vertical line. Its 10th Regiment guards the border. Headquarters stands at Kangnung, about 15 miles south of the border. The 21st Regiment is garrisoned 25 miles further south at Samch’ok, but when the invasion commences at about 0500, most of its troops are scattered throughout the Taebaek Mountains eradicating Communist guerrillas. Six KMAG advisors, including Major Gerald E. Larsen, the chief advisor, are at headquarters in Kangnung with the 10th Regiment when the invasion begins. Major George Kessler is at Scamch’ok. The 10th Regiment becomes heavily engaged with elements of the N.K. 5th Division and the 766th Independent Unit. Enemy guerrillas execute amphibious landings above and below Samch’ok, defended by the S.K. 21st Regiment. In concert, two battalions of the N.K. 766th Independent Unit debark near

June 25, 1950 Kangnung. Again, overpowering Communist force makes the South Korean positions untenable. Fighting remains heavy throughout the day, but previously prepared withdrawal plans are being quickly activated. Elements of the 21st Regiment rush antitank guns to the water’s edge near Samch’ok and commence fire against some offshore vessels. The South Koreans sink two vessels; the remainder departs the area. Up to this point, Major Kessler and the advisors at Samch’ok remain unaware that the incursion is part of a full-scale invasion. On the following day, the S.K. 10th Regiment continues buying priceless time at the border, while the remainder of the 8th Division prepares to evacuate Kangnung and head south for Pusan. Fighting across the peninsula on the 26th remains ferocious, but enemy tanks ensure continued success. South Koreans, having only antipersonnel mines in their arsenal, remain disadvantaged. The diverted N.K. 7th Division reaches Chunchon during the evening of the 26th, adding its tanks to the battle, but the S.K. 6th Division still inflicts punishment upon the enemy. The bitter combat rages continually into the 27th, but relentless enemy pressure finally collapses both flanks of the defenders. At this crucial point, orders arrive that instruct the beleaguered S.K. 6th Division to withdraw farther south. Subsequent to a South Korean pull-back on the 28th, the 2nd and 7th N.K. Divisions, led by nine tanks, enter a charred Chunchon. Nonetheless, for this prize, the North Koreans have paid a high price. Their 2nd Division sustains about 40 percent casualties and the 6th Regiment incurs more than 50 percent casualties. The N.K. 7th Division sustains moderate casualties. In addition, the North Koreans lose about 16 self-propelled guns (SU 76-mm) and other assorted weapons. The seizure of Chunchon opens the way for the 7th Division to resume its trek toward Hongch’on. In conjunction, the N.K. 2nd Division marches directly toward Seoul. On the 26th, in the S.K. 7th Division sector north of Uijongbu, General Yu Jai Hyung launches a solid counterattack against the N.K. 4th Division, but the inflicted losses are not severe enough to halt the advance. Inaccurate battle reports claim the destruction of 58 enemy tanks and the capture of 1,580 North Korean troops, greatly confusing South Korean strategy. In conjunction, General Lee fails to order two available battalions of the S.K. 2nd Division to attack. Consequently, the South Korean counterattack is weakened. General Lee, convinced an attack would be futile, keeps his command in defensive positions along the P’och’on Road, about two miles northeast of Uijongbu. At 0800 (26th), North Koreans encroach their positions. Initially they are met with artillery and small arms fire. The accompanying tanks take the hits, but the shells bounce off harmlessly. Subsequent to a short pause, the armor blows through the South Korean defenses and rolls into Uijongbu. In the

30 wake, the N.K. 7th Regiment barges into the two battalions of the S.K. 2nd Division, and shreds its ranks. Faced with total envelopment, the survivors make it to the nearby hills. The collapse of the S.K. 2nd Division forces the S.K. 7th Division to abort its attack, which had been advancing up the western road. The 7th retires to more tenable positions below Uijongbu. As the invaders deepen their penetration, the South Koreans’ plight deteriorates drastically. In retrospect, the decision by General Chae, S.K. chief of staff, to delegate responsibility to the 2nd Division to hold the P’och’on Road proves to be a mortal wound. The 2nd Division had been unable to field a full division for the task. The night of the 26th causes more apprehension for the South Koreans, whose forces are being pounded at every point. In Seoul, the government considers evacuation, but a heated debate in the General Assembly concludes with a decision to remain in the capital. Nonetheless, without informing the American advisors (KMAG), S.K. Army Headquarters departs the beleaguered city on the morning of the 27th, heading for Yongdungp’o, about five miles farther south. Also, at about 0900, Ambassador Muccio and his staff move to Suwon. Colonel Wright and KMAG move to Sihung-ni and persuade General Chae to return to Seoul. Chae’s headquarters arrives back in Seoul about 1800, but by this time, the original confidence of those in the capital has vanished, being replaced by an aura of bewilderment. Colonel Wright had received several messages from General MacArthur, urging him to “repair to your former locations. Momentous decisions are in the offing. Be of good cheer.” Another message from MacArthur informs Wright that MacArthur will be placed in command of all troops in Korea. Meanwhile, the surviving South Korean units are still being wracked by the relentless enemy advances. The S.K. 1st Division is endangered at Korangp’o-ri, as the 3rd and 4th N.K. Divisions, moving from Uijongbu, close on it in coordination with the N.K. 1st Division, which is driving from their immediate eastern flank. Also, the remaining operational units of the 2nd, 5th and Capital (Palace Guard) Divisions and the 7th S.K. Division are engaged in separate and uncoordinated delaying actions. Combined, they are still unable to forestall the tenacious enemy advance toward Seoul. As the North Koreans gallop south, President Syngman Rhee continues to plead for help from the United Nations. Some of the South Korean units fight bravely, but most have been trained only for Constabulary duty. Many of them retreat in disorganized fashion to escape the surging Soviet-made T34 tanks, the ring of automatic weapons and the menacing sting of the burp guns. As the Republic of Korea forces hurriedly retire, huge, irregular columns of civilians, most transporting colossal loads upon their backs, flee south from their homes near

31 the 38th Parallel. This unanticipated activity clogs the paths and roads, which are now under constant strafing by Soviet-made aircraft. In addition, great numbers of ROK forces have abandoned the military and changed into peasant clothes to blend into the panicstricken civilian flight. But there is no sanctuary in Seoul. The government prepares for evacuation to forestall total defeat. By the 27th, it becomes inevitable that the ROK forces cannot hold the capital. The Communists, taking advantage of the expanding confusion, dispatch planes, which deposit leaflets to entice the populace to surrender. This is in coordination with a radio broadcast by N.K. Field Marshal Choe Yong Gun, who also requests surrender. The pleas for capitulation are ignored; however, most of the precautionary plans to meet any pending threat are never implemented. Roadblocks are fabricated, but left unguarded. The bridges are not blown and, with few exceptions, the fabricated obstacles are not covered by defensive fire. Consequently, the rampaging North Koreans face an unobstructed path to Seoul. One small contingent from the ROK Engineering School, led by Lt. Colonel Oum Hung Sup, strikes four approaching enemy tanks at the Uijongbu-Seoul Road at a mined bridge. But by nightfall, at about 1930, the N.K. 9th Regiment, 3rd Division, reaches the outskirts of the embattled city. This penetration is beaten back, but later, at 2300, an infantry platoon, bolstered by one tank, cranks into the northeast section of the city. It enters the Secret Gardens at Chang-Duk Palace. This infiltration too, is met and destroyed as Korean police eliminate or chase off the troops and decimate the tank. Nevertheless, the real onslaught is close behind. By midnight, the American advisors and the North Korean officers are discussing the Han River bridge. General Chae states that he has not ordered the bridge destroyed. It is determined that no order will be given until the enemy tanks are directly on the street of ROK Army Headquarters. Soon after midnight (27th–28th), General Chae is apparently placed in a jeep and driven over the bridge out of the city, leaving dissension behind. Major George Sedberry (KMAG) attempts to convince the ROK deputy chief of staff, General Kim Paik II, to refrain from blowing the bridge until troops and equipment can be evacuated. In addition, the vice minister of defense, according to General Kim, directed the bridge be blown at 0130, further complicating the crisis. Immediately upon being informed of the impending demolition, General Lee Hyung Koon, commanding officer, 2nd S.K. Division, urges General Chang Kuk to halt the order until he can extricate his command. Reluctantly, the general agrees, but the roads are jammed, slowing his motorcade. As Chang reaches a point about 150 yards from the span at 0215, he is greeted with a thunderous roar and a gargantuan blast of fire and debris. The two spans of the Han River bridge and

June 25, 1950 three companion railroad bridges are simultaneously detonated. The consequences are grave; many military personnel and civilians are obliterated in the horrific explosion. Several KMAG officers had safely crossed the span, beating the catastrophe by about five minutes. Still on the north side of the span, only a few feet from the blown portion, several American war correspondents — Keys Beech, Burton Crane and Frank Gibney — stare through their shattered windshield at a truck directly in front of them that had been lost with all its troops on board. Subsequently, a board of inquiry meets to place the blame for the incident. It results in a military court martial for the ROK senior engineer, who is summarily executed. The verdict remains under debate today. Some believe the order had been given by General Chae and others set blame on the vice minister of defense, neither of whom had been charged. Stronger arguments support the case against the latter. In the capital, the early morning hours of the 28th are gloomy. Remaining KMAG officers successfully seek exit routes and cross the Han River at 0600, but the majority of the South Korean Army contingents and their equipment remain trapped. Some scattered units attempt to hold the enemy back, while the others cross the river, without most of their heavy equipment and transports. The N.K. 3rd Division attempts to enter the city, but it hits fierce resistance offered by a small, heroic contingent of South Koreans who hold until about noon. Eventually, elements of the N.K. 16th Regiment, 4th Division, break into the capital. Another band of ROK troops holds a Spartan line on South Mountain, within the city. These gallant men resist throughout the day until the last man is wiped out. However, Communist control of the city occurs by midday, and the conquering troops are received by a tumultuous welcome by fifth columnists and exuberant college-age students. Meanwhile, surviving ROK troops attempt to reform on the south side of the Han River. At the time of invasion, the South Korean defenders numbered about 98,000 troops. Now, four days later, the South Koreans assess the situation and assume they have depleted their force by about 75 percent. Commanding officers can account for only about 22,000 troops (south of the Han River) by the end of the month. Later, more stragglers limp into headquarters and favorable reports filter in concerning the 6th and 8th S.K. Divisions. The news pumps the numbers back to about 54,000. Incredibly, 44,000 troops are killed, wounded or missing in the first week of combat. Many of these losses are directly attributed to the premature destruction of the Han River Bridge. Before, during and subsequent to the entry of Seoul, the North Koreans exhibit a barbaric nature that greatly overshadows the atrocities of the Japanese during World War II. U.S. Congressional clamoring to demobilize the

June 25, 1950 military has been progressing since the close of World War II. This movement has jeopardized America’s ability to defend itself or those nations it has promised to defend. But when President Truman is informed of the disaster, about seven hours after the ignition of the conflict, he moves quickly. President Truman returns to the Blair House, his temporary house in D.C., from his home in Independence, Missouri. He urges the United Nations to take immediate action. Now, as South Korea’s defenses are collapsing under the Iron Canopy of the North Koreans, Washington must reverse its position and remobilize. At present, the U.S. Armed Forces are in wretched fighting condition unbecoming a superpower. Of the ten active U.S. Army Divisions, only the 1st Division stands at full strength, and it is in Europe staring down the Soviets. There are four weakened Eighth Army Divisions in Japan; however, none are battle-tried and most of the men are inexperienced. The Marine Corps has been deflated from nearly 500,000 at the conclusion of World War II to a dangerous level of fewer than 75,000 men. In conjunction, the Air Force and Navy, both under-strength, will be called upon to fill the gap while the ground forces begin to mobilize. It is the Air Force which forestalls total defeat. Ironically, the U.S. Navy will need the services of a tremendous number of Japanese seamen to meet the threat. A predetermined evacuation plan (Operation CRULLER) begins to extricate endangered Americans and some personnel from other nations. The evacuees board the Reinholt and embark for Japan on the 27th. Others are airlifted from Kimpo Airfield on the 26th by Fifth Air Force planes, which dispatch C-46s, C47s and C-54s to handle the emergency. Meanwhile, after the fall of Seoul, General MacArthur is flown to the front on the 29th. MacArthur gets a first-hand observation of the nightmare. As MacArthur focuses on the chaos, he devises a plan to reverse the impending rout, an amphibious landing at Inchon. MacArthur, not surprisingly, remains resolute as he peers through the grueling action near the destroyed Han River bridge, and witnesses the muddled masses of retreating South Korean troops. The first U.S. ground troops to arrive in Korea will be composed of elements of the 24th Division, commanded by Major General William Dean, the previous military governor of South Korea. Ironically, General Dean had been readying his return to the United States and bidding goodbye to friends as he departed church services in Japan on the 25th. It was then that he received the news that he was not yet going home. The post duty officer informed him of the invasion. General Dean realizes that his weakened division is deployed all across Japan and begins to reel them in for deployment in Korea, less than 150 miles away. On June 30, General Dean informs Colonel Charles (Brad) Smith that he will command the first

32 troops in Korea and that Dean will follow soon after. Colonel Smith is to lead Task Force Smith into Pusan and drive north to delay the North Koreans until the balance of the 24th Division and other reinforcements can be rushed to support them. Task Force Smith will fly to Pusan, then by convoy advance to Taejon and attempt to hold. Colonel Smith is becoming adapted to being suddenly awakened with orders. On December 7, 1941, the colonel was awakened and directed to command an infantry contingent at Oahu, Hawaii. Task Force Smith, composed of about 400 infantry troops and an artillery unit, reaches positions near Osan on July 5. Smith’s task force becomes the first contingent of U.S. troops to clash with the Communists in North Korea. The engagement is a costly one for the young Americans who expect to quickly extinguish the fighting. They barely escape total slaughter. Their carbines and obsolete antitank weapons are way overmatched. Some troops break under the pressure, but more stand and fight, making the ultimate sacrifice to buy time for MacArthur’s warriors. Many of the young men of Task Force Smith are captured and butchered by the North Koreans. General MacArthur is chosen to command the United Nations forces on July 8. He will confer with other military leaders and be informed that the 1st Marine Division is available. The Marines (seasoned veterans) begin to arrive from Camp Pendleton at Pusan during early August. The swaggering entrance of 5,000 Marines perks up the besieged defenders to the point of angering some of the beleaguered Army troops. Nonetheless, their self-confidence becomes contagious. and inspires the others to break the siege. Meanwhile, General Walton Walker’s command must hold the line at the Pusan Perimeter or be driven into the sea. His forces meet the challenge, and the Communists realize that their quest for easy victory has been snatched from them by the strengthened forces. For the duration of the conflict, Communist aircraft of both the Chinese and Russians receive sanctuary in China, which prevents American and other Allied pilots from destroying them. Initially, back in America, the citizens have no knowledge that about seventy-five percent of the Communists’ air missions are clandestinely flown by Russian pilots. The government knows this; however, due to fear that the American people would demand retaliation against the Soviet Union, which could provoke another war in Europe, it is not discussed publicly. Nevertheless, the American pilots in Korea are aware of their principal foe. While the opposing ground forces continue to battle for the won-again lost-again barren bloodsoaked hills, the casualties continue to climb. Fiftythree nations join the struggle against the Communist aggression, but it is the American fighting men who assume the brunt of the task. Only fifteen ad-

33 ditional nations commit combat troops. Turkey and Great Britain are the only nations to field more than the strength of a battalion. South Korean forces compose sixteen infantry divisions. In contrast, the Chinese Communists funnel thousands of troops into the ranks of the North Koreans, and toward the end of 1950, several hundred thousand Chinese troops openly join the fight. The protracted struggle contains all the elements of man’s inhumanity to man and enunciates the equally powerful hope of men to remain free, regardless of the sacrifices.

June 25

North Korean armed forces invade South Korea. Since the beginning of June, the North Koreans have offered two suggestions for the unification of Korea, but neither is acceptable to the South Korean Government. In addition, the U.S. has been in the process of diminishing its aid to the new republic, and repeatedly, the U.S. has publicly stated that Korea is not within its protective zone. Actually, the U.S. has laid out clear instructions on what the policy is for KMAG advisors, with one exception. The U.S. has not issued instructions on what they should do once hostilities begin. KMAG now faces a dilemma and the ambassador has no specific instructions. Ambassador Muccio suggests that the entire mission, including the advisors, could converge on the embassy in Seoul if the Communists take the city and diplomatic immunity could be claimed, but KMAG declines the suggestion. South Korean President Rhee and his government are preparing to evacuate Seoul by mid-day, although the U.S. ambassador suggests that they stay to forestall panic. Rhee then explains during the late-night meeting at the Ducksoo Palace that if the Communists seize the city and the government officials, the cause will be lost and all resistance will collapse. Seoul is overrun by Communists on the 28th. After a series of communications between Syngman Rhee and U.S. officials, Washington authorizes General MacArthur to rush military supplies to South Korea. The shipments moving to Korea by sea sail by several routes: from Yokohama the distance is 900 miles, but this route can be shortened by about 235 miles if passage is through the Bungo-Suido Strait; from Sasebo, 130 miles; from Moji, 123 miles; from Kobe, 361 miles; and the distance by sea from Fukuoka to Pusan is about 110 miles. The port of Pusan is the jewel of Korea, and it is capable of handling the heavy tonnage expected to begin arriving to support the U.N. cause. More than 24 deepwater vessels can simultaneously be docked with about 14 LSTs side-by-side unloading their cargoes on the beach. Unloading becomes the easiest of the tasks; most transportation in Korea along the 22,000 miles of primitive roads has been by oxcart. In contrast, the railroad system had been well built by the Japanese, and these rails carry the heaviest burden for the United Nations forces. Once it is determined that the invasion is full-scale, the KMAG advisors suggest that the South Koreans immediately initiate the previously fabricated defense

June 25, 1950 plan, which calls for the evacuation of the Ongjin Peninsula and the redeployment of all units west of the Imjin River to the south bank of the river. In addition the plan directs that all reserve divisions posted in the south prepare to attack north upon orders. Major General Chae Byong Duk, South Korean chief of staff, concurs with the advice of KMAG, and he directs that all Divisions be informed. In related activity, Ambassador Muccio dispatches Commander John Seifert, Naval attaché to Inchon, to find a suitable vessel to transport the American civilians to Japan; he chooses the best of the lot, a Norwegian ship, the Reinholt. After unloading its cargo of fertilizer, the ship is prepared to receive the evacuees. Early on the 26th, Muccio activates Operation CRULLER to execute the rescue of U.S. civilians. A South Korean patrol boat (PC 701) encounters and engages a North Korean vessel, which is armed and transporting about 600 Communist troops off Pusan. The North Korean steamer is destroyed in what becomes the first naval surface action of the conflict. In Air Force activity, apparently, the North Koreans feel confident that there will be no intervention by the U.S. to save South Korea. Communist aircraft strike several times without opposition, and damage facilities at the Kimpo Airfield. A U.S. C-54 transport plane on the ground is also damaged. A contingent of U.S. fighter planes (8th Fighter Group) operating off the coast of South Korea is fired upon at about 1700, by a North Korean naval contingent. Also, the North Korean Air Force, according to U.S. estimates prior to the invasion, stands at 21 IL bombers and 33 Yak fighters. The enemy aircraft are domiciled at four bases: Pyongyang, Sinanju, Sinuiju and Wonsan. —In the United States: Warren Austin, U.S. ambassador to the United Nations, announces the North Korean Communist invasion of the Republic of South Korea: “At 4 o’clock in the morning Sunday, June 25th, Korean time (1926, June 24th, Washington time), armed forces from North Korea commenced an unprovoked assault against the territory of the Republic of Korea.... This wholly illegal and unprovoked attack by the Korean north forces ... constitutes a breach of the peace and an act of aggression.... It would appear from the nature of the attack and the manner in which it was launched that it constitutes an all-out offensive against the Republic of Korea.” In response, a U.N. resolution emerges from a special session: “Noting with grave concern the armed attack upon the Republic of Korea by forces from North Korea, the Security Council determines that this action constitutes a breach of the peace.” The U.S. Ambassador to South Korea, John J. Muccio, had informed the U.S. of the invasion. At the time, it was still June 24, U.S. time. The U.N. response calls for an immediate withdrawal by the North Koreans to the 38th Parallel in synchronization with an immediate halt to the hostile actions. The resolution also calls on all members “to render every assistance to the United Nations in the execution of this resolution and to refrain from giving

June 26, 1950 assistance to the North Korean authorities.” The primary antagonist, the Soviet Union, is absent from the meeting, having boycotted the sessions since January 10, 1950, in protest of Red China being denied a seat as the bona fide representative of China. This Soviet miscalculation eliminates the Communist veto and permits the U.N. to take action. The resolution receives an abstention from the representative from Yugoslavia, another Communist-dominated nation, but nine yes votes are cast. The nations voting yes are China, Cuba, Ecuador, Egypt, France, Great Britain, India, Norway and the United States. There are no U.S. combat troops in Korea. Also, the total inundation of Soviet propaganda had prevented the U.S. government from properly equipping the South Korean Armed Forces to defend themselves. In addition to the U.S. Army and U.S. Naval strength at dangerously low levels, there are no Marine Corps forces of any consequences in the Far East. In fact, due to the Truman Administration’s postwar policy, there are few active duty Marines in the United States. Later, when Truman’s attempts to disband the Marine Corps subside as the call goes out for Marines to be sent to Korea, the Marines’ actions in Korea put the idea of disbanding the corps to rest. — In Japan: Official word of the North Korean invasion of South Korea is dispatched from Korea at 0925 by the U.S. Embassy, but neither General MacArthur nor his general headquarters receive orders concerning the crisis at the 38th Parallel. Instructions, however, do arrive to evacuate the Americans from Korea. By about midnight, Brigadier General Edwin K. Wright has instructed all units necessary to initiate the evacuation to stand ready. The operation gets underway at 0100 on the 26th. A plan of action for such an occurrence had been distributed on July 1, 1949. Also, Colonel William H.S. Wright receives permission from Ambassador Muccio to evacuate KMAG personnel from Korea, except for 33 men who are to remain with ROK headquarters. Soon after, President Truman informs MacArthur that he will be in command of the operation in Korea. Amphibious Group 1, commanded by Admiral Doyle, is en route from Tokyo to Chigasaki Beach to execute a practice amphibious landing. Navy and Marine specialists will oversee a landing by the 35th Regiment on the following day. In other activity, subsequent to emergency talks between Ambassador Muccio and Syngman Rhee, the former requests that MacArthur supply additional ammunition to ensure that the South Koreans are able to meet the crisis. — In the U.S. Far East Command: Major General Earle E. Partridge, commander, Fifth Air Force, directs his wing commanders to make preparations to evacuate U.S. citizens from South Korea. Also, the Twentieth Air Force orders two squadrons of 51 Fighter Interceptor Wings to go on air defense alert in Japan.

June 26

The U.S. Air Force begins to airlift American civilians from Korea. It initiates flights between

34 Kimpo Airfield outside of Seoul and Itazuke Airfield in Kyushu, Japan. The Air Force utilizes SB-17 planes to provide cover during the rescue operation. American dependents are also transported from Seoul to Inchon for evacuation to Japan. Slightly after midnight (25th– 26th), Ambassador Muccio activates the evacuation plans. Armed Forces Radio station WVTP, which has been broadcasting constant updates, instructs all women and children to speed to Camp Sobinggo to receive transportation to Inchon, where they will board the vessel Reinholt. By about 1800, on the 26th, more than 700 passengers are aboard the ship, which usually carries no more than twelve passengers. The Reinholt is escorted to Japan by the USS Mansfield (DD 728) and USS Dehaven (DD 727). Other Americans at Taegu and Taejon join those in Pusan and depart aboard the vessel Pioneer Dale. Air Force planes based in Japan fly continual escort and surveillance flights throughout the day to ensure safety. Additional flights transport ammunition and supplies from Japan to the embattled South Koreans. In related activity, Colonel Wright returns to KMAG headquarters from Japan. He is briefed on the deteriorating circumstances and as the situation becomes more grave, he prepares orders that direct KMAG personnel to move farther south to positions between Seoul and Pusan, from where they can be quickly evacuated if the situation warrants. Clear instructions dictating further action by KMAG are not forthcoming from Washington, but the U.S. is definitely reversing its position concerning its intent to defend Korea. Word arrives from the secretary of state through the Far East Command that all KMAG advisors are to stay with their respective Korean units as long as it remains feasible and the units are operating in a combat mode. By the latter part of the 26th, Ambassador Muccio requests military planes from Japan to evacuate non-essential personnel from the mission. Soon after, following strong suggestions from his staff, Colonel Wright directs all nonessential KMAG personnel to depart by truck for Suwon, from where they will be airlifted to Japan. Colonel Wright retains thirty-three officers and enlisted men to remain with him to assist the South Koreans. Wright further orders that if the KMAG face imminent capture, they are to break for the embassy and seek diplomatic immunity with Muccio’s party. — In the U.S. Far East Command: With the unexpected outbreak of hostilities ongoing in Korea, the logistical problems are monumental. The Pacific Coast will serve as origin point for the Military Air Transport Service en route to Tokyo. Three separate routes will be utilized. The first is Great Circle, with flights originating at McChord Air Force Base, Tacoma, Washington, with Tokyo its destination, via Anchorage, Alaska, and Shemya, Aleutian Islands, covering a distance of about 5,688 miles and 30 to 33 flying hours. A second route originates at Travis Air Force Base, near San Francisco, by way of Honolulu and Wake Island, a distance of about 6,718 miles to Tokyo and 34 flying hours. The third route is by way of Southern California via Hon-

35 olulu, Johnston, Kwajalein and Guam, requiring 40 hours of flying time to cover the distance of 8,000 miles. Throughout the month of July, an accelerating number of flights transport more than 100 tons of supplies per day. Subsequent to the delivery of supplies to Japan, they are forwarded to Korea, basically from Ashiya Airbase, supplemented by the airfields at Brady and Itazuke. At present, due to U.S. government sentiment that there had been no danger of trouble in Korea, there are no C-Rations there and almost none in Japan. Those rations initially arriving in Korea, including the C-Rations and B-Rations, are the ultimate in leftovers, having been around since the close of World War II. Age doesn’t affect the taste, and the ground troops who consume them seemingly never forget them. Also, in Washington, a scheduled policy meeting is canceled, which prompts the commandant of the Marine Corps, Clifford B. Cates, to make an extemporaneous entry on his wall calendar: “SecNav’s policy meeting called off. Nuts.” General Cates is anxious to commit his Marines to the war. In other activity, President Truman and his advisors meet in the Blair House to assess the situation in Korea, but intelligence is still minimal. Talk of committing U.S. ground troops is considered, but the ramifications are great and it will take more time; therefore, word is sent to MacArthur that the use of ground troops is not authorized. In conjunction, the U.S. does not have many ground troops prepared for mobilization in the Far East. Nevertheless, the consensus seems to be that Infantry will be required soon. In Naval activity, the 7th Fleet departs the Philippines heading north to Korea. — In Japan: President Truman authorizes General MacArthur to dispatch a military survey group to Korea to assess the situation. On the following day, Brigadier General John H. Church and twelve other staff officers

June 27, 1950 and enlisted men depart for Korea. Amphibious Group 1 conducts the 35th Regiment’s practice landing as scheduled at Chigasaki Bay. Another landing is scheduled for the following day. It gets underway, but the hostilities in Korea cause its premature cancellation. Orders come in recalling the air support, and shortly thereafter, the destroyers are directed to withdraw. Also, Far East Air Forces receive C-47s from various points in the Far East in exchange for C-54s. The C-47s provide the Air Force with the ability to land on smaller airstrips. June 27–September 15, 1950 FIRST DESIGNATED CAMPAIGN: THE U.N. DEFENSIVE

June 27

In response to orders from President Truman (see In the United States, this entry), General MacArthur, from his headquarters in Tokyo, speeds a contingent of technical specialists to Korea where he establishes General Headquarters Advanced Command and Liaison Group (ADCOM), commanded by General John H. Church. General Church departs Haneda Airfield and arrives at Itazuke at 0600. Church expects to depart for Seoul, but new instructions arrive that direct him to reroute to Suwon, because of the deteriorating situation in the capital. Church’s entourage arrives at Suwon by air at about 1900. Headquarters is established in Suwon at the Experimental Agriculture Building. MacArthur arrives on the 29th to survey the battle area. In other activity, the government officials of the Republic evacuate Seoul as the North Koreans sweep south, and reach Taejon, but soon after, the South Koreans are forced to jump back farther to Taegu and from there, to the last stop, Pusan. U.S. Embassy officials

Troops loading supplies and ammunition aboard planes in Japan for use by the ROK forces in Korea.

June 27, 1950 also begin to exit in haste, slightly after 0900. Muccio, just prior to his evacuation, reports to MacArthur that the Armed Forces Radio Station is being destroyed to prevent use by the enemy. South Korean Army officials also depart without informing KMAG. When informed, Colonel Sterling Wright and his staff rush to Sihung to intercept the ROKs and convince them to

President Harry S Truman, after making the decision to support the Republic of South Korea.

36 return to the capital. During the trip, Wright receives a radio message from MacArthur which informs him that the Joint Chiefs of Staff has ordered MacArthur to assume control of all U.S. troops in Korea, including KMAG. While conferring with the South Koreans in Sihung, another radio message from MacArthur is received by Wright. It instructs him “to be of good cheer.” MacArthur also tells Colonel Wright that big decisions by the U.S. are about to unfold. This news persuades the South Korean headquarters personnel, including the chief of staff, to return, but the stay is short-lived. The South Koreans again evacuate on the following morning, without notifying the Americans. Finally, the exhausting efforts of Wright conclude. He attempts to halt the evacuation of the remaining KMAG personnel at Suwon, previously scheduled to depart for Japan, and succeeds in stopping about thirty men. They are ordered to return to Seoul. Meanwhile, the swarming hordes of North Koreans allow little time to dispose of critical records in the U.S. Embassy, which causes severe complications. Some secret documents are burned on the roof; however, unclassified personnel records will be seized and subsequent purges held. In addition, when the North Koreans enter the city on the following day, they bring cases of documents containing the names of scores of South Koreans considered anticommunist. People, tied together, are led into the streets, and after a quick kangaroo trial, by what is known as People’s Court, many innocent victims are executed. When an accusation is made and the sentence given, the onlookers are asked if anyone wants to speak on their behalf. None do, aware that they would then be shot, too. According to CIA reports, more than half of the students in Seoul support the North Koreans and great numbers of them have voluntarily joined the Communist Army. Also, many who remain in Seoul greet the invaders with enthusiasm. But many more reject the aggressors and wait in hopes of MacArthur and the U.S. arriving to save them. The U.S. fleet moves to blockade North Korea, but President Truman also intends to ensure that the Nationalist Chinese under Chiang Kai-shek on Formosa are unable to initiate raids against the Chinese mainland and possibly provoke China to enter the conflict. In Air Force activity, Americans and some other foreign nationals continue to be evacuated from Kimpo and Suwon Airfields, but the pace is accelerated as the danger increases. During the activity at the airfields, three North Korean planes attack four American escort fighter planes. The three enemy planes are blown from the sky. Four additional enemy aircraft are destroyed in dog fights later in the day. The first shot by the Air Force in the war is fired by Major James W. Little, commander, 339th FAWS. In addition, Lt. William G. Hudson, 68th FAWS, with Lieutenant Carl Fraser as his radar observer, emerge as the victors in the first aerial victory of the war. The seven enemy planes shot down had been achieved by six pilots. Another of the pilots to score a victory is Lieutenant Robert H. Dewald, 35th

37

June 27, 1950

Top: U.S. destroyers in mothballs at San Diego following the termination of World War II. The Korean War brings some of the ships back to activate service. Bottom: KMAG advisors during the withdrawal from Seoul on 27 June. The American advisors are en route to Kimpo airfield about eighteen miles distant.

June 27, 1950

38

Top: A patient in a litter arrives in Japan from Korea aboard the SS Reinholt during the withdrawal of Americans from Korea. Bottom: Two soldiers chat with one of the younger Americans being evacuated from Korea. Fighter Bomber Squadron, 8th Fighter Bomber Group. Also, B-26s, operating from Japan, execute a night attack against enemy targets; however, the raids are not successful, due to inclement weather. In other activity, the 8th Fighter-Bomber Wing (FBW) establishes a composite unit of U.S. Air Force

and South Korean airmen at Taegu Airfield. The pilots will fly F-51D Mustangs. The air evacuation safely transports 718 Americans to Japan, and another 809 Americans are transported by sea ( June 26–29). In all, 2,001 people are evacuated. Word arrives in Taegu from Ambassador Muccio that the KMAG advisors are to separate from the S.K. 3rd Division and move south

39 to Pusan; the families of the advisors had been evacuated earlier. In Naval activity, Rear Admiral Hoskins orders the Seventh Fleet to leave Hong Kong and Subic Bay for Sasebo, but en route, orders arrive from Admiral Joy that divert the fleet to Okinawa, which will place it in close proximity to Korea and Formosa, yet a safer distance from the Chinese and Soviet Air Forces. Meanwhile, the USS Juneau and the Destroyer USS DeHaven are directed to sweep the coastal waters south of the 38th Parallel and intercept any hostile landings. The USS Sergeant Keathley departs Yokohama with a capacity load of ammunition and supplies, including twelve 105-mm howitzers; the ship is escorted by the USS Juneau and DeHaven to Pusan. — In the United States: President Truman sends word to the United Nations, reference their resolution of the 25th, that the Northern aggressors have not heeded the order to halt hostilities, but rather have chosen to press the attack. The president notes the Security Council’s plea for all members to aid the U.N.’s effort to mandate compliance, then clearly emphasizes America’s intent: “I have ordered United States air and sea forces to give the Korean government troops cover and air support. The attack upon Korea makes it plain beyond all doubt that Communism has passed beyond the use of subversion to conquer independent nations and will now use armed invasion and war.” Also, President Truman directs the U.S. Seventh Fleet to ensure the safety of Formosa by deploying in such fashion to forbid a Communist invasion. In addition, U.N. Ambassador Warren Austin presents a letter to the Security Council that underscores the North Korean intent to “completely disregard and flout the decision of the security council....” The United Nations Security Council goes into another special session, which results in a second resolution: “The Security Council recommends that the members of the United Nations furnish such assistance to the Republic of Korea (South) as may be necessary, to repel the armed attack and to restore international peace and security in the area.” (On the 26th, Washington time, a teleconference between Washington and Tokyo had transpired, and resulted in the issuance of orders to evacuate civilians and dependents from Korea. In a separate message, the Pacific Fleet is directed to prepare additional ships to move to the Western Pacific.) The Soviets again are absent from the U.N. session, continuing their protest pattern since the beginning of January. In their absence, they are unable to veto the resolution. Although the United Nations falls short of declaring war, the intent is clear and the action is called “Police Action.” The nation of Yugoslavia votes no. Egypt and India abstain, but the latter joins the action two days later. The precedent-setting resolution passes with the votes of China, Cuba, Ecuador, France, Great Britain, Norway and the United States.

June 28 At about 0100, KMAG personnel attempt to inform Colonel William H.S. Wright that the South Korean Army Headquarters is again evacuating Seoul,

June 28, 1950 but he is inaccessible, as the past few days have left him sleepless and his aide refuses to wake him. A second trip to headquarters by Lt. Colonel Lewis Vieman proves fruitful, but as the two men are about to confer, conversation becomes almost unnecessary as the Han River bridge blows, and their focus centers on the immensity of the situation. The bridge was not to be destroyed until the enemy secured the capital and all South Korean troops had been evacuated to the south bank of the Han. This disaster cripples the evacuation process, needlessly kills hundreds of people on the bridge and traps S.K. units in the city. Panic and confusion run rampant. Colonel William Wright attempts to move the Americans out of Seoul by convoy; however, the alternate bridges are also blown. Eventually, Lt. Colonel Lee Chi Yep offers to assist the Americans. He commandeers a ferry by shooting one boatman through his clothing. The startled riverman quickly moves his huge raft to shore. Most Americans cross safely at about 0800, but the original fifty vehicles are left behind. From the south bank of the Han, the main contingent walks fifteen exhausting miles along a primitive trail to Anyang-ni, where they are greeted by an advance party. Colonel Lee Chi Yep, the enterprising South Korean who procured the raft, accompanies the Americans during the long walk. En route, Colonel Chi Yep commandeers a jeep and speeds ahead and procures vehicles to transport the party to Suwon. In the meantime, Colonel Wright, two officers and three enlisted men remain on the north bank in Seoul to locate a safe crossing for the command jeep, which contains the radio, their only means of communicating with Japan. Before dawn, the small party is able to board another raft, which also accommodates the jeep. Wright’s party makes it to Suwon to join the main group there. Also, the capital falls; North Korean tanks, followed by Infantry, enter Seoul. North Korean Colonel Han Se Gon later relates that one of his gunners had run up the flag of the People’s Republic of Korea, and they watched it flutter bravely. In Air Force activity, fighting in the region remains extremely heavy on the ground. At Suwon, Communist planes bomb the airfield. One plane, a C-54, is destroyed on the ground. Also, General Church, subsequent to his initial observations while at Suwon, informs General MacArthur that only by an infusion of U.S. ground troops can the original boundary in Korea be restored. First reports that filter into headquarters during the invasion cause grave concern about the plight of some Americans (KMAG), but by the end of the month, all are accounted for and only three casualties have struck their ranks, all minor wounds. In other activity, C-54s and C-47s evacuate the last of 851 U.S. citizens who are flown out of Korea. Also, U.S. planes bomb enemy positions in Seoul. In Pusan, the situation remains confusing, too. The KMAG Advisors to the S.K. 3rd Division arrive from Taegu after a tedious journey begun on the previous day. The small column nudges southward through endless rows of frantic South Korean civilians and then en-

June 28, 1950

40

Situation in Korea, June 28, 1950.

41 counters a nasty rainstorm which stalls the group. The Americans abandon their mud-trapped vehicles outside Pusan and walk the remainder of the route. Once in Pusan, Colonel Emmerich’s party spots South Koreans who are raiding the American compound to steal food, equipment, furniture and about anything else they can get. The newly arrived Americans begin firing over the heads of the Koreans and the pirating ceases. Colonel Emmerich is informed by Captain Gerald Putnam, advisor to the S.K. 23rd Regiment, that the American dependents had departed Pusan on the previous day aboard the Pioneer Dale. He is also told that another vessel, the Letitia Lykes, remains in port with members of the American Mission and some KMAG advisors. The KMAG advisors are sent for and ordered to return to Emmerich’s Headquarters. Later, Emmerich makes radio contact with the Far East Command in Japan and speaks with Brigadier General George Back to get instructions. Unfortunately, Headquarters in Japan, like Emmerich, has little knowledge of the crisis; General Back inquires if Emmerich has any first hand information about the situation in Seoul. Emmerich is instructed to wait for orders. Meanwhile, Headquarters in Japan will maintain constant contact with Pusan to try and keep abreast of the crisis. Colonel Emmerich, totally unaware of KMAG’s predicament in Seoul, establishes a Provisional Military Advisory Group, Headquarters, Pusan, Korea, and as the senior officer, he creates a small staff and designates himself commanding officer. In Naval activity, the USS Juneau (CLAA 119), off the east coast of Korea, bombards enemy targets in the vicinity of Samchock, in what becomes the initial major naval surface fire support operation of the conflict. — In the United States: The commandant of the Marine Corps, General Cates, meets with Admiral Forest P. Sherman, chief of Naval Operations, and recommends that the Fleet Marine Force be committed to Korea. Soon after, on the 30th, General Cates attends the secretary of the navy’s conference. The discussions include the possibility and probability of committing Marines to Korea. —In Japan: In Air Force activity, at 0600, a C-54 takes off from Tachikawa Airfield near Tokyo, transporting 105-mm ammunition to Suwon to supplement the ammunition transported the previous day from Japan by ship. By mid-afternoon, additional aircraft depart with nearly 120 additional tons of ammunition. The planes that run supplies and B-26 light bombers are provided protection by F-80s based at Itazuke. An Air Force reconnaissance plane (RF-80-A), piloted by Lieutenant Lt. Bryce Poe II, initiates a mission to acquire photographs of the vanguard of the North Korean invasion forces. Poe flies the initial reconnaissance mission by a jet. Also, the 3rd Bombardment Group dispatches more than 20 B-26s, which launch the Air Force’s first air strikes of the conflict. The planes attack the rails at Munsan and other rail traffic in the sector between Seoul and the border with North Korea. One of the planes is hit and damaged by anti-aircraft fire. It

June 29, 1950 crashes while returning to Japan and all aboard are killed. In other activity, other planes, B-29s attached to the 19th Bombardment Group, depart their base on Okinawa and attack targets that include rail bridges and vehicles in the initial medium bomber attacks of the conflict. Bad weather over Japan limits Fifth Air Force sorties, but eighteen fighters execute close air support and interdiction missions. In Naval activity, the vessel Cardinal O’Connell, her hulls crammed with ammunition from the Ikego Ammunition Depot, departs Japan for Korea, escorted by the destroyers Collett and Mansfield, to further augment the South Korean cause. Also, British Admiral Sir Patrick Brind informs Admiral Joy that the Royal Navy will commit Task Group 96.8 (British Rear Admiral W.G. Andrewes), which includes the carrier HMS Triumph, cruiser HMS Belfast and the destroyers HMS Consort and Cossock. The British warships enjoin the Seventh Fleet at Buckner Bay, Okinawa. The other British vessels, which include the frigates HMS Alacrity, HMS Black Swan and HMS Hart, as well as the cruiser HMS Jamaica, swell the ranks of the blockade force. In addition, Australia and New Zealand commit warships, which also join the naval blockade of North Korea. On the following day, the Allied Naval Force is transferred to the operational control of General MacArthur. In other naval activity, the U.S. Navy forms an antisubmarine warfare (ASW) patrol off Sasebo. It operates only until 1 July 1950.

June 29

General MacArthur and fourteen additional staff members depart Japan at 0610 for Suwon aboard the Bataan, an unarmed aircraft. The Bataan, after a hazardous flight that includes a close encounter with a Russian Yak fighter, lands safely on a dwarfed airstrip amidst a wrecked C-54. American fighters close in and quickly drive the Communist plane away. At about 0800, while in flight, MacArthur has a message dispatched to Lt. General George Stratemeyer’s second in command. The message to General Partridge, dictated by Stratemeyer: “Stratemeyer to Partridge: Take out North Korean airfield immediately. No publicity. Macarthur approves.” Communist planes are bombing the retreating South Koreans and have also plastered the airfield at Suwon, just prior to MacArthur’s arrival. Once aground, the Bataan is flown back to Tokyo out of harm’s way, but Lt. Colonel Anthony Story, MacArthur’s pilot, returns to Suwon at 1715 to pick up the general. While in Korea, MacArthur moves right to the front to assess the ongoing tragedy. His jeep drives past the mystified and bewildered civilians as they flee for safety, and he passes the South Koreans that are in retreat. At the Han River, MacArthur clearly perceives the disaster at hand when he observes a routed South Korean Army in disorganized retreat. Some other officers see things differently, observing that many units had retired with discipline. One demoralized Korean officer remarks to a friend: “We can’t fight them without equipment,” giving credence to their inability to hold

June 29, 1950 the line. Many of the South Koreans have fought bravely, but the match is one-sided. General MacArthur, standing in the midst of the death and destruction and under enemy fire, scrutinizes the final rear guard actions at the Han River, while simultaneously collecting even incidental information to assist him in what would have to be a miraculous extrication from defeat. First impressions of the MacArthur party convince them that only the contingents of the South Korean 1st and 7th Divisions contain enough men and equipment to resist effectively. Nevertheless, units of the S.K. 5th Division hold in Yongdungp’o, and to the west, Inchon is held by the Capital Division. Additional S.K. troops of the 2nd Division regroup at the junction of the Han and Pukhan Rivers. Meanwhile, the S.K. 6th Division, following its gallant three-day stand, continues its retreat toward Wonju in the center of the peninsula. The ROK 8th Division also retreats. The 23rd Regiment, 3rd S.K. Division, moves north from Pusan toward Ulchin, about sixty-five miles above Pohang-dong, to intercept an anticipated North Korean drive down the east coastal highway. MacArthur thinks not with despair, but of victory, and in less than thirty minutes he conceives his plan. Although his sparse occupation troops are overwhelmingly outnumbered, MacArthur has devised a strategy to use them to give the impression of strength to buy time and receive reinforcements. He will direct an orderly retreat to gain more tentative positions and permit the disillusioned ROK troops to regain their confidence. Meanwhile, the swiftness of the North Korean advance forces the South Koreans to continue to make many mistakes, one of which included the premature demolition of the Han River bridge. During this brief period at the river, MacArthur realizes that the power of the North Korean thrust might propel them to the last stop, Pusan. He devises a plan to launch an amphibious invasion behind the enemy lines at Inchon, from which point he can recapture Seoul and isolate the Communists troops between there and Pusan. The plan will be poorly received by Washington, but his persistence will prevail. Later in the day — subsequent to meeting with President Rhee, Ambassador John Muccio and General John Church — General MacArthur returns to Tokyo to mobilize his forces. MacArthur’s concludes about the future of Korea, during his initial visit to the front, that “air and naval action alone could not be decisive, and that nothing short of the intervention of U.S. ground forces could give assurance of stopping the Communists and of later regaining the ground.” The first U.S. ground troops arrive in Korea at Suwon. Detachment X, composed of less than thirtyfive men, has also brought four M55 machine guns of the 507th Antiaircraft Artillery Battalion. Slightly after 1600, the unit engages four attacking enemy planes. One is destroyed and another is thought to have been destroyed. Another air raid occurs about 2000. As the day progresses, contingents of the N.K. 6th Division,

42 which had breached the Han River west of Seoul on the previous day, seize control of Kimpo Airfield. In addition, the N.K. 3rd and 4th Divisions in Seoul prepare to bolt the river in force, following the cessation of a heavy artillery bombardment of South Korean positions. The N.K. 1st Division trails the 3rd and 4th Divisions, but later it pivots and moves toward Ichon and Umsong on the first primary road east of the SeoulPusan highway. In the meantime, Colonel Emmerich continues to maintain contact with headquarters in Japan. Members of Emmerich’s staff forward weather reports to the Air Force at Itazuke to aid the success of its missions. Meanwhile, additional KMAG advisors who were with the S.K. 6th and 8th Divisions at Wonju arrive at Pusan bringing the KMAG forces there to twenty-two officers and 34 enlisted men. Two missionaries and six civilians of the ECA are also with Emmerich. The newly established Provisional KMAG becomes active. It dispatches one team composed of six men to Taejon and another detachment of two officers is sent to rejoin the S.K. 3rd Division at Taegu. Emmerich’s command also dispatches some communications personnel to the Coast Guard Base at Chinhae. In Air Force activity, Fifth Air Force executes 172 sorties in support of the S.K. forces. This level of support is maintained during the coming days. On this day, B-26s attack bridges, and Fifth Air Force F-80s patrol above the Han River, while F-82s, attached to the 86th FAWS, initiate the first napalm air strike of the conflict. In the skies, Air Force planes of the 35th and 80th Fighter Bomber Squadrons (FBS) operating near Suwon encounter and engage North Korean aircraft that are attacking Suwon’s airfield. Five enemy planes are eliminated from the North Korean Air Force. One of the enemy planes is destroyed by Lieutenant Richard J. Burns (35th Fighter Bomber Squadron, 8th Fighter Bomber Group). Burns, piloting an F-51 Mustang, downs an IL-10. In addition, other aircraft, 8 B-29s attached to the 19th Bomber Group, pound Kimpo airfield, which had been seized by the Communists. The B-29s also hit the rail depot at Seoul. Subsequent to completing the mission, the B-29s head back to Okinawa, but en route, enemy aircraft intercept the group. Another pilot, Lieutenant Roy W. Marsh, 80th Fighter Bomber Squadron (8th Fighter Bomber Group), flying an F-80C, knocks out an IL-10 which closes on Seoul at an elevation of 1,200 feet. Marsh engages the plane near Uijongbu. The bombers return safely; however, one of the attacking planes is shot down by the gunners to rack up the initial kill of an enemy plane by a B-29 gunner. In yet other activity, subsequent to authorization by MacArthur to select targets in North Korea, 18 planes (3rd Bomber Group B-26s) attached to Fifth Air Force, strike Heijo Airfield on the outskirts of Pyongyang, and report the destruction of about 25 planes on the field. In other activity, a pack of three enemy planes close against Lieutenant Harry T. Sandlin (80th Fighter Bomber Squadron, 8th Fighter Bomber Group) near

43 Suwon. Sandlin outmaneuvers the trio and places his F51 Mustang to the rear of an LA-7, dispenses about 800 rounds of machine gun fire and downs the enemy aircraft. In Naval activity, the cruiser USS Juneau commences the first U.S. Naval surface vessel bombardment of the conflict. Operating off the east coast of Korea, it bombards suspected enemy positions in the vicinity of Kangnung–Samch’ok, where N.K. guerrillas and the elements of the Communist 766th Independent Unit had landed on the 25th. — In the United States: Major General L.L. Lemnitzer pens a memorandum to the secretary of defense that contains a consensus of the thoughts of the military leaders at the time of the invasion. It states that there had been knowledge of the North Korean ability to attack South Korea. But he emphasizes that every other country bordering the Soviet Union possesses the same capabilities and that no intelligence agency had considered Korea as “a point of attack.” In other activity, Secretary of State Dean Acheson is informed by the Australian ambassador that two Australian warships and the 77th Royal Australian Fighter Squadron (all presently based in Japan) will join the U.S. forces. Additional naval forces are committed by Canada, Netherlands and New Zealand. Also, the only nation to offer ground troops is Nationalist China, but their proposal to dispatch 33,000 troops is shortcircuited by MacArthur on the following day. MacArthur claims that the Nationalist contingent is untrained and lacks motor transport and artillery. There is speculation that Washington prefers to keep the Nationalist Chinese out of the conflict to avoid the possibility of inciting the Communist Chinese. In other activity, General Eisenhower visits the Pentagon ( June 28, Washington time) to meet with General Omar Bradley, but Bradley is confined to bed, suffering from a stomach virus. Eisenhower speaks with Generals Matt Ridgway, Joseph Collins and Wade Haislip. Apparently Eisenhower is stunned to discover the unpreparedness of the U.S. Army and the nonchalant attitudes concerning the Korean crisis. Eisenhower strongly urges initial mobilization of sufficient force to meet the threat, including the bolstering of the forces in Europe and the use of the atom bomb, if necessary. Eisenhower is in town for a scheduled physical examination, but he seemingly writes a few prescriptions for the Army while there. Ike also makes note that he would prefer a younger General in command, an obvious referral to MacArthur. Nonetheless, showing empathy towards MacArthur’s plight, Eisenhower also states that the restrictions that confine MacArthur’s responsive actions to the area below the 38th Parallel should be lifted. — In Japan: By today, the U.S. Air Force has transferred many of its aircraft from distant bases to Ashiya and Itazuke Airbases to ensure they are capable of striking the battle sectors in Korea. Also, the 19th Bombardment Group, Twentieth Air Force, relocates from Guam to Kadena Airfield on Okinawa. And, the 8th

June 30, 1950 Tactical Reconnaissance Squadron (TRS), based at Yokota, initiates photographic reconnaissance missions with its RB-29 aircraft to gain intelligence regarding airfields in North Korea. In other activity, the 21st Troop Carrier Squadron (TCS) arrives at Tachikawa Air Force Base from Clark AFB in the Philippines to begin operations from Japan.

June 30

Using the umbrella coverage of artillery and tank fire, the 8th Regiment, 3rd N.K. Division, moves from Seoul to the south bank of the Han River. Many troops cross on foot while others swim. Others are ferried across on wooden boats, which are also utilized to transport trucks. The advance, once across the river, stalls as the regiment reforms. The pause prevents a quick move against Yongdungp’o, the conduit for the primary rail and road routes heading south. In response to the enemy penetration, General Church directs S.K. Chief of Staff General Chae to mount a counterattack and strike the enemy at the riverbank. But the interdicting North Korean fire frustrates the effort. With continuing reports expressing the deterioration of the South Korean resistance, Lt. General Chung II Kwon arrives in Korea from Japan to relieve General Chae. At about 1600, General Church, using the radio, hurries another urgent message to Tokyo, relating more grim details of the lopsided struggle. Soon after, he dashes twelve miles south to Osan, from where he can speak to Tokyo directly by telephone. While speaking to MacArthur’s chief of staff, General Edward Almond, General Church is informed that U.S. ground troops have been committed to the cause, which gives him some temporary hope. Church is instructed to hold Suwon’s airstrip for another day to receive the reinforcements, and he responds in the affirmative that it will be held. However, in Church’s short absence, more confusion has compounded the dilemma. False information, relayed by a U.S. plane, that a North Korean column moving from the east was nearing Suwon, is given to S.K. Generals Chung and Chae. The erroneous information causes bedlam when they return to Suwon from the Han River with the distressing news. Following this event, an unexplained glaring red flare shoots into the air from a point near the railroad station, located about 500 yards from a command post. KMAG personnel at the post react with contrasting opinions, and neither General Church nor Colonel William Wright is on location. Discussion on the unfolding activity reaches no concrete conclusion; however, initially it is decided by an on-site ADCOM officer to evacuate the town and form a perimeter around the airfield. In turn, the decision and ongoing undisciplined activity have confounded the Korean officers. During the ensuing moments, some ADCOM people, assuming Suwon is being surrounded, begin destroying their equipment with thermite grenades. Meanwhile, at the airfield, a defensive perimeter is about to be established, but lacking direction, the officers abort the plan and prepare to retire south to Taejon. An astonished General Church, having re-

June 30, 1950 turned from Osan, encounters the convoy while it sits to await the call to move out toward Taejon. Church immediately orders the convoy to return to Suwon. General Church, already fuming over the disruption at the airfield, sees his patience pushed to the brink when he returns to town and finds his headquarters and most of the valuable signal equipment destroyed. Realizing that holding the airfield is no longer feasible, General Church, drenched from the torrential rain and apparently fatigued from the overtaxing day, orders the convoy to withdraw to Osan, where he can reopen communications with Tokyo. Following a brief conversation between Church and General Almond, it is agreed that the ADCOM personnel would head for Taejon. In conjunction, S.K. Army Headquarters remains in Suwon. The expected reinforcements are diverted to Pusan. In the meantime, other N.K. units prepare to launch a strong crossing of the Han on the following day. In other activity, an advance group of U.S. officers, led by Lt. Colonel Lewis A. Hunt, arrives in Korea to begin organizing the logistical operations in Pusan. In Air Force activity, The 77th Royal Australian Air Force (RAAF) Squadron arrives in Korea. Later, the Australian squadron will be attached to Fifth Air Force. While evacuations are ongoing at Suwon, the Air Force initiates modifications at another field, Kumhae Airfield, located slightly more than ten miles northwest of Pusan. Also, near Suwon, Lieutenant John B. Thomas, 36th Fighter Bomber Squadron, 8th Fighter Bomber Group, engages an enemy Yak-9 type aircraft. Thomas, flying an F-80, prevails and the Yak plummets in flames to the ground. Also, Fifth Air Force tactical air control contingents arrive at Suwon. In other activity, planes (B-26s), attached to the 3rd Bombing Group, attack enemy positions in the vicinity of Seoul, while B-29s also pound enemy targets near Seoul, at locations north of the Han River. — In the United States: General Lawton Collins (Army chief of staff ) receives a message from MacArthur (near midnight June 29, Washington time); he informs Frank Pace, Secretary of the Army, of MacArthur’s request for a regimental combat team to be committed near the Han River, far from Pusan. MacArthur’s request enunciates the necessity of American troops to stem the tide and retake the surrendered terrain. He states, “To continue to utilize the forces of our air and navy without an effective ground element cannot be decisive.” Following an early morning conversation with Pace, President Truman authorizes the use of the combat team, and later in the day, the president informs officials of the State and Defense departments that he is authorizing the dispatch of two divisions from Japan. He also states that he has ordered the implementation of a naval blockade of North Korea. Truman makes the U.S. position public during the afternoon. During this talk with the press the president emphasizes that the U.S. is not at war; the conflict is dubbed a “police action.” General Collins calls the other chiefs of staff at about 0530 and informs them of the decision to send ground

44 troops to Korea. They are miffed, but no formal protest is ever made. U.N. Ambassador Warren Austin speaks to the Security Council of the General Assembly, informing them of the U.S. initiatives (in response to U.N. resolutions of June 25 and 27) to curtail the hostilities in Korea. The strength of the U.S. Marine Corps stands at 74,279 men. The 1st Marine Division (reinforced), stationed at Camp Pendleton, California, contains 641 officers and 7,148 enlisted men. Due to the intolerable situation in Korea, the 1st Provisional Brigade will drain the weakened division further; however, by September 15, 26,000 Marines will bulge the 1st Marine Division, as calls go out and Marines (active and reserve) converge on Pendleton from points all across the country. More Marines will be drawn from the Mediterranean Fleet. It is a feat unparalleled in military history. The 1st Marine Division will have no time allotted for a rehearsal landing prior to the invasion of Inchon. — In Japan: General MacArthur is informed by Washington (directive 6-29-50) that he is to deploy U.S. Army forces in South Korea to keep communications and other important functions operating properly, to deploy additional troops to maintain control of a port and airfield in the vicinity of Pusan-Chinhae, and to commit air and naval forces against North Korean military targets, without encroaching against the Soviet Union or Manchuria (Communist China). The instructions from the president also stipulate that a dual blockade is to be initiated, whereby the Communists are prevented from attacking Formosa and the Formosans are similarly restrained from opening hostilities against the mainland. MacArthur is also informed that he is receiving operational control of the U.S. 7th Fleet. However, the directive, approved by the president, stipulates that MacArthur is not to retaliate against the Soviet Union if they directly intervene in the aggression, which places the American forces at a great disadvantage and possible jeopardy if they are fired upon and are forbidden to retaliate. MacArthur directs General Walton Walker to move the 24th Division to Korea. In turn, General Walker briefs General William F. Dean, commanding officer, 24th Division, on his orders. General Dean, according to the instructions, will command all U.S. Army forces in Korea. Dean is to transport his Division Headquarters and one infantry regiment to Pusan by air. The heavy equipment, including artillery, tanks, ammunition and food, are to be shipped to Korea by sea. Ultimately, the plans filter down to the man who will lead the task force, Lt. Colonel Charles B. Smith, who is awakened from his sleep and ordered to speed to the command post. Smith is ordered to take his battalion (minus Companies A and B) to Itazuke Air Base, where he will meet General Kean and receive further instructions. By 0300 on the 1st, the task force is on the highway on a 75 mile journey during a driving rain. The convoy reaches its destination slightly after 0800. In other activity, General Stratemeyer, convinced of the need for more air power, requests additional planes

45 to supplement his force. The appeal calls for twentythree B-29s, 164 F-80Cs, sixty-four F-51s, twentyone C-54s and twenty-one F-82s. The Air Force’s downsizing after World War II creates problems that will continue for the duration of the war. The Air Force responds but no F-80s are available for Far East Air Forces. Substitutes are instead sent, 150 F-51 Mustangs. Also, Stratemeyer pulls 50 dusty F-51s out of his storage bin for added punch. The F-51 proves better suited for the rugged conditions of the Korean airfields and it covers more range than the F-80s.

July 1 The North Koreans continue their southward drive. From Seoul, the N.K. 5th Regiment, 4th Division, held in reserve since the invasion began, pushes its 3rd Battalion across the Han River at 0400. The remainder of the division follows and ignites a fierce contest for Yongdungp’o that lasts until July 3. The South Koreans raise solid resistance and inflict heavy casualties upon the attackers. Nevertheless, by 0800 on July 3, the North Koreans seize control of the town and force the South Koreans to retreat. The enemy sustains 227 dead, 1,822 wounded and 107 men missing, while capturing the prize. As the hotly contested battle ensues, the N.K. 3rd Division also fords the Han. In other activity, the ADCOM convoy reaches Taejon. General Church establishes a new command post. Colonel Wright dispatches five of his KMAG officers to Suwon to assist the South Koreans there. The Eighth Army Operation Order calls for an initial delaying force, comprised of two rifle companies, reinforced by two platoons of 4.2 inch mortars and one platoon of 75mm recoilless rifles. The remainder of the 24th Division follows by sea. From Pusan, trains will transport the task force to P’yongt’aek, and from there, the troops advance to Osan, where they encounter overpowering resistance on July 5. The task force is composed of mostly green troops, but they are full of confidence and expect to quickly terminate the hostilities. In the central corridor of Korea, the South Korean 6th Division continues to fight effective delaying actions against the N.K. 7th Division, which has sustained about 400 casualties and several destroyed T-34 tanks, between Chunch’on and Hongch’on. The enemy advances slowly, marching from Hongch’on, through the mountainous terrain toward Wonju, a strategic rail and highway center. Here, too, elements of the S.K. 6th Division forge stiff resistance to further frustrate the N.K. commanding officer, Maj. Gen. Chon U. The sluggish advance apparently handicaps the time schedule of the North Korean main command, which replaces Chon U, on about the 4th of July, one day before the capitulation of Wonju. In conjunction, the N.K. 7th Division becomes the 12th N.K. Division to differentiate it from a new division that is activated and designated the 7th N.K. Division. Also, during the early part of July, MacArthur focuses on his plan to launch an amphibious landing behind the enemy lines, at Inchon. He will direct Admiral James T. Doyle to

July 1, 1950 make the proper preparations and study all the complexities of initiating the invasion. Doyle diligently executes his orders and subsequently informs MacArthur on the findings of his staff: “Our research listed every known geographical and naval handicap—Inchon had ’em all.” — In Okinawa: Vice Admiral A. D. Struble’s Striking Force (TF-77) departs Buckner Bay and steams toward Korea’s west coast. The naval force is composed of three components: a Screening Group, TG77.2, commanded by Captain C. W. Parker, USN, consisting of eight U.S. and two British destroyers; a Support Force, TG77.1, commanded by British Rear Admiral W.G. Andrewes, consisting of the Cruisers USS Rochester and HMS Belfast; and the Carrier Group TG77.4, commanded by Rear Admiral J. M. Hoskins, USN, composed of the USS Valley Forge and the HMS Triumph. While the convoy moves north, conditions on the Korean peninsula continue to deteriorate, prompting several dispatches to reach the fleet, essentially informing it to maintain the attack beyond the first day. The orders also specify that particular attention should be given to the railroads near Kumchon, Sariwon and Sinanju to disrupt the enemy’s supply line. — In the United States: There are no outward signs, but the White House and the military are concerned about the United States’ capability to handle a major Soviet threat. — In Japan: Task Force Smith, with 406 of its 440man strength, departs Japan for Korea. The task force is not designated TF Smith until several months later. Some elements had arrived at Pusan on the previous day. The unit is composed of the 1st Battalion, 21st Regiment, Rifle Companies B and C, both at less than full strength but each with six 2.36-inch bazooka teams and four 60-mm mortars; a recoilless rifle platoon (composite), less two of its four guns; one-half of a headquarters company; and four 4.2 inch mortars, two of which have not been airlifted. Six transport planes, attached to the 374th TCW, move the troops to Pusan from Korea. The first plane lifts off at 0845, but upon arrival at Pusan, it and the second plane, which is transporting Colonel C.B. Smith, are both compelled to return to Japan because of a thick fog that hovers over the runway. At about 1100, the Pusan airstrip receives the first of many flights. Colonel Charles B. Smith arrives on the tenth flight. Transport vehicles wait at the runway to carry the force seventeen miles to Pusan, where crowds anxiously await their arrival. Once there, the people greet the troops with a tumultuous welcome that includes banners and huge smiles. When the troop trains depart for Taejon at 2000, a South Korean band plays a spirited send-off. In other activity, the 34th Regiment begins boarding a ship during the night. It will embark Pusan on the night of the 2nd. The remainder of the 21st Regiment, except Companies A and D, embarks from Sasebo on July 3. Companies A and D travel separately by ship from Moji. In yet other activity, the Far East Command instructs the Eighth Army to take responsibility for total logis-

July 2, 1950

46

A contingent of Task Force Smith boards a C-54 transport in Japan on 1 July. The troops are the first U.S. combat troops to arrive in Korea. tical support of the U.S. and all other Allied forces operating in Korea, including the South Korean forces. The logistical responsibilities are assumed by Eighth Army Rear, which remains in Yokohama. This responsibility is transferred to Japan Logistical Command during August 1950. — In Hawaii: General Lemuel Shepherd, USMC, Commanding General FMF Pacific, arrives at Hawaii from the United States. General Shepherd is en route to the Far East, anticipating the arrival of Marines. Coincidentally, today General MacArthur requests a Marine Brigade to assist Eighth Army in Korea. Also, the U.S. Navy forms Task Force Yoke, which is composed of vessels that assemble on the West Coast and at Pearl Harbor. The naval task force is to be commanded by Rear Admiral Walter F. Boone.

July 2 Task Force Smith’s train pulls into Taejon at 0800. Soon after, Colonel Charles B. Smith is escorted by Colonel LeRoy Lutes to General Church’s headquarters where a meeting is ongoing between the general and several other U.S. and South Korean officers. General Church welcomes Colonel C.B. Smith and gives him a quick update that details where the task force is needed by referring to the spot on the map. General Church, as is the case with most of the American command, remains convinced that the invasion will be rebuffed. He tells Smith: “We have a little action up here. All we need is some men up here [pointing to the spot] who won’t run when they see tanks.” Colonel Smith reflects no apprehension. He has much

confidence in his officers, one-third of whom have seen combat in either the Atlantic or Pacific during World War II. Smith feels equally confident about his troops, although many are green; however, he is totally unaware of the enemy’s strength and the supporting tanks. Task Force Smith moves to the rest area, but Colonel Smith and several officers move out and travel north about eighty miles along harsh roads to Osan. Smith’s entourage passes innumerable Republic of Korea troops and civilians as they move south. The uncomfortable trip appears profitable, as Lt. Colonel Smith discovers what he believes is a perfect defensive position about three miles north of Osan. The selected site, a ragged ridge of hills that run north, intersects the road at right angles. Its point reaches a height of 300 feet and affords an excellent view of approaching traffic. In addition, the task force positions will control both the railroad and highway. During the reconnaissance mission, enemy planes pass over without detecting the Americans. Smith and his party return to Taejon after dark. Orders arrive that instruct Smith to move his force by rail to Ansong and P’yongt’aek, the former 20 miles southeast of Osan and the latter 15 miles south of the town. Again the troop train rolls north. Colonel Smith remains at P’yongt’aek, separated by about twelve miles from the other half of his force. He establishes headquarters along the main road. In other activity, General Dean reaches Korea by plane, but due to the darkness, his pilot is unable to locate the airstrip at Taejon. They return to Japan. On the following day, General Dean hitches a ride with

47 Captain Ben Tufts, the recently appointed liaison officer between the press and the army. Tuft’s pilot is familiar with Taejon and despite a dense fog, he lands at about 1030. While at General Church’s headquarters, General Dean receives word that he will command all U.S. Army troops in Korea, effective 0001 July 4. These Americans will face more than human enemies; the other foes, the weather and terrain, are equally severe. The Korean battlefields in summer frequently experience temperatures of more than 100 degrees, and the land is inundated with precipitous hills that bear sparse foliage. When the sun is not blazing, it is usually raining heavily. The elements extract nearly as many casualties due to exhaustion as those inflicted by the enemy during the early days of the war. Salt tablets are a necessity and heat exhaustion is commonplace. Central Mountain area: The S.K. 6th Division engages the N.K. 7th Division near Wonju. The stiff resistance hinders the enemy’s advance. In Air Force activity, at Pusan, the tremendous weight of the Air Force C-54s takes a heavy toll on the airfield. The Air Force is forced to cancel the flights of the C-54s until reinforcing steel plates arrive to support the runways. In the meantime, the Air Force uses C-47s to transport the troops and equipment; the smaller planes handle a maximum of eighteen troops. In Naval activity, the official U.N. blockade doesn’t begin until July 4. Nevertheless, at daybreak, a few naval guardians appear to scatter four N.K. torpedo boats that are escorting ten converted trawlers to Chumunjin. As the USS Juneau and two accompanying Royal Navy vessels alter course to attack the flotilla, the enemy PT boats move to strike first. This hostile en-

July 2, 1950 counter, which becomes the first naval engagement of the conflict, is brief and deadly. The PT boats receive the volley. Two PTs immediately sink, and the remaining two speed out of harm’s way. Soon after, additional salvos arc toward the flotilla. Seven enemy trawlers sink and the remaining two escape behind a breakwater. Also, an American LST delivers more reinforcements from Japan to Korea. Elements of the 52nd Field Artillery Battalion, commanded by Lt. Colonel Miller O. Perry, debark at Pusan. On the following day, this contingent moves north by train to augment Task Force Smith. In addition, contingents of the 34th Infantry Regiment, commanded by Colonel Jay Lovless, starts to arrive by sea at Pusan. On the following day, two LSTs arrive, transporting supplies and equipment. In other Naval activity, the Sergeant Keathley, an ammunition vessel, arrives at Pusan from Japan. The KMAG personnel, which had earlier evacuated Suwon and Pusan, debark. Upon arrival, they join with KMAG in Pusan under Colonel Emmerich. Later, most move by train to Taejon. A critical shortage of all types of vehicles exists within KMAG since the evacuation of Seoul; 48 vehicles, including jeeps, ambulances and trucks, are loaded aboard flatcars and forwarded under guard to Taegu. —In Hawaii: General Lemuel Shepherd arrives at Pearl Harbor to assume his new position as commander, Fleet Marine Force Pacific. Soon after his arrival in Honolulu, Shepherd receives a waiting message from the commandant that alerts him of the probability of Marines going to Korea. Before noon, General Shepherd meets with Admiral Radford. — In Japan: U.S. Ambassador William Sebald con-

Elements of the U.S. 24th Division board a ship in Japan on 2 July. The troops are en route to Korea.

July 3, 1950 fers with General Almond and subsequently with General MacArthur,\ to discuss a message received from the Chinese Nationalist Mission in Tokyo. Chiang Kaishek offers to commit three combat divisions to fight with the other U.N. troops. The offer is forwarded to Washington, where it is rejected. There is tremendous concern that Nationalist Chinese participation would precipitate the entry of Communist China and additionally, the Chinese lack armor, artillery, vehicles and sufficient ammunition. However, subsequent ground units that are committed by other countries arrive in the theater without arms and some even without uniforms. Most of the arms the Chinese Nationalists had received from the U.S. were confiscated by the Communists when Chiang Kai-shek’s forces were driven to Formosa. In other activity, General MacArthur dispatches a message to Washington that accepts the commitment of Marines to the Korean Theater. He requests that they be dispatched immediately. Back in the States, Admiral Sherman, subsequent to authorization by President Truman and the Joint Chiefs of Staff, directs Admiral Radford to transport the Marine units to the Far East. There are presently no Marine units of any consequence in the Far East. The 1st Marine Provisional Brigade will be the first American contingent to depart the U.S. to participate in the Korean conflict. In concert with the massive endeavor to reel in the manpower, the logistics of gathering sufficient equipment for the Marine Brigade presents a Herculean task: an enormous time constraint coupled with finding dependable operational vehicles and weapons. The veteran vehicles of the Pacific Campaign, referred to as antiques by many, are recalled from their sanctuary at the colossal USMC supply depot in the vast desert area at Barstow, California. Once the “mothballs” are swept off, the regalvanized iron chariots move to Camp Pendleton and El Toro. Amphibian tractors, DUKWs, trucks and jeeps, most still brandishing the scars of the Pacific Campaign, roll toward the coast along the highways and rails to meet the deadline. At the conclusion of World War II, much of the U.S. equipment was abandoned, never to be returned to the States. However, the Marines salvaged everything they could, even if it might have belonged to another branch of the armed services. It has been said that a lot of the equipment that arrived at California received new paint because some appeared more gray than green. The Marines do receive some new equipment, such as their allotment of the new 3.5 rocket launchers and some vehicles. Nonetheless, the veteran vehicles overwhelmingly surpass the number of veterans designated to drive them.

July 3 Specialists in air-to-ground communications arrive in Taejon. These two Fifth Air Force Tactical Air Control contingents greatly enhance the U.N. support of ground troops. In the process, much of the inadvertent bombing and strafing of South Korean forces during these first days of the war ceases. Today, four Royal Australian Air Force Mustangs mistakenly

48 bomb and strafe a nine-boxcar ammunition train that has paused in P’yongt’aek, to await orders to head north. The Australian pilots make six passes and devastate the train, the station and a large section of the town; many civilian casualties are sustained. Additionally, the ammunition continues to explode throughout the night. Also, thirty trucks are destroyed and about 200 ROK troops are killed. In another tragic incident, the town of Suwon and a passing South Korean convoy are each accidentally struck by friendly aircraft fire. Return fire knocks out one of the planes. The pilot makes an emergency landing at Suwon Airfield and to his surprise, is captured by the friendly KMAG and ROK forces there. General Church contacts FEAF and pleads that the Air Force confine their strikes to positions north of the Han River bridge. In other activity, the U.S. 52nd Artillery Battalion arrives in Taejon. General Church orders it to move by train to P’yongt’aek to join Task Force Smith, but due to the accidental damage at the railroad station, the reinforcements move to Songhwan-ni, and from there they drive six miles to arrive at P’yongt’aek before daybreak on the 4th. At Wonju, vicious fighting continues between contingents of the S.K. 6th Division and the N.K. 7th Division. In other activity, Yongdungp’o falls to the North Korean 4th Division. During the morning, the first enemy tanks cross the Han River via a repaired railroad bridge to join the infantry. In conjunction, the N.K. 6th Division continues to advance; elements nudge against Inchon. After dark, six tanks, trailed by an infantry battalion, roll into the strategic port city. In Naval activity, the carriers of the 7th Fleet, supported by British carriers, initiate operations off the west coast of North Korea in conjunction with orders issued by the commander of Naval Forces Far East on 30 June. The carriers USS Valley Forge and the HMS Triumph launch planes against enemy airfields on the west coast in the vicinity of Pyongyang-Chinnamp’o. These aircraft, attached to Admiral Struble’s 7th Fleet carriers, initiate their first air attack of the war. At 0600, sixteen F4U Corsairs (VF-54), commanded by Lt. Commander D.K. English, and twelve AD Skyraiders (VA-55), commanded by Lt. Commander N.D. Hodson, shoot from the decks of the Valley Forge; the former each carry eight 5-inch rockets, and the latter each carry six 100-pound and two 500-pound bombs. Both groups close on the airfield at Pyongyang. Subsequently, the F9F2 Panther jets, also aboard the Valley Forge, catapult into the sky and quickly climb higher before overtaking the slower propeller craft. The jets zap the target before the enemy planes can get off the ground, initiating the U.S. Navy’s first jet combat attack. Although the weather is poor, the skies are clear on the first pass and three aircraft are destroyed. On the second pass, the Panthers decimate two more enemy aircraft. Meanwhile, ammunition storage areas are ablaze when the Corsairs and Skyraiders that follow the jets converge on the target. Their dives account for a direct

49

July 3, 1950

Panther jets prepare to take off from a carrier to strike enemy targets in Korea. hit on the fuel storage area, the total annihilation of the three hangars and complete destruction of the runways. North Korean return fire is totally inadequate. No hits are sustained by any of the attacking aircraft. Later in the day, the planes strike again. The air strikes pummel the rail center in Pyongyang and the

bridges that span the Taedong River. Fifteen locomotives are devastated, ten others sustain damage and large numbers of boxcars are decimated; however, the bridge remains intact. — In the United States: The Joint Chiefs of Staff meet in Washington, D.C., to discuss strategy. One of

July 3, 1950 the topics is the possible commitment of Marines to Korea. General Cates, commandant, Marine Corps, is permitted to attend only this part of the meeting. The joint chiefs are: General Bradley, chairman; General Lawton Collins, Army chief of staff; Admiral Sherman, chief of Naval Operations; and General Hoyt Vandenberg, Air Force chief of staff. The commandant of the Marine Corps jots down a note of historical importance on his wall calendar: “Attended JCS [Joint Chiefs of Staff ] meeting. Orders for employment of FMF approved.” The apparent movement of the corps had already been in the works. On July 1st, Admiral Forest Sherman inquired of Admiral Radford the time involved to transport either a Marine Battalion Landing Team or a Marine Regimental Combat Team (RCT) from the West Coast to Korea. On the 2nd, Radford responds, informing Sherman that a landing team could be loaded in four days and embarked in six days. He also states that an RCT could be loaded in six days and be prepared to sail in ten days. Admiral C. Turner Joy makes it known that a Marine RCT could be dispatched to the Pacific if General MacArthur would want it. MacArthur had accepted the offer immediately and so stated in his message on July 2nd, which

50 requested the immediate presence of the Marine RCT and its supporting aircraft. Nonetheless, there is still much reluctance on the part of the joint chiefs to commit the Marines, and there are additional efforts by General Vandenberg to cancel out Marine aviation units, but to no avail. In other activity, Major Vincent J. Gottschalk, USMC, is appointed commanding officer, VMO-6, the 1st Marine Provisional Brigade’s Air Observation Squadron. The squadron will be composed of eight fixed wing aircraft (light observation planes) and seven rotary wing aircraft (helicopters), the latter being brought in from Quantico, Virginia. Gottschalk is directed to have his outfit ready to embark on the 11th. It becomes an extraordinary challenge that requires an immense effort and some ingenuity, peculiar to the corps, to accomplish the mission. The helicopters and accompanying personnel will not arrive at El Toro until two days before shipping out. The fixed wing aircraft personnel number eight pilots and thirty-three enlisted Marines. — In Japan: General MacArthur dispatches a message to Washington just after midnight ( July 2–3), with regard to his instructions to implement a naval blockade of North Korea. He lays out a pragmatic plan that

An AD Skyraider takes off from a carrier to support ground troops. The plane is carrying more than 4,000 pounds of bombs and rockets.

51

July 3, 1950

Top: Planes aboard the USS Valley Forge prepare for launch to strike enemy targets in North Korea. Bottom: U.S. bombers strike the railroad bridges at Seoul. Two of three are hit. The third is destroyed by TNT.

July 4, 1950 he considers mandatory to effectively enforce the blockade. Geographically, the alignment of warships must isolate the eastern ports of Ch’ongjin, Najin and Wonsan, while simultaneously they cap the sea lanes off the west coast ports of Anju, Chinnamp’o, Inchon and Sonch’on. Due to presidential restrictions, which explicitly forbid action or reaction to the Soviet Union, Najin, Ch’ongjin and Sonch’on are left unmolested. This non-action keeps U.N. warships a safe distance from the Soviet Union and Manchuria. However, it grants the Communists several lanes that are guaranteed safe passage. MacArthur notifies Washington that all available ships will be at their assigned stations on the 4th. Also, General MacArthur, aware that available ammunition is useless against tanks, requests that the newly perfected 3.5 rocket launcher be sped to Korea. Production of this weapon’s ammunition had begun about fifteen days before the outbreak of hostilities in Korea. The initial shipment of 3.5 rocket launchers is flown from Travis Air Base, California, on July 8 and it arrives on the 10th. By July 12, the rocket launchers reach Taejon. Immediately thereafter, particular men of the 24th Division are indoctrinated on the proper use of this weapon. This new antitank weapon is constructed of aluminum, weighs 15 pounds, and stretches five feet in length. The rocket launcher is has a smooth bore and an open tube that is capable of launching an eight and one-half pound, 23 inch long shell. The U.S. Eighth Army is in dire need of a weapon that can penetrate the armor of the Russian-built tanks. This new shell is expected to destroy any tank encountered. In other activity, the Far East Air Force establishes a Joint Operations Center on Kyushu at Itazuke Air Base to better control the fighter planes that operate over Korea.

July 4

Twenty-two additional officers are named general and special staff officers of USAFIK. The officer selections are basically drawn from ADCOM, but some KMAG officers are chosen. Most KMAG officers who had returned to Japan after the Communist invasion arrived back in Korea aboard the Sergeant Keathley on July 2. Also, Brigadier General Crump Garvin and some of his staff arrive in Pusan to establish Pusan Base Command, which is activated this day. On the 13th of July, it will be renamed Pusan Logistical Command. The U.N. Naval blockade of portions of North Korea becomes effective this day. In other activity, the North Korean 3rd and 4th Divisions, with Yongdungp’o under their belt and tanks by their side, reinitiate their southern drive. The columns move down the major rail-highway route. At about 0600, the 5th Regiment, N.K. 4th Division, takes the point. It drives feverishly down Suwon Road and covers half the distance between Yongdungp’o and Suwon by 1200. Infantry, augmented by eleven tanks, move into Anyang-ni. Meanwhile, South Koreans who are fleeing on foot and in trucks from Suwon to P’yongt’aek cause the route to become heavily clogged.

52 The traffic jams last throughout the night. During the day, enemy tanks overpower a delaying force attached to the S.K. 5th Regiment, 2nd Division, operating between Anyang-ni and Suwon. The Republic of Korea unit, lacking much equipment, is crushed by the armor, then overrun by infantry. During the daylong skirmishes, U.S. and Australian Air Force planes attempt to aid the ROK forces near Osan, but on several occasions they mistakenly strike ROK troops and inflict more casualties. The South Koreans, unable to neutralize the enemy advance, pull out of Suwon before dark, and by midnight, the town is taken by the N.K. 4th Division. Meanwhile, Lt. Colonel Brad Smith pulls his separated command into P’yongt’aek. It is bolstered by a contingent of the 52nd Artillery Battalion, which had come in from Japan by sea. The unit is composed of one-half section of headquarters and service batteries and the complete complement of Battery A, comprised of 108 men and 73 vehicles. In other activity, Colonel Brad Smith and a small party, including Colonel Miller O. Perry, return to the Osan vicinity and decide on definite positions for the U.S. artillery. As they travel, they pass ROK troops setting the bridges for possible detonation. Also, in Taejon, Generals Dean and Church confer with General Barth, acting commanding general of the 24th Division Artillery. Brigadier General Henry J.D. Meyer, the divisional artillery commander, is en route back from the States. General Dean sends General Barth to P’yongt’aek, with orders for Colonel Brad Smith to deploy at “those good positions near Osan you told General Church about.” Just after midnight, Task Force Smith moves out of P’yongt’aek, after working out some unexpected problems with transportation. A scarcity of North Korean drivers suddenly develops when word arrives that the convoy will move north. Without hesitation and unwilling to listen to persuasion, the North Koreans vanish into the darkness as fast as their GI boots can carry them. Unperturbed, the Americans jump into the drivers’ seats and head north, only to encounter more difficulty. Driving under blackout conditions, they encounter several unexpected obstacles, primarily ROK forces and North Korean civilians heading south. As the task force continues along the clogged road, the Americans attempt to convince the South Korean demolition troops who are setting charges on the bridges to stop because the Americans require use of the spans. One particular group of South Koreans, apparently unimpressed with the American request, refuses to discontinue their operation. General Barth picks up the crates of dynamite and heaves them into the river to terminate the problem. Meanwhile, the efforts of the South Korean 6th Division to hold Wonju and fend off the N.K. 7th Division begins to falter, due to overpowering enemy strength. Wonju is abandoned by the following day. At Pusan, the 34th Regiment, which had arrived on July 2, moves north by rail. The 1st Battalion departs at about daylight and arrives at P’yongt’aek about 0500 ( July 5). The remainder of the regiment follows later. Colonel Ayres arrives with the 1st Battalion.

53 In other activity, Colonel Emmerich departs Pusan for Taegu to join the other KMAG personnel there and establish a small base of operations. In the East Coast sector, the North Korean 5th Division continues to advance along the coastal road without opposition. Its 11th Regiment, which temporarily has been on a separate trek, has been traveling for eight days along an inland route, which passes through P’yongch’ang and Yongwol. On or about this day, the N.K. 11th Regiment encounters a contingent of the S.K. 8th Division at Ch’unyang. The South Koreans are attempting to withdraw inland to help defend the Tanyang area. After the hard-fought skirmish, the N.K. 11th Regiment swings east to join the division at Ulchin, on or near the 10th of July. The N.K. 5th Division incurs about 1,800 casualties during this journey through the nasty mountain terrain. In Naval activity, Corsairs from the Valley Forge destroy ten locomotives and one bridge, while the Skyraiders eliminate some small vessels in a nearby river. Enemy fire damages four Skyraiders, but all planes return to the Valley Forge. One plane attempts a crash landing and destroys three planes and damages six others in the process. The two days of raids destroy eleven enemy planes and inflict damage to one other. — In the United States: Lt. General Lemuel C. Shepherd, Jr., commanding officer, Fleet Marine Force Pacific, and Colonel Victor Krulak (later commandant), a G-3 staff officer, receive orders to proceed from Pearl Harbor to Japan to meet with General MacArthur. General Shepherd, prior to his departure, requests that the 5th Marines’ rifle companies each receive a third platoon before shipping out to Korea, and on the fol-

July 4, 1950 lowing day, Admiral Sherman approves the request. The additional firepower is welcome, but unfortunately there is insufficient time to add a third company to each of the battalions, which are operating with only two companies per peacetime requirements. The 1st Marine Brigade, scheduled to embark in one week, initiates round-the-clock activity at Camp Pendleton and its neighboring base, El Toro, which domiciles the air components of the brigade. Telegrams are sizzling the wires, informing Marines stationed at posts scattered throughout the nation to report to Pendleton and El Toro. Included in this gathering of warriors are the first helicopter pilots of the U.S. Armed Forces to be established as a unit, destined for overseas combat duty. — In Japan: Far East Command holds another meeting. Representatives of the Army, Navy and Air Force attend, with General Almond presiding. Brigadier General William S. Fellers, USMC, commanding general, Troop Training Unit (TTU), Amphibious Training Command, Pacific Fleet, and Colonel Edward Forney, USMC, commanding officer, Mobile Training Team Able, are summoned to the meeting. Forney has been in Japan since Spring to instruct U.S. Army troops on amphibious warfare. Admiral Doyle and his staff, aboard the USS McKinley, have also been instructed to fly to Tokyo to attend this meeting. Doyle is under temporary orders to assist in the formulation of plans for a 1st Cavalry Division amphibious landing “somewhere in Korea,” possibly Kunsan, but MacArthur seems intent on the target being Inchon. General MacArthur informs his chief of staff, General Almond, to prepare for an amphibious invasion behind enemy

U.S. and British planes strike enemy targets at Pyongyang on 4 July.

July 4, 1950

54

Top: A contingent of U.S. soldiers tries to grab a little rest along a road during early July. Bottom: U.S. troops pause along a road in the vicinity of Suwon. An M1 rifle leans against a radio (SCR 300) on the left forefront. Two .30-caliber Browning machine guns can be seen next to the soldier in the forefront. lines in Korea; but, due to a drastic shortage of trained amphibious assault troops, an absolute decision cannot be reached. The Joint Strategic Plans and Operations Group, led by Brigadier General Edwin K. Wright, is presently

working on a plan that calls for one Marine Regimental Combat Team and a U.S. Army assault force to land at Inchon in coordination with a frontal attack by the 24th and 25th Divisions. MacArthur suggests that the 1st Cavalry Division, commanded by General Hobart

55 H. Gay, comprise the Army assault force. In conjunction, PhibGru One, Admiral Doyle’s amphibious group, and Training Team Able, led by Colonel Edward Forney, are given responsibility for training the force. Forney, on the following day (5th), becomes the G-5 (plans) specialist assigned to assist the cavalry with the operation, dubbed BLUE HEARTS, which is tentatively scheduled for July 22. In other activity, General William Dean assumes command of all U.S. Army forces in Japan. He appoints General Church his deputy commander. Also, General MacArthur orders that a base command be established in Pusan. It will be commanded by Brigadier General Crump Garvin. — In Okinawa: The 29th Regiment, composed of only two under-strength battalions, receives about 400 draftees from the United States.

July 5 THE BATTLE OF OSAN Task Force Smith, composed of 540 men, is a blend of seasoned veterans who had seen duty in either the Atlantic or Pacific theaters during World War II, and a heftier proportion of untried troops from the post-war era. Colonel Brad Smith’s force moves confidently to intercept and halt the advancing hordes of Communist North Koreans. Task Force Smith, the first American contingent to face Communist troops in the Korean conflict (war), completes the last miles of its trek to plug the dike. After the tedious journey from P’yongt’aek, Smith’s convoy reaches its designated positions north of Osan at about 0300. The troops debark and immediately begin to deploy and plant the artillery to meet the anticipated enemy thrust. Despite an annoying and incessant penetrating downpour, the operation, designed to foil the enemy and ensure its failure, unfolds methodically, according to the planned strategy of Colonel Smith. Task Force Smith expects to firmly hold the line and extinguish the threat. Two platoons of Company B spread out in positions that force them to squat uncomfortably in the irritable dampness to fortify their line of defense east of the long, winding Osan-Suwon Road. The remaining platoon digs in along the west side of the road, atop an elevated knob. Nearby, a 75mm recoilless rifle with its barrel pointing north is perched on the eastern fringe of the highway. In addition, 4.2 inch mortars are deployed on the south (reverse) slope of the rugged ridge, several hundred yards away and directly to the rear of Company B. Slightly behind B Company stand three agile platoons of Company C. One platoon stretches solidly along a slim ridge that trails south on the west side of the railroad tracks. It provides a refused right flank. The other two platoons hold their positions east of the tracks, and another 75-mm recoilless rifle peers north from its location just west of the tracks. The infantry gets some additional muscle when four 2.36 bazookas and four .50-caliber machine guns are dispersed among the lines, manned by volunteer crews from headquarters and service batteries personnel. Four 105-mm howitzers are planted about 2,000

July 5, 1950 yards to the rear of the infantry. Each howitzer has been towed individually by two jeeps, the only vehicles capable of maneuvering the primitive, slim dirt path. The big guns are neatly scattered amidst a cluster of houses that stand between saturated rice paddies to the front and shallow hills to the rear. A fifth howitzer is improvised for use as an antitank weapon. It is plugged in about halfway between the infantry line and the main battery site. The artillery contingents have about 1,200 rounds of ammunition on site and several additional truckloads are concealed in the houses. However, HEAT ammo, that which will be required to neutralize the Russian-made tanks, incredibly, is missing, except for a mere six rounds. When the ammunition was loaded in Japan, only 18 rounds of HEAT ammo were on hand, six of which were allotted to A Company. The ability of the less potent HE ammunition becomes the primary unknown factor. The weapons have been test fired and stand ready, but there is no way of knowing if they can kill the tanks. However, as the first glimpse of daylight arrives on this dreary rain-drenched terrain, the defenders sense that the answer to this and numerous other questions would soon be obvious. But for now, the 540 Americans, acting as vanguard for the U.N., bide their time, awaiting the inevitable approach of the enemy whose strength and numbers remain a mystery. The Americans lack tanks, and due to the inclement weather, there will also be no aircraft to bolster the positions. And all the South Korean troops in the area had by this time retreated south. From his position atop the ridge, Colonel Smith stares toward Suwon, which is surprisingly visible despite being eight miles to the north. Shortly after 0700, Smith spots activity on the highway just outside of the town, but it is not quite identifiable. By 0730, the movement proves to be an advancing column of enemy tanks, trailed by infantry. The Communists, unaware of the Americans, are marching toward Osan, situated between Seoul and Chonan, to crush the South Korean troops. Meanwhile, General Barth returns to the artillery sector, but he has no knowledge yet of the imminent encounter with the North Koreans. A forward artillery observer tracks the advancing T34 tanks. At about 0800, he requests artillery fire. At approximately 0816, the U.S. Army fires its first artillery salvo of the war. Initially, Gun 2 launches two shells, and follows with a string of fire from the adjoining pieces. The shells arc toward the enemy armor, which is closing from 4,000 yards, but within two thousand yards of the vulnerable infantry. While the howitzers search for more precise fire, the observer, by use of his phone, helps stabilize their accuracy by fixing the range. An avalanche of shells pounds the approaching tanks, but to the amazement of the onlooking U.S. infantry, the tanks continue to advance, unharmed by the storm of artillery fire. The howitzers maintain their fire, but the tanks continue to advance unharmed. The infantry become temporarily mesmerized while they watch shells that strike tanks and seem unable to even dent the paint.

July 5, 1950 It is a startling revelation to the stunned Americans, who believed they could easily overmatch the advancing enemy. Some expected to be back in Japan to attend an upcoming weekend regimental party. Now, these seemingly invincible tanks encroach the infantry-held ridges. Many other tanks trail the vanguard. It becomes increasingly apparent that the lack of antitank mines means that Task Force Smith faces imminent disaster. Meanwhile, the menacing armor roll forward, unimpeded by obstacles and U.S. presence. The eight tanks advance in challenging fashion. In single file, the armor drives directly down the road closing toward a range of 700 yards. Meanwhile, Colonel Smith has prudently ordered his recoilless rifle teams to resist firing until the tanks breach the 700-yard mark. Suddenly, in unison, the two 75-mm guns, deployed on opposite sides of the highway, commence firing. The raging storm of fire descends precisely on the column and scores ferocious direct hits that inflict no damage. The tanks push forward and scoff at the incessant barrage of incoming shells. The T-34s commence a blistering enfilade. Menacing 85-mm cannon and 7.62mm machine gun shells lambaste the saddle of the ridge. The violent bombardment squeezes the positions of the infantry and rips the ground asunder with a myriad of relentless fire. The attack implants instant apprehension in their hearts. The odds against the men of U.S. Task Force Smith increase greatly as their positions become more perilous. Some might consider them a modern modified version of the men who participated in the legendary Charge of the Light Brigade. Most certainly, they find themselves greatly outnumbered near a valley of death in a far-away land. But it is the propensity of the individual G.I. to excel under pressure that will forestall annihilation. The first wave of muddy tanks prepares to roll through the infantry. They stand close enough for an American to peer down the turrets when the bazookas spring into action. One adventurous 2nd Lieutenant, Ollie D. Connor, waits anxiously as the point tanks pass his personal rut along the east side of the road. Then he bolts from his prone position and snaps off 22 consecutive rockets to strike the rear of the armor, its most fragile location. Apparently, the shells inflict no damage; rather they glance off the rear to the astonishment of the onlookers. Unmolested, the unflappable tanks resume their drive through the pass. It is possible that some bazooka fire has scored damage, but the tanks maintain their advance. Within minutes, two lead tanks clear the pass and are quickly met by fire from the howitzer, which had been out front with the infantry and in possession of the six rounds of HEAT ammunition. Both tanks sustain damage, which forces them to pull off the road to permit the trailing tanks to pass. Two North Koreans flee their burning tank by jumping out with their hands in the air. Soon after, another tanker emerges from the inferno, but he comes out fighting. The enemy soldier fires his burp gun toward a nearby machine gun position and kills the unidentified assistant gunner, whom

56 history will record as the first American fighting man to die during the Korean War. U.S. return fire kills the three North Koreans. In the meantime, the remaining tanks resume the attack, but the Americans have expended their effective HEAT ammunition, all six rounds. This assures the galloping T-34s a free pass to Osan. In the meantime, General Barth returns to P’yongt’aek to forewarn the reinforcements of the 34th Regiment that the enemy tanks are likely to break through the first line of defense and most probably will strike their positions. While the remaining six lead tanks crash forward, the remainder advance in intervals of four to a group, adding the raw firepower of 24 additional tanks. It is an awesome sight to the dug-in infantry, but surprisingly, the tanks ignore the foot soldiers and plow forward. The armor leaves the fate of Task Force Smith to the approaching N.K. 4th Division. The final tank passes the infantry at about 0900. About 20 men of Task Force Smith have been killed or wounded. The infantry had earlier predicted that the tanks would not pass and gave the artillerymen the assurance: “Don’t worry....” Now, there is little time for worry. It is time to fight for survival, or surely Task Force Smith and the artillerymen face annihilation. To make the critical situation even more grave, the first of the roving steel monsters chew up the telephone wire that had been strung along the road to keep communications open between the advance infantry and the laid-back artillery units. This bad luck is further compounded by the incessant, dismal cloudburst that seriously interferes with radio transmissions. The radio operators struggle to keep their superior officers informed of the conditions on the battlefield. All radio communication ceases at about 1100, when the saturated radios completely fail. By this time, the artillery contingents require neither radios nor phones to inform them of the location of the enemy tanks. The turrets are nearly down their throats. Suddenly, the clanking armor roars into action and commences firing into suspected U.S. positions, but the enemy misses the mark. The concealed positions of the artillery remain unscathed. Nevertheless, if the turrets were elephant trunks, the Americans could toss peanuts to them. The tanks continue to press forward. Artillery shells pound the approaching armor, again to no avail, except that the fire extracts wariness from the enemy. They surge forward but with a touch of caution. Upon reaching a point about 500 yards from the firing battery, the tanks pause, as if to seek refuge, but then in an instant, as if recoiled, they spring forward. Throwing the momentary caution to the wind in an effort to evade a direct hit, the armor, with their hatches closed and their guns firing, run the gauntlet in record time. All the while, the enemy has been unable to discover the exact positions of the artillery, which gives the Americans a slight reprieve. The tank fire still inflicts no harm. Meanwhile, U.S. guns, bolstered by three accompanying bazooka teams, commence fire. From a distance of

57 150 to 300 yards, the gunners score repeated hits but inflict no serious damage. Two other bazooka teams, led by Colonel M. Perry and Sergeant Edwin Eversole, rush to support the artillerymen as soon as they learn of the breakthrough. Both men reach the artillery positions just before the tanks arrive. But Perry and Eversole get snagged in a rice paddy between the howitzers and the tanks. The lead tank fires and severs a telephone pole, which topples toward Eversole. He reacts in time and rolls into a drainage ditch to barely escape death. During the skirmish, bazooka fire strikes the third tank in the column and damages its tracks. Exerting little effort, the remaining armor passes the stalled tank and continues the advance. The four overworked and undernourished howitzers remain in operational condition. Colonel Perry and an interpreter move toward the paralyzed tank to persuade its crew to surrender, but no response is forthcoming. Perry decides to violently evict the tenants. He orders the howitzers to fire. Three quick pumps from the guns and two North Koreans pop out of the hatch and run to a culvert for cover. A squad moves out and an exchange occurs. The two North Koreans perish. Colonel Perry becomes wounded by small arms fire during the action. Despite a leg wound, and aware of the imminent arrival of more tanks, he refuses evacuation and continues to command. Shortly thereafter, the deadly parade appears. A long chain of tanks noisily clanks down the road. Moving turret-to-tail like a band of mechanical elephants, they probe and penetrate deeply. No intervals appear in the line of defiant armor as the ordeal begins to accelerate to a more dangerous plateau. For Task Force Smith, despite the lopsided odds, discipline has been the order

July 5, 1950 of the day, but the enemy’s overwhelming superiority soon changes the tempo. The armor crashes forward and provokes disorganization, confusion and with some, the lack of a will to return fire. Unquestionably, some troops run for the rear; however, most stand firmly and fight. As the second wave of tanks comes into range, troops are spotted aboard them. By this point, the anxiety of the defenders dissipates and is replaced by a shrill fear that causes some over-stressed artillerymen to abandon their weapons and begin to “take off.” One of the remaining troops described these men as “shy about helping.” The test of leadership stands naked along a small, charred parcel of barren earth that has already reclaimed a few proud Americans. No bland gray monuments mark the spot in their honor. But it can never be erased from the minds of the men who are there, for they surely received more than their fair share of hell in the boondocks. Instinctively, the officers revert to dragging the ammunition to the guns and shoving the shells irreverently into the barrels. The senior NCOs (noncommissioned officers) then resume the fire in an attempt to halt the onslaught. The new gunners hardly miss a beat during the unexpected interruption. The sterling example of the officers, such as Colonel Perry and Lieutenant Dwain L. Scott, beams with magnetism and soon thereafter, the men begin to return to their duty stations. Both Perry and Scott receive the Silver Star for their heroism and leadership. Amazingly, the tanks are content to continue their advance and expend very little ammunition against the artillery positions. However, the enemy fire does set one building ablaze and it detonates a small supply

An enemy self-propelled gun after being destroyed by U.S. fire.

July 5, 1950 depot that contains about 300 artillery shells. The tanks whiz by and the artillery continues to pound it with streams of fire. Despite the heavy barrage, only one tank sustains damage. Its tracks are severed when it passes directly in front of an artillery piece. Although the tanks escape much harm, the troops riding on them do not fare so well. The ring of shells that harmlessly bounce around and off the tanks rakes the enemy infantrymen, who brave the fire by riding on the outside of the scrambling vehicles. Most are blown off the armor by the sizzling cannon fire, but some remain aboard. As the tanks scramble down the road, some still transport dead infantrymen that are either sprawled in unnatural suspension or slung over the sides. Many others, catapulted from the speeding armor, lie dead along the highway. It is a shocking and gruesome sight even for the troops of Task Force Smith. The final tank passes through the artillery positions at about 1015. The column closes against Osan, but it has four fewer tanks to commit and another three T-34s are hindered by damages. The enemy has inflicted about twenty casualties to the U.S. infantry, and the latest exchange has caused three artillery casualties, including Colonel Perry. In addition, the North Koreans have destroyed one howitzer and inflicted damage to one other. Back on the ridges, while the tanks rumble toward Osan, the worst is not over. For the stunned infantrymen that are fastened to the ridges, it is just a mysterious lull, prior to another drastic ordeal. Silence descends upon the ridges soon after the final tank crashes through their positions. In the wake of the enemy armor, the survivors peer across the bloodied perimeter to see the bodies of men who only moments ago had been their friends. The grisly scene escalates the aura of gloom. Other than an occasional pounding of a spade or the crackle of an ammunition-can being checked, there is little unnecessary noise. Raindrops break the utter silence and seemingly fall in cadence with the racing hearts of the sentinels who prepare for the next waves of the enemy. Despite the momentary lull of the conspicuous sounds of battle, the tension rings resoundingly. The tanks, which had easily broken through the artillery, had stunned the defenders, but the officers retained confidence in the ability of the infantrymen in the hills and expected them to halt the attack. Nevertheless, they also have a new and stark understanding of the enemy they face. Before embarkation from Japan, the message conveyed to Task Force Smith was that they would be participating in a police action. Now they are praying that they have enough police. The first signal of the imminence of more combat appears about one hour after the encounter with the tanks, when Colonel Smith discovers another huge flurry of motion occurring just outside of Suwon. The soggy Suwon-Osan Road begins to swell with large amounts of troops and vehicles that are heading south. Task Force Smith, called “an arrogant display of

58 strength” by General MacArthur, was intended to display American resolve and deter further aggression by the North Koreans. The task force had accepted the responsibility honorably, and up to now it had been able to retain its confidence. But as the enemy movement comes into clearer focus, it becomes evident that the positions are untenable. Smith’s artillery is of little value. Most of the guns lack proper ammunition. And there is no available air support. The enemy column is spearheaded by three tanks. The file flows like boiling lava and moves in an irregular uninterrupted line. The massive convoy is composed of countless trucks and an incalculable number of troops who march with indifference to a saturating rain. Colonel Smith ponders the awesome sight and prepares to react. The colossal column takes about one hour to close within 1,000 yards of Smith’s defenses. He estimates it to be six miles long. Undeterred by the overwhelming odds, Task Force Smith digs in at the pass to meet and engage the enemy. The surviving artillery commences firing once the column reaches a point about 1,000 yards from the perimeter, but soon after, communications again cease, complicating what is already a Herculean task. Initially, the tanks advance unmolested, but soon encounter heavy opposition. Mortars and machine guns plaster the iron monsters and score much higher success rates than the previous encounter against with the first wave of tanks. Direct hits strike the lead trucks and ignite tumultuous explosions. The gunners then increase their rate of fire and yet more trucks are set afire; still, the tanks press forward. Meanwhile, the truckers flee from their splattered vehicles and dive for the trenches. Farther back, other troops jump from their unharmed vehicles and spread out. Some scurry from their trucks to less hazardous positions and await orders to attack. Other enemy infantrymen advance toward the finger ridge. They deploy in concert with some contingents that maneuver to execute a double envelopment, designed to trap and annihilate the isolated Americans. Meanwhile, the U.S. maintains a solid wall of fire that forbids frontal advance. Temporarily, the North Koreans project no desire to strike the nimble flanks. By 1230, heavy numbers of enemy troops control a hill on the west side of the highway, which provides them with a tremendous advantage over a Company B, platoon, deployed on a nearby knob. The endangered unit is quickly ordered to withdraw to the east side of the highway. A feverish exchange of fire erupts as the Americans attempt to hold the fragile line. Task Force Smith also must contend with overpowering enemy forces that dominate the hills above its right flank. In the midst of this marathon of death, while enemy machine guns on the right flank pummel the perimeter, the task force attempts to distribute additional ammunition among the troops. During this vicious exchange, communication between the artillery and infantry remains inoperable. Adding to the dire circumstances, weather becomes nastier. The elements eradicate any

59 possibility of potent air strikes. Rapidly, the situation deteriorates further and few options remain. The enemy closes the noose tightly. Contingents drive against both flanks in synchronization with another powerful force that hammers against the rear door of the beleaguered Americans. By 1430, Colonel Smith orders a disciplined withdrawal that is destined to be extremely risky. The troops pull back in “leap-frog” motion. This is a difficult procedure under normal battle conditions, but Task Force Smith is saddled with an extraordinary amount of disadvantages, including a rapidly depleting ammunition supply that nears total exhaustion. Because of severed communications, Colonel Perry and the artillery units remain stranded about one mile to the rear. The choices are few: retreat or die. Still, they must move back without becoming reacquainted with the enemy tanks that also lurk in the rear. The task force withdraws, reluctantly leaving its dead and some wounded behind. Between twenty-five to thirty severely wounded troops are left at the ridge to the compassion of the new and yet unknown enemy. Those with lesser wounds retire with the various units, but along the dogged retreat, intense enemy fire causes separations. Consequently more wounded fall behind, unable to complete the horrid trip. During the harsh retreat, the survivors are forced to abandon the recoilless rifles, mortars and machine guns. Along the routes of escape, the enemy pours tenacious fire into the ranks. At times, quarters are so close that machine gun and burp gun fire strike them from point-blank range. Initially, when orders to retreat spread through the ranks, one platoon of Company B does receive the word to fall back. Company C leads, trailed by the medics and battalion headquarters. Company B provides cover fire for the pull-back and it is the last to evacuate the hills. In concert with B Company’s withdrawal, Colonel Smith darts through the rice paddies and heads west to hook up with Perry and inform him of the withdrawal. Once Smith encounters Perry, the artillerymen quickly initiate their retreat, but before they move back, the troops disarm the five remaining operable howitzers and carry the breech locks and aiming circles with them. After a harrowing march though unfamiliar terrain, the artillerymen reach the fringes of Osan without incident. Surprisingly, the trucks remain in place, exactly where they had been parked. The vehicles have sustained several machine gun bullet holes, but they are operable. Without hesitation, the convoy moves toward Ansong by way of an alternate route that shadows the southern tip of Osan. The contingent expects this route to be free of enemy armor. The convoy barely escapes disaster when it nears a suspicious bend in the road. The lead jeep, transporting Colonels Smith and Perry, wisely takes the curve cautiously. To their amazement, three enemy tanks have paused in their path. The crews of the tanks are relaxed during an apparent cigarette break. Had the tankers been non-smokers, it might have been quite hazardous to the health of the tattered survivors.

July 5, 1950 The bad omen of more enemy tanks prompts quick reflexes and pulsating hearts. The truck drivers make an instant U-turn and head toward the northern portion of Osan to search for a less volatile route. The small but conspicuous convoy still proudly bears U.S. insignias as it rolls along the northern edge of town and swerves onto a dirt path that leads east, on a gamble that it will feed into a road to Ansong. Along the circuitous route, the convoy spots some ragged infantry stragglers and hoists them aboard. About 100 troops hitch a ride and happily enter Ansong after sunset. There have been fiercer battles, bigger wars and more gruesome casualties throughout the history of the U.S. Army than the battle fought on this day by a relatively small band of men. But these warriors exhibited great valor and courage against an overwhelming enemy force. On the following morning ( July 6), Colonel Smith and his survivors move to Ch’onan. After an accurate count, it is determined that his contingent now amounts to only 185 men. Soon after, Company C arrives. Captain Dashmer accounts for 65 men in his party. Other survivors filter back to safety at Ch’onan, Taejon and P’yongt’aek during the next few days. It is later determined that the 1st Battalion, 21st Infantry Regiment losses (missing) amount to five officers and 148 enlisted men, including 65 men in Company B, which sustains the highest casualties, and 34 troops of C Company. The artillery contingent’s losses as of July 7 are 26 enlisted men and five officers. The North Korean 4th Division losses are placed at 42 killed and about 85 wounded, including some slight casualties at P’yongt’aek on the 6th. More American reinforcements are en route to Korea, but a dilemma remains. The first blow-out had been lopsided and the Americans paid an expensive price for the hours it bought. The aftermath of the battle proves the efficiency of the enemy and the deficiencies of the weaponry of the Americans, who nearly became cannon fodder. In contrast, the North Koreans are well-trained and better equipped than the Americans. In Japan, the U.S. 24th Division has 17 obsolete M-24 tanks, but only twelve are operational. Also, the medium Pershing tank is capable of equalizing the Russian-made tanks, but the 92 Pershings are in Japan, held in storage and supposedly not serviceable. The Eighth Army Ordnance section jumps into action and saves the endangered Pershings from the scrap heap by putting them in usable condition in a Herculean salvage operation. The immediate challenge for the U.S. is to reverse its ongoing dismemberment of the U.S. military, and to move rapidly to properly equip and support the troops that must follow Task Force Smith’s beleaguered survivors. Many of the men of Task Force Smith who had been captured during the first day of combat had been immediately executed. Subsequently, North Korean Lieutenant Pak Huyunk (later brigadier general) describes, without remorse, a segment of the barbaric activity:

July 5, 1950 “When we charged the Americans they were too frightened to resist. They threw down their guns, held up their hands and begged for mercy. We didn’t shoot those who were begging for their lives, but we ruthlessly shot those who were resisting. After the battle we rested and had a meal. Dead Americans were lying all over the place with their mouths open. There was a man in our Ninth Squad, a real joker, who said ‘look the Americans are still hungry, even though they are dead. Here have some earth.’ He then shoved a handful of dirt into each mouth. Everyone was amused.” One can only wonder how many of the “hungry dead” were the wounded who couldn’t finish the journey. In other activity, Colonel Lovless, commanding officer, 34th Regiment, meets with General Dean in Taejon. Dean suggests that Lovless deploy his 3rd Battalion (commanded by Colonel David H. Smith) at Ansong, about 12 miles east of P’yongt’aek, if it is feasible. Dean also instructs Lovless to establish regimental headquarters at Songhwan-ni, about six miles south of P’yongt’aek. Lovless becomes disturbed by what he considers a dangerous and unnecessary division of his command. He requests permission to commit his regiment as one solid unit. Nevertheless, Lovless loses the spirited debate with General Dean, and both requests are carried out. Headquarters is established this day. Ansong and P’yongt’aek, separated by about eleven miles, are vital positions along the two main highways, which head south between the Yellow Sea and the West Central Mountains. These towns must be held to ensure that the western sector of Korea is not easily overrun, but Lovless encounters additional problems. The regiment’s radios are unable to communicate from point to point. The 1st Battalion, 34th Regiment (commanded by Colonel Ayres), is without battle experience and it lacks tanks. Artillery and antitank weaponry are too few in number and too ill-equipped to realistically deter a strong advance for a prolonged period of time. The 1st Battalion, nonetheless, deploys at P’yongt’aek, slightly south of TF Smith at Osan. However, there are no communications between Ayres’ command and that of Colonel Brad Smith (TF Smith). Subsequently, Colonel Ayres, in an interview with Lacy Barnett, states that General Dean had suggested that he “go as far north as possible, preferably to P’yongt’aek.” Ayres further states that “General Dean did not inform him that the P’yongt’aek position was an important one to hold.” Colonel Ayres then relates that “as far as he was concerned on 5 and 6 July, Asan Bay was a tourist attraction.” Dean had spoken to Ayres in Taejon, prior to the arrival of Lovless. Also, the recently arrived 63rd FABn, commanded by Colonel Robert Dawson, is under orders to head north to bolster the 34th Regiment, but it encounters difficulty while unloading equipment. The project becomes delayed and in addition, there is no transportation immediately available. Meanwhile, the 3rd Battalion, 21st Regiment, and the regimental commander, Colonel Richard W. Stephens, remain in Pusan in search of northbound transportation. In other activity, General Barth returns to P’y-

60 ongt’aek and anticipates reinforcements from the 34th Regiment. Upon his arrival, Barth locates Colonel Ayres, recently appointed commanding officer, 1st Battalion, 34th Regiment. After conferring with Ayres, Barth requests that bazooka squads be sent north to intercept the advancing tanks. Shortly thereafter, a detachment (I and R Platoon) led by Lieutenant Charles Payne and an infantry contingent led by Lieutenant William Caldwell III hustle north. The contingent sights tank tracks near Sojong. Not long after, a horseriding South Korean trooper pulls alongside and warns the Americans about approaching tanks. He suggests that they withdraw, but the convoy intends to intercept, rather than evade, the enemy. It moves north cautiously and after advancing about one mile, the tank is located. It is halted near the railroad tracks outside of Sojong-ni, which is about five miles south of Osan. At 1600, a bellicose encounter erupts when the GIs open fire, but inflict no damage to the tank. Enemy machine gun fire pounds the Americans and kills Private Kenneth Shadrick. The positions soon become untenable and the bazooka teams retreat, but they bring Shadrick’s body out with them. Upon the group’s return to P’yongt’aek, the distressing news is reported to both Colonel Harold Ayres and General Barth. After sunset, General Dean arrives at P’yongt’aek and he, too, is briefed, but there is still no information on Task Force Smith’s fate. Dean returns to Taejon possessing no obvious solution with which to halt the attack. And, similarly to those at Osan, no air cover is available. Subsequent to Dean’s departure, several of Smith’s survivors stumble into P’yongt’aek. The stories are so overstated that it appears as if Task Force Smith has been annihilated. Colonel Perry arrives early on the 6th, and he provides more accurate information. Nonetheless, preparations are made to withdraw from P’yongt’aek. Actually, Colonel Smith had arrived safely at Ansong and then he had stopped at Colonel Lovless’ command post at Songhwan, prior to departing for Chonan, but General Dean never checks with Colonel Lovless. Meanwhile, the 1st North Korean Division continues to trail the N.K. 2nd Division south toward Umsong. At Ichon, situated south of Seoul and west of the Han River, an enemy regiment (2nd N.K. Division) engages South Korean troops and hits unexpected stiff resistance. The North Korean unit sustains heavy casualties and becomes isolated. Nearby, to the northwest along the Yongin Road, another enemy regiment sustains high casualties after it encounters rigid resistance by South Korean forces. Following these difficult actions, the N.K. 1st Division swivels southeast and heads toward Ch’ungju. The N.K. 2nd Division continues to press south toward Ch’unch’on and Ch’onju. The 2nd N.K. Division pays heavily during this advance. It is to join the N.K. 3rd and 4th Divisions for a probable massive attack against Taejon. Meanwhile, in the central mountainous area, the N.K. 7th Division, re-designated the N.K. 12th Division, seizes Wonju. Following its capture, the division

61

July 5, 1950

Top: A U.S. Army soldier operates a switchboard in the field. Bottom: At Pusan, a touch of innocence in a war-torn nation. This group of South Korean Boy Scouts had their picture taken by a U.S. Navy photographer who paused with the boys while en route to the front.

July 6, 1950 divides its force, dispatching some contingents south toward Ch’ungju and others southeast toward Chech’on. In reaction, the weary S.K. 6th Division maintains its delaying tactics, and attempts to forestall the loss of the Ch’ungju corridor. The S.K. 8th Division is en route from the east coast to form a perimeter line in the Tanyang corridor. By the 12th, despite the vigorous attempts to hold, both Chech’on and Ch’ungju are seized by the surging N.K. 12th Division, which then tightens its grip around Tanyang. Also, the Far East Air Forces Joint Operations Center transfers from Japan to Taejon. Circumstances compel the center to relocate to Taegu on July 14. In Naval activity, The U.S. navy establishes Service Squadron 3, to become the primary logistics unit of the 7th Fleet effective 7 July. Also, the U.S. Navy initiates President Truman’s directive to establish a blockade of the Korean coasts. In Marine activity, Fleet Marine Force Pacific at Hawaii directs the 1st Marine Division to establish the 1st Provisional Marine Brigade. The brigade is formed by Marines from the East and West Coasts. — In the United States: The 1st Marine Aircraft Wing, commanded by Brigadier General Thomas J. Cushman, is formed at El Toro, California. It will bolster the 1st Marine Provisional Brigade. — In Okinawa: The 1st and 3rd Battalions, 29th Regiment, receive word to prepare to ship out to Korea; neither unit is trained for battle, but they are informed that training will be provided upon arrival in Japan. Both battalions embark for Japan on July 21.

July 6 The North Korean Army continues to advance. General Barth departs P’yongt’aek at 0130. He reaches Songhwan-ni about six miles farther south about 0230. Once there, Barth instructs Colonel Ayres to hold until the positions become untenable. The 1st Battalion, 34th Regiment, blows the bridge just north of P’yongt’aek at 0300. Prior to dawn, General Barth moves to Ch’onan. He locates reinforcements from Headquarters Company, 1st Battalion, 21st Infantry, and contingents of Companies A and D, which had not embarked on 1 July with Task Force Smith. Immediately, Barth deploys the contingents defensively about two miles south of Ch’onan. Soon after, Barth moves to Songhwan-ni to inspect the defenses there. Meanwhile, back at the river, a saturating rain intertwined with a miserable fog taunts the troops as daylight arrives. The men of the 1st Battalion squat in their waterlogged foxholes, and they attempt to consume their cold, bland C-rations while they await the imminent arrival of the enemy. Shortly thereafter, an unusual gurgling noise is heard. A quick glance across the river causes instant deliberation as the silhouette of tanks and some enemy infantry comes into view as they encroach the battered bridge. Some troops become prematurely heartened, convinced that remnants of Task Force Smith are approaching; however, others vividly recall that the Americans had no tanks. The speculation ends. Thirteen tanks, followed by in-

62 fantry, prepare to bolt the river. A brisk exchange of fire erupts. One enemy truck is destroyed, but the bazooka fire is inadequate. Captain Osburn receives orders from Colonel Ayres to withdraw Company A from the western side of the road. Osburn is directed to retain one platoon to the rear to afford cover fire during the pull-back. Soon after, Company B is ordered to abandon the east side of the highway. In the meantime, enemy infantry begins fording the river as it moves to envelop the Americans. Making matters worse, enemy fire had previously knocked out the mortar observer. Having no guidance, the mortars are ineffective. Back at Songhwan-ni, where Colonel Smith and about 86 men had already passed through, General Barth arrives to confer with Colonel Lovless. Barth informs Ayres of the orders from Dean, instructing Barth to give orders to the regiment. Lovless is not especially overjoyed with the situation. Barth discusses the deployment of the 1st Battalion and then he directs Colonel Ayres to regroup the regiment near Ch’onan. In addition, Barth instructs Ayres to direct his 3rd Battalion (minus L Company) to abandon Ansong and move to Ch’onan. Company L (regimental reserve), which is outside of P’yongt’aek, is ordered to provide rear cover fire for the 1st Battalion while it pulls out of its river positions. The orders are not carried out; Company L moves directly to Ch’onan. Due to the distance between Ansong, P’yongt’aek and Songhwan-ni, there is no radio communication. The radios cannot hold the range, and the land wires, which had been laid between the latter two towns, have been ripped out and cut by retreating South Korean civilians and troops who use the wire to fasten their packs. Messages between P’yongt’aek, Songhwan-ni and Ansong are transferred by messengers, but these runners are outdistanced by the emerging events, and they arrive at their destinations with outdated news. The embattled 1st Battalion, 34th Regiment, is forced to begin its retreat before noon. The first contingents to depart the river positions arrive at Ch’onan during the afternoon. The remaining units of the battalion pull into Ch’onan during the evening and deploy defensively, near the newly arrived contingents of the 21st Regiment. Much equipment and clothing is abandoned along the route and left for the North Koreans. Near Ch’onan and Osan, the South Koreans’ situation is similar. The ROKs are crammed aboard southbound trains. At Taejon, General Dean is consistently updated by telephone on the unraveling sequence of events at P’yongt’aek. Dean arrives at Ch’onan after dark. He convenes a heated meeting with Colonel Lovless and other officers to determine who authorized a withdrawal. Colonel Ayres, without referring to his orders from General Barth (who stands by in stony silence), takes responsibility. An infuriated Dean considers his option of sending the regiment back, then countermands himself, due to the threat of a night ambush. However, Dean orders the 3rd Battalion, 34th Regiment, to move a company north at daybreak.

63 — In Air Force activity, B-29s launch the initial strategic air attacks of the war when 9 bombers attack the Rising Sun oil refinery at Wonsan and another target, a chemical plant at Hungnam. Meanwhile, other planes (B-26s) pound advancing enemy columns. After-action reports indicate the destruction of 6 to 10 tanks by the B-26s. — In the United States: The Joint Chiefs of Staff instruct General MacArthur to provide his estimate of the necessary amount of personnel needed to sweep the North Korean troops out of South Korea. On the following day, MacArthur responds, stating that between four to four and one-half complete infantry divisions, one regimental combat team composed of airborne troops, and three tank battalions bolstered by support artillery would be required. Additionally, MacArthur claims he will require 40,000 reinforcements to execute the operation without placing Japan in peril. In other activity, Major General Hobart R. Gay is informed by MacArthur that his 1st Cavalry Division is to be the battering ram that will storm Inchon. The cavalry landing is expected to trap the enemy between it and the Eighth Army and ROK troops. But much of the initial information on the progress of the ROK Army has been erroneous and highly exaggerated. And the battle-readiness of Eighth Army is terribly poor, making the situation graver than anticipated. In conjunction, the U.S. has been totally surprised by the skillfulness of the advancing North Korean People’s Army. Additionally, large numbers of the 1st Cavalry’s proficient noncoms (about 750) have been pulled from its ranks to round out the anemic 24th and 25th Divisions. Ultimately, this meeting between MacArthur and General Gay becomes irrelevant. The bad conditions in Korea continue to deteriorate, which mandates that the 1st Cavalry must be committed to Pusan to prop up the perimeter. — In Japan: By today, it becomes common knowledge that General MacArthur intends to deploy the U.S. Eighth Army in Korea, with General Walker assuming operational control of the campaign. In conjunction, General Walker calls Colonel William Collier in Kobe, and requests that he come to Yokohama on the following day to discuss the crisis in Korea.

July 7

General Walton Walker arrives from Japan to confer with General Dean. General Barth departs Ch’onan for Taejon. In other activity, at 0810, Company L, 34th Regiment, moves north from deserted Ch’onan to intercept the advancing North Korean 4th Division. General Dean also orders a battalion to head north. At about 1030, the 3rd Battalion moves north to bolster Company L. General Dean’s order: “To CO 34th Inf. Move one Bn. fwd with minimum transportation. Gain contact and be prepared to fight delaying action back to recent position. PD air reports no enemy armor south of river.” As the 3rd Battalion advances, a steady flood of civilians is moving south. Some are walking and others are on horseback. Colonel Lovless notices heavy

July 7, 1950 military movement in the hills to the west. Lovless, who inquires of his interpreter whether they are North or South Koreans, is told that they are South Koreans on the run. At about 1300, while the intelligence and reconnaissance platoon is at the point, the enemy is spotted in the heights, but they vanish from sight. The advance continues, but with caution, because sporadically, the enemy reappears. Along the route, an artillery officer informs Colonel Lovless and an accompanying officer, Colonel Robert Martin, that he has only one gun. It is deployed about three miles from Ch’onan, from where it can shell the area to the front of Company L. In the meantime, about five miles north of Ch’onan, with the small force more or less sucked in, a moderate dose of enemy small-arms fire and mortars strike positions near the point platoon, barring advance. Within a short while (1600), a liaison plane arrives overhead to bring the contingent up to date and make the earlier intelligence obsolete. The plane drops this message: “To CO 34th Infantry, 1600 7 July. Proceed with greatest caution. Large number of troops on your east and west flanks. Near Ansong, lots of tanks (40–50) and trucks. Myang-Myon large concentration of troops. Songhwan-ni large concentration of troops trying to flank your unit; signed Dean.” The alarming, but not totally unexpected, news prompts Colonels Lovless and Martin to head for the 1st Battalion’s Command Post to inform Colonel Ayres. At the CP, they encounter General Church and General Pearson Menoher (assistant division commander, 24th Division). Church delivers an order from Dean to Lovless, which relieves him of command and instructs him to turn his 34th Regiment over to Colonel Martin. The change of command occurs at 1800. General Dean had previously requested that Colonel Martin, an old and trusted friend, be transferred to his command. Dean and Martin served together with the 44th Division during World War II. In turn, Colonel Lovless had been in command of the 34th for a very short period of time and the unit, not known for being a crack outfit, had not turned around soon enough to suit the high command. In the meantime, Major Dunn arrives at the Command Post and informs Colonel Lovless that Lt. Colonel David Smith’s 1st Battalion is pulling back from its excellent defensive positions. Lovless quickly explains that he has been relieved and tells Dunn to speak with Colonel Martin. Dunn is ordered by Martin to return and restore order within the 3rd Battalion. Meanwhile, the ground troops are becoming more endangered. Major Dunn (34th Infantry S-3) moves from 1st Battalion command post to the forward positions of the 3rd Battalion. He arrives in time to observe the unit digging in defensively north of Ch’onan. While in conversation with Lt. Colonel David H. Smith, 1st Battalion Commander, the I and R platoon leader drives up in a dilapidated jeep. As he jumps from the vehicle, the bullet holes in his clothing and canteen tell the story before he can open his mouth. His platoon had been ambushed by a force of 40 enemy troops at a tiny

July 7, 1950

64

U.S. artillery (camouflaged 105-mm howitzer M2A1) deployed near Ch’onan on 7 July. village about one mile from headquarters. Three men had been left behind. Major Dunn takes a rifle company detachment to rescue the isolated troops, but soon after, Major Boone Seegars (Battalion S-3) arrives from the vicinity of the ambush. He informs Dunn that the men have been reunited. Major Dunn aborts the rescue attempt and orders a defensive posture.

Enemy fire from the west bank commences against Dunn’s unit. The Americans return fire, but the enemy is too distant. In a flash, the situation deteriorates. While Dunn attempts to calm the nearby troops, friendly fire strikes near their positions and causes pandemonium. Dunn reacts to quell the fire, but when he reaches the 3rd Battalion positions, the men are abandoning their designated areas. Dunn is placed in com-

Opposite top: A camouflaged U.S. Army truck at Ch’onan on 7 July. A .50-caliber M2 HB Browning machine gun is mounted on the vehicle, but barely visible due to the rice straw. Opposite bottom: A closer view of the two soldiers manning the Browning machine gun (M2 HB) atop the camouflaged truck at Ch’onan on 7 July.

65

July 7, 1950

July 7, 1950 mand and he pushes the men northward. Two jeeps transporting Majors Dunn and Seegars and two company commanders push forward. At a point about one mile from where Dunn wants the 3rd Battalion to reoccupy the terrain, the North Koreans spring another ambush. Point-blank range fire pounds the vehicles. Dunn and Seegars both are seriously wounded. One unarmed officer runs to the rear as he explains he is going for help. Meanwhile, an artery in Dunn’s head bleeds profusely. Major Seegars succumbs during the night; his body is recovered sometime in November. At the first sounds of fire, the trailing rifle company hits the ground and returns fire; however, the unit makes no attempt to rescue the wounded, nor is an advance ordered by any officers on scene. Moments later, an officer repeatedly yells “fall back,” leaving the men in the two advance jeeps to an unknown fate. The 3rd Battalion’s withdrawal in the face of combat against a much lesser force and its abandonment of wounded men on the field is subsequently described by Major Dunn, who remains a prisoner of war for 38 months, as “nauseating.” In addition, Dunn notes that the

66

enemy force of about 40 men was alone. The main body had been about two hours outside the village. The 3rd Battalion, in its haste to retreat, also abandons equipment, including mortars. Upon arrival at Ch’onan the unit is badly disorganized. Colonel Martin takes a headquarters company north to reclaim the lost equipment, while Lt. Colonel David H. Smith, positioned south of Ch’onan, is directed to move into Ch’onan and defend it. The redeployment of the disoriented 3rd Battalion at Ch’onan is complete by about 1700, with contingents stretched along the railroad tracks west of town and others dispersed along the northern fringes of Ch’onan. The first encounter with the Communists occurs on the western side of town during the first part of evening. Shortly thereafter, a column of tanks and infantry approaches the eastern defenses. The latter is met by fire from a contingent of the 63rd Field Artillery Battalion, which had recently been deployed south of Ch’onan to bolster the 34th Regiment. Two tanks are reported destroyed by the combination of white phosphorous and HE ammunition. Still, this contingent penetrates the town before midnight, and entraps about 80 men, including Colonel Martin. The fighting dangerously depletes the U.S. ammunition. Word reaches General Dean about the critical lack of supplies and of the precarious situation of Martin and the other isolated men. Skirmishing continues throughout the night as the N.K. 16th and 18th Regiments, supported by tanks of the 105th Armored Division, increase the pressure. Before noon on this day, a train transporting Colonel Stephens and elements of his 21st Regiment arrives in Taejon. Within one hour, the unit heads north to Choch’iwon to bolster the 34th Regiment and to keep the supply route clear. Meanwhile, discipline at Choch’iwon is loose. The supplies for the various units have become mixed up and another problem has emerged. Guards must ride the locomotives because many South Korean engineers are frightened. At the slightest hint of trouble the engineers attempt to move south with the trains and supplies they have yet to unload. Colonel Stephens deploys the 3rd Battalion, 21st Regiment, six miles north of Choch’iwon. Another contingent, composed of Companies A and D, 1st Battalion, returns from Chonan and deploys about one mile farther north at Chonui, along a ridge just east of town. These positions are about three miles below the fork where the Kongju Road splits from the principal highway and about twelve miles from Ch’onan. — In the United States: The 1st Provisional Marine Brigade, commanded by A U.S. soldier checks the fuse on a mine in the vicinity of Brigadier General Edward A. Craig, is Ch’onan. activated at Camp Pendleton; the unit is

67

July 7, 1950

Top: U.S. troops prepare powder charges in vicinity of Ch’onan. Bottom: U.S. troops load ammunition into a 105-mm howitzer in vicinity of Ch’onan. composed of the 5th Marines, the 1st Battalion, 11th Marines and Marine Aircraft Group 33 (MAG-33). The latter includes three squadrons and is commanded by Brigadier General Thomas H. Cushman. The brigade begins boarding the warships on the 12th. On

the 14th, the convoy sails for Korea. The three squadrons of MAG 33 are: VMF-214, 29 officers, 157 enlisted men and 24 F4U4B planes; VMF-323, 29 officers, 157 enlisted men and 24 F4U4B planes; and VMF(N)-513, 15 officers, 98 enlisted men and 12

July 8, 1950 F4U5N planes. The helicopter contingent, VMO-6, commanded by Major Vincent Gottschalk, will be composed of 15 officers, 63 enlisted men, eight light observation planes and four HO3S-1 Sikorsky 2-place helicopters. Seven pilots, 30 enlisted men and the four Sikorsky helicopters will be detached from HMX-1 (Quantico) on July 8, from where they will proceed to El Toro, California, to join the brigade. Also, Company A, 1st Marine Tank Battalion, is activated for service with the 1st Provisional Marine Brigade. The unit, acutely familiar with the M4A3 medium tank, equipped with the 75-mm gun or a 105mm howitzer, will be supplied with Pershing M-26 tanks, which are equipped with 90-mm guns. The tankers receive scant time to acquaint themselves with the Pershings. Captain Gearl M. English, the commanding officer, finagles in order to get his Marines one day of practice in the field. Each gunner and loader is restricted to a meager two rounds. The tanks’ 90mm guns are then silenced until the tanks engage the enemy in Korea. Support battalions of the brigade are also scaled down. Company A, 1st Motor Transport Battalion, is composed of six officers and 107 enlisted men. Company A, 1st Engineer Battalion (reinforced), is composed of eight officers and 209 enlisted men. — In the United Nations Security Council: The United Nations Security Council passes its third resolution concerning Communist aggression in the Republic of Korea, recommending that “all members providing military forces and other assistance make such forces ... available to a unified command ... and requests the United States to designate the commander of such forces.” The resolution also directs the unified command to fly the United Nations flag “concurrently with the flags of the various nations participating.” President Truman desires a requisite for victory and by the following day, his choice of commander is given to the United Nations. — In Hawaii: General Lemuel Shepherd, USMC, and his G-3, Colonel Victor H. Krulak, subsequent to the activation of the 1st Provisional Marine Brigade, depart Hawaii by air for Japan. — In Japan: General MacArthur orders General Dean (in Korea) to provide protection for the 35th Fighter Group, USAF, commanded by Colonel Robert Witty at Yonil, where an airbase is being established. MacArthur is aware that the N.K. 5th Division is moving down the coast road toward Pohang-dong, five miles north of Yonil. Dean dispatches the 3rd Battalion, 19th Regiment, from Taegu and some additional force from other locations to fill the gap. In other activity, Lt. Gen. Walton H. Walker directs Colonel William Collier to proceed to Korea as soon as possible and establish Eighth Army headquarters there. Walker explains that he is flying to Korea on this day, but he will return on the 8th. Also, General MacArthur is diligently formulating plans to ensure that the Communists are unable to cause disruptions in Japan. With the encouragement of MacArthur, the Japanese government decreases the activities of the Communists,

68 which diminishes the possibility of massive disruptions within the country. The Japanese, who favor the actions of the U.S. and the U.N. against the North Koreans, contribute much unheralded support.

July 8 Colonel Collier arrives by plane at Ashiya Airbase in Pusan. Then, after a short flight to Taejon, he locates General Dean near the front lines. After some discussion, Taejon is ruled out as a location for Eighth Army Headquarters. Collier, familiar with Korea, selects less crowded Taegu. At Taejon, General Dean receives word at about 0220 that Colonel Martin has escaped from Ch’onan, raising his spirits; however, sometime before daybreak, Martin returns to the besieged town. During the ongoing fighting, the supply line had been reopened. One ammunition truck moves back to the village and spots a column of about five tanks and some infantry driving from the northwest, along a previously mined dirt road. The enemy passes without incident. Enemy penetration occurs about 0600 and intense exchanges of fire erupt. One man, Private Leotis Heater, lobs five grenades at a tank, setting it ablaze. During the vicious fighting, two rifle companies become isolated. Colonel Martin continues to rally his men. He commandeers a bazooka. Assisted by Sergeant Jerry Christenson, he prepares to blast an approaching tank, but it swirls its turret toward the bazooka team. The opposing weapons fire at approximately the same time and the tank fire severs Martin’s body in half. The power of the explosion also pops one of Christenson’s eyes from its socket. Amazingly, he is able to replace his eye in the socket. Christenson, who succumbs in December 1950, becomes a POW with Major Dunn at P’yongyang. Colonel Martin’s actions under fire earn him the first Distinguished Service Cross of the conflict; however, it is a posthumous award. An aidman in the medical collections station, Corporal (later Major) Lacy Barnett, attests that there were no remains of Colonel Martin to be returned to Graves Registration, but according to Barnett, “Colonel Martin’s watch and billfold were recovered.” Also, Barnett states that Colonel Martin’s daughter does have the “blood-soaked order signed by General Dean, appointing him as CO, 34th Infantry on July 7th.” As more enemy troops and tanks enter Ch’onan, the fate of the 3rd Battalion becomes grim. Between 0800 and 1000, the survivors depart. Later in the day it is determined that 175 men escape. Many officers of regimental headquarters had been unable to escape. The ill-fated battalion loses nearly all its mortars, machine guns and rifles prior to moving south. Before the day is out, North Korean radio proclaims the capture of sixty men. The commanding officer, 3rd Battalion, Lt. Colonel David Smith, is exhausted and is transferred out within a couple of days on the 9th. The artillery units head farther south, but the 1st Battalion still holds south of Ch’onan.

69

July 8, 1950

U.S. troops depart a hillside position in the vicinity of Ch’onan on 8 July. In other activity, General Walker arrives in Taejon during the morning to confer with General Dean to find a solution and buy more time until Walker can transfer the Eighth Army from Japan. Both Dean and Walker, observing from a nearby hill, watch the 3rd Battalion in action at Ch’onan.

Upon being informed of Colonel Martin’s death, General Dean places Colonel Wadlington in command of the 34th Regiment and orders him to pull back toward the Kum River. In conjunction, Lt. Colonel Ayres’ 1st Battalion is deployed near Ch’onan, but after consulting with Generals Dean and Walker, Ayres is also

July 8, 1950 ordered to pull back toward the Kum River. The complexities of the withdrawal are many. Slightly south of Ch’onan, the road divides and later converges on Taejon, making the defense of both routes mandatory. The 21st Infantry is to move along the main Choch’iwon Road and execute a delaying action while it retires parallel to the rail line. The 34th Regiment is to follow the Kongju Road due south toward the Kum River. The 24th Regiment heads south during the late afternoon. Meanwhile, contingents of the North Korean 3rd Division begin to arrive at Ch’onan to augment the N.K. 4th Division. These enemy components deploy east of the town. Throughout the day, Dean’s orders emphasize the necessity of fighting delaying actions to support the withdrawal. Later, he issues an operational order that reaffirms his earlier demands: “Hold Kum River Line at all costs. Maximum repeat maximum delay will be effected.” One battery of 155-mm howitzers (11th Field Artillery Bn.) and a contingent of M24 light tanks (78th Heavy Tank Battalion) advance to Choch’iwon to support the 21st Regiment. Also, the 3rd Engineering Combat Battalion bolsters the 34th Regiment. It establishes roadblocks in front of Kongju and contingents wire the Kum River bridges for possible demolition. The 21st gets a hefty order from General Dean. It is directed to hold Choch’iwon and simultaneously guard the left flank of Ch’ongju to afford the South Korean forces time to withdraw. The task will be difficult because no reinforcements will be available for at least four days. The 21st and 34th Regiments are directed to hold the river line until totally untenable, and only then they are to cross to the south bank of the Kum to make the final stand. The fate of Taejon lies in the balance. Meanwhile, the South Koreans activate Headquarters I Corps at Ch’ongju. It is composed of the Capital and the 1st Divisions. KMAG documents also show the S.K. 2nd Division operating under I Corps during July, but other records will reveal that the 2nd Division had been rendered unsuited for combat during the first week of the war. During November 1950, a new ROK 2nd Division is established. Nearly all early South Korean records fail to survive the conflict. In other activity, General Dean dispatches a critical message to General MacArthur in Japan that informs him of the inadequacy of the 2.36 rocket launchers, which have proven to be totally ineffective against enemy tanks. Dean’s urgent request also includes antitank mines. He presses MacArthur to have these items rushed to Korea from the States. Central Mountain area: Below Wonju, planes detect long columns of enemy armor, vehicles and infantry that are driving south in an apparent effort to expand the envelopment of ROK troops and sever the primary north-south communication line in the Taejon area. Eastern Coastal area: The 3rd Battalion, 19th Regiment, arrives at Pohang-dong from Taegu. It is to hold the line against the N.K. 5th Division. An antiaircraft

70 unit will arrive on the following day, and heavy engineering equipment is en route via LSTs to speed the work at Yonil Airfield. In other activity, General Kean arrives from Japan at Taejon to meet with General Dean. Kean’s 25th Division will begin arriving in two days. In Air Force activity, Two airmen, Lieutenant Oliver Duerksen and Lieutenant Frank Chermak, operating in radio-equipped jeeps and acting as forward air controllers, direct the initial direct air to ground attacks during the Korean War. In Naval activity, Commander Michael J.L. Luosey assumes command of the diminutive South Korean (ROK) Navy. — In the United States: General MacArthur is chosen by President Truman to command the United Nations troops in South Korea. The general’s task is to be blocked with obstacles. Primarily, the U.S. Armed Forces in the Far East are deeply under-strength and untrained for such an undertaking. The U.S. has been undergoing a continuous depletion of men and equipment, and the training of troops in Japan has been poor at best. Weaponry is also dangerously low, due to the inauspicious practice of mass demobilization after the war. Also, the plan to land the 1st Cavalry Division at Inchon is canceled on this day, due to the continuing deterioration of the situation in Korea. Meanwhile, the Soviets have been steadily fortifying their war machinery, including stockpiling all Japanese equipment captured by them during their previous several-day war against a beaten Japan during August 1945. MacArthur faces some other critical problems. As commander of the United Nation Forces, he is compelled to report his plans and actions to the United Nations. Coincidentally, the Soviet Union representative in the U.N. receives all this information. Also, U.S. planes are forbidden from crossing the Yalu River in pursuit of enemy aircraft. This practice permits enemy planes to strike U.N. positions, then retire across the Yalu River to the sanctuary of Manchuria. During America’s War Between the States, General Robert E. Lee would tell his commanders to read the northern newspapers to become informed about what the Union forces intended to do. In this case, the North Koreans need simply to read their copies of the United Nations’ secret memos, smuggled to them by the Soviets. MacArthur learns this lesson quickly and eliminates some of the problem. In other activity, General MacArthur authorizes Japan, through its prime minister, Shigeru Yoshida, to establish a national police reserve of 75,000 men. He also authorizes the Maritime Safety Board to increase its force to 8,000 men. With the draining of U.S. troops from Japan for the Korean crisis, more strength is required to safeguard the welfare of Japan against aggressors from outside nations and from a potential Communist threat from within Japan. Ambassador Sebald later notes that the Japanese forces looked genuinely G.I. from their uniforms to

71 their equipment. He relates his experience while visiting a training camp: “Only when I saw the soldiers eating with chop sticks did I fully realize that these were indeed, soldiers of another Japanese generation....” Also, Far East Air Forces establishes a Provisional Bomber Command, based at Yokota, Japan. Major General Emmett O’Donnell, Jr., is appointed as commander.

July 9, 1950

July 9

Effective 1300, Eighth Army Headquarters Korea is established at Taegu. Chonan and vicinity have been abandoned by the fatigued U.S. troops who are pulling back toward Taejon, under heavy Communist pressure. The enemy tanks keep rolling south. In the midst of the chaotic fighting, the bewildered civilians are fleeing in absolute panic, often under the guns of

U.S. Army engineers prepare to blow a bridge to slow the North Korean advance toward Taejon and Taegu.

July 9, 1950

72

Top: U.S. troops deployed with a 4.2-inch chemical mortar (M2). Bottom: South Korean troops (ROKs) man an 81-mm mortar (M1).

73

July 9, 1950

Eighth Army 105-mm howitzers are positioned south of Ch’onan, firing at enemy positions. North Korean planes. However, a combination of U.S. Air Force, U.S. Navy, Marines and Australian Air Force planes has been clearing the skies. By the following day, the Russian Yak fighters, flown by the North Koreans, will have been thoroughly thrashed, giving the Allies total air supremacy. It is the air forces that contain the enemy and buy precious time for the Americans to regroup and reinforce as they are being shoved back to Pusan and the sea. At Choch’iwon, the 3rd Battalion, 21st Regiment, commanded by Lt. Colonel Carl Jensen, is dug in north of the town. And a composite battalion is deployed south and east of Chonui, along a low ridge about 500 yards east of the town and a steep hill about 800 yards south of the town. At Chonui, engineers detonate the approach bridges. Eleven tanks, supplemented by about 200 to 300 infantry, close against Chonui by midafternoon. Planes and artillery intercept the column and inflict damage and casualties. Reports indicate five tanks ablaze. As the infantry penetrates Chonui, bazookas and artillery fire greet them to slow the progress of the enemy, which is moving house-tohouse. East of Chonui, planes pound another advancing convoy composed of about 200 vehicles. Reports from the air indicate about 100 vehicles destroyed. The night passes slowly as the beleaguered defenders, using the illumination from the aging fires in Chonui, keep a cautious vigil. Enemy patrols nudge against their positions.

At Chinch’on, the South Korean Capital Division and some police spring an effective ambush against one battalion of the N.K. 2nd Division. The South Koreans capture four artillery pieces and 27 vehicles. The stunned North Koreans then launch a strong counterattack that ignites several days of bitter fighting. The ROK force, subsequent to the fall of Ch’onan and Chonui on their west flank, abandons its positions on the 11th, permitting the N.K. 2nd Division to enter Chinch’on. In other activity, Lt. Colonel David Smith is evacuated for two or three days of rest. The exhaustion is totally physical, due to lack of sleep, but things get messed up in Taejon. The medical report specifies that Smith should not be placed under the psychiatric department. Nevertheless, the medical personnel in Taejon place Smith on a plane to Tokyo and when he arrives there, someone discovers “exhaustion” on his record and sends him to the psychiatric hospital in Tokyo. The error becomes embarrassing, and Colonel D. Smith is quickly discharged and sent to Camp Drake to await a new assignment. Smith eventually retires after thirty years of honorable service in the Army. — In the United States: According to reports, the ground troops of the 1st Provisional Marine Brigade, which is preparing to embark for Korea, stands at 266 officers and 4,503 enlisted men: the two largest contingents are the 5th Marines and the 1st Battalion, 11th Marines. The 5th Marines comprises 113 officers and 2,068 enlisted men. The 1st Battalion (reinforced) 11th

July 10, 1950 Marines is composed of 37 officers and 455 enlisted men. In addition, the air component comprises 192 officers and 1,358 enlisted men, which swells the brigade to a total of 458 officers and 5,861 enlisted men, for a total of 6,319 troops. Nonetheless, with the arrival of the additional rifle companies (requested by General Shepherd) and some extra support personnel, the brigade’s final number as it departs will be 6,534 troops. — In Japan: General MacArthur updates the Joint Chiefs of Staff on the situation in South Korea. The dispatch from MacArthur informs them of the fighting efficiency of the enemy ground troops and of the superior quality of their equipment: “This force more and more assumes the aspect of a combination of Soviet leadership and technical guidance with Chinese Communist ground elements. While it serves under the flag of North Korea, it can no longer be considered as an indigenous N.K. military effort.” MacArthur commits part of his B-29 Superfortress contingent to the war effort. In other activity, General Shepherd, commanding officer Fleet Marine Force Pacific, and Colonel Krulak, USMC, arrive in Tokyo from Pearl Harbor.

July 10

Colonel Stephens, having spent the night at the forward positions (21st Regiment) near Chonui, is on hand for the anticipated arrival of the enemy. The composite battalion, 21st Infantry, is composed of a combination of about 500 personnel drawn from Companies A and D, and Companies B and C. These units that arrived at Pusan too late to move out with Task Force Smith hold the ground that overlooks the highway and railroad. There is another hill to the west on the left flank, but due to the unavailability of troops, the left flank remains undefended. East of Chonui, pea soup fog keeps the troops deployed on the ridge from seeing the road. Despite no visible signs of the enemy, it becomes apparent at about 0555 that they are close. Nearby, Korean voices flow in from the left. Soon after, an enemy soldier whistles a signal that triggers random American fire. Colonel Stephens orders the men to cease firing blindly. By 0700, enemy mortars pour fire upon the ridge, preceding an attack, which places most of its strength against the far left portion of the ridge against Company A, commanded by Lieutenant Ray Bixler. U.S. mortar fire is called upon to strike the valley between the two American positions to hold the enemy at bay. In the meantime, a large contingent of North Koreans circumvents the battalion’s right flank and drives against the mortar positions. This attack is synchronized with tanks, which had advanced unobserved from Chonui under the dense fog cover. The tanks rumble past the infantry, which can hear but not see them. At about 0800, the fog lifts, and four enemy tanks are fully visible as they penetrate the village. Others had made it to the Americans’ rear to enjoin enemy infantry, which had breached the right flank. The tank fire originating in the rear causes more concern. In the midst of the

74 combat, all communication between Colonel Stephens and the mortarmen is severed. The mortars fall silent, leaving only artillery to assist. There is some American tank participation near Chonui during the morning, but this, the initiation of U.S. tank action in Korea, is unimpressive. Meanwhile, at about 0900, additional enemy infantrymen bolt toward the Americans, but artillery fire repels the attack and inflicts heavy casualties. Although the infantry is turned back, tanks batter the American positions with machine gun fire. Then at about 1100, the left portion of the hill, held by Bixler’s men, is struck by intense small arms fire. Lieutenant Bixler, aware the North Koreans are closing fast, contacts Colonel Stephens at 1125. The next seven minutes move at a furious pace. After explaining that his unit has taken severe casualties, Bixler requests permission to withdraw before he is overrun. He receives a response instructing him to hold on. “Relief is on the way.” Within minutes, thanks to the lifting fog, two jet planes stream overhead. The tanks are attacked, but no damage is sustained. The enemy infantry on Bixler’s immediate left is stung hard with strafing, keeping the enemy ground troops harnessed and grasping for cover. Meanwhile, the survivors of the mortar and recoilless rifle units make it back to the ridge to support the beleaguered infantry. The planes expend their ammunition and are forced to depart, leaving the infantry vulnerable. During this contest, some men holding the right sector of the ridge begin to desert their positions, and more follow suit later. In addition, U.S. communications become increasingly poor, as the tanks again have ripped the strung land wires. The forward artillery observer’s radio goes dead, and the silence gives the artillerymen the impression that the 21st Regiment has been overrun. Friendly fire commences at 1132. It strikes the ridge feverishly, but it is still being held by the dwindling American force on the left sector of the ridge. Colonel Stephens dashes 100 yards to his jeep, grabs the radio and calls for the regimental artillery to cease fire, but to no avail. Stephens receives a report from Bixler at 1135, informing him that most of his unit have become casualties, and more desperately, Bixler states that his command is surrounded. No further reports are forthcoming. Bixler’s positions are overrun and most of those remaining alive are killed in their foxholes. As the fateful news about Bixler’s command spreads, the right flank begins to collapse. One man screams: “Everybody on the right flank is taking off.” It is not an exaggeration. Colonel Stephens glances to the right flank and sees the stampede to the rear. He attempts to halt the retreat. One man, Corporal Richard Okada, a Nisei from Hawaii, corrals a few men, but the attempt is futile. Those few surviving men who refuse to abandon their positions and choose to stand and fight become terribly imperiled. Colonel Stephens orders a withdrawal at 1205. The pull-back is near fatal, because two more jets appear and mistake the Americans for North Koreans. The aircraft inadvertently strafe the Americans as they cross a rice paddy. Luckily, there are

75

July 10, 1950

An enemy tank, captured during the fighting on 10 July. no casualties, and Stephens gets the troops back to the American lines. U.S. casualties at this action near Chonui: A Company sustains 27 wounded and 30 missing; D Company sustains three killed and eight wounded. The Heavy Mortar Company sustains fourteen casualties and six of

these men are discovered later in the day, when the ridge is recaptured. Each man has his hands tied behind his back and a bullet hole in the back of his head. One of the men, a jeep driver, escapes while the other six surrender. The 3rd Battalion, 21st Regiment, commanded by

July 10, 1950 Colonel Delbert Pryor, is ordered to counterattack toward Chonui, but the assault does not commence. Pryor is relieved of command and replaced by Colonel Carl Jensen. Subsequent to Colonel Stephens’ return to friendly lines, he orders Colonel Jensen’s 3rd Battalion to mount a counterattack and regain the lost terrain at Chonui. The aggressive attack, supported by several tanks, regains the ridge and reclaims the bodies of the massacred Americans. However, the tanks are less than battle-ready. Lacking the proper lubricating oil, the guns had not yet been fired. Two of the U.S. tanks are lost when the guns fire and the turrets are blown off. One enemy tank is damaged during the confrontation. In conjunction, the 3rd Battalion lacks the strength to reclaim the hill defended by Bixler and his men. Ten troops of A and D Companies who chose not to pull back during the friendly artillery fire are rescued at their post. At about 2045, General Dean contacts Colonel Stephens and gives him an option: “If you consider it necessary, withdraw to your next delaying position prior to dawn.” General Dean reiterates the importance of holding Choch’iwon to forestall the collapse of the South Korean main supply route. By 2200, General Dean contacts a regimental officer and authorizes a pull-back to positions four miles to the rear and two miles north of Choch’iwon, with the stipulation “hold in your new position and fight like hell. I expect you to hold it all day tomorrow.” Colonel Jensen and his exhausted 3rd Battalion pull back toward their original positions just before midnight, bringing out most of the equipment that had been abandoned earlier. The troops have to do some housecleaning before they can get some sleep. In their absence, North Korean troops have become squatters, occupying some of the foxholes. After one hour of unexpected combat, the Communists are driven out. The troops attempt to rest; however, daybreak approaches and with it, more enemy tanks and troops. In conjunction, Major Heritage, the 24th Division’s surgeon, notes in the division historical report that Captain Duerk, the 21st Regiment’s surgeon (at 1605, 10 July), “requests 1,500 units of benzedrine or hexedrine because of the fact that an entire unit has slept through an enemy attack. There wasn’t any on hand so Captain Duerk was notified of this fact.” Also, Task Force Smith, with its new replacements, is en route from Taejon to rejoin the 21st Regiment. Central Mountain area: Several N.K. Divisions continue to drive toward Taegu. The S.K. 8th Division, previously unable to penetrate enemy resistance, has been rerouted from scattered positions in Pohangdong, Yongch’on and Taegu vicinity to Tanyang by rail. The unit debarks the train near the upper south bank of the Han River and deploys to defend the YongjuAndong corridor. Also, elements of the 25th Infantry Division begin landing in Korea when the 27th Regiment (Wolf hound) debarks at Pusan. It is commanded by Lt. Colonel John H. “Mike” Michaelis. Initially, the 27th Regiment is dispatched to the vicinity of Uisong,

76 about 35 miles north of Taegu. After a short stay there, it is redeployed in Andong. Eastern Coastal area: the N.K. 11th Regiment, having moved along its inland route for over a week, rejoins its parent 5th Division at Ulchin. In the meantime, a huge number of specially trained North Korean civilians have been transported by sea to Ulchin for the purpose of establishing a Communist civil government within this eastern province. In addition, the 766th Independent Infantry, upon its arrival at Ulchin, is detached from the N.K. 5th Division. Its mission, according to information from POWs, is to subdivide into small groups, move west into the mountains and then sweep south to disrupt South Korean communications between Taegu and Pusan. Meanwhile, since the S.K. 8th Division moved inland, the only unit remaining to block the enemy advance along the coastal road is the 23rd Regiment, 3rd S.K. Division. The regiment, commanded by Colonel “Tiger Kim” Chong Won, has been skirmishing with guerrillas since early July in the vicinity of P’yonghaeri and Ulchin. Today the N.K. 5th Division approaches P’yonghae-ri and is met with heavy resistance, igniting a string of bloody battles along the coastal road. The Communists press to capture Yongdok and gain domination of the northern approaches to Pohang-dong. Colonel Kim Chong Won requests reinforcements, and Colonel Emmerich (KMAG 3rd S.K. Division) concurs. He presses the Republic of Korea Army to dispatch the required manpower. The 1st Separate Battalion and the Yongdungp’o Separate Battalion move by railcars to join the ROK 23rd Regiment. Both units, numbering about 1,500 men, are equipped with Japanese rifles and carbines. At the S.K. 3rd Division’s positions, about 50 miles farther south at Pohang-dong, some ROK troops are spotted moving toward the rear. Colonel Emmerich and South Korean officers order the contingents back to Yongdok. It is the strategy of the South Koreans and the U.S. military to defend this portion of Korea, by holding the Mun’gyong and Tanyang passes of the Han-Naktong watershed. In other activity, a plane arrives at Taejon from Travis Air Force Base, California. It delivers instructors to train and familiarize the troops with the new 3.5 rocket launcher. The first delivery of the rocket launchers arrives two days later. In yet other activity, elements of the 25th Infantry Division, commanded by Major General William B. Kean, begin to arrive in Korea on this day. The 27th Regiment debarks at Pusan. Initially, the 27th Regiment, commanded by Lt. Colonel John H. Michaelis, will be dispatched thirty-five miles north of Taegu in the vicinity of Uisong. Also, the North Korean II Corps Commander, Major General Kim Kwang Hyop, is demoted to corps chief of staff. He is replaced by Lt. General Kim Mu Chong, who is expected to get the II Corps to move more quickly. In Air Force Activity, F-80 aircraft, sweeping the area for targets, swoop down through the heavy skies about

77

July 10, 1950

Slaughtered GIs. U.S. troops captured by the Communists are recovered by the Americans. Each man has his hands tied behind his back and had been shot. This is not an uncommon practice of the North Koreans. 25 miles north of P’yongt’aek. Visibility is sufficient to give them an eagle’s view of a huge column of vehicles that have stalled at a blown bridge. The pilots inform headquarters, and within minutes of the transmission, every available plane of the U.S. Fifth Air Force speeds toward the bonanza. The giant-sized air strike, comprising B-26s, F-80s and F-82s, plasters the column and inflicts heavy damage. Aerial observers report the decimation of huge numbers of enemy troops and the destruction of 38 tanks, 117 trucks and seven half-tracs. The figure is considered exaggerated. However, the inflated figures are nonetheless, unintentional, caused by the circumstances under which the planes are operating. This raid and the one unleashed against the enemy on the afteroon of the 9th near Chonui are considered to have caused the most destruction to enemy armor of any individual engagement of the war. The longterm effects of the raid become apparent immediately.

Following these attacks, the North Koreans halt daylight movement of their vehicles, choosing to camouflage them until darkness. The enemy troops also remain inconspicuous until after dark. The North Koreans then advance along secondary roads when possible and hide many supplies in railroad tunnels, out of harm’s way. In conjunction, Fifth Air Force on this day initiates the use of T-6 trainer aircraft to handle forward air control missions, because liaison airplanes lack the speed to evade enemy aircraft. In Naval activity, the ongoing naval blockade of North Korean ports is expanded to include Wonsan and Chinnampo. In yet other activity, the commander of the Pacific Fleet is directed to embark Task Force Yoke as soon as it is fully prepared. — In the United States: The Department of the Army informs General MacArthur in Japan that the U.S. is preparing to expedite the delivery of three

July 11, 1950 medium tank battalions to Korea to neutralize the Russian T-34 tanks in the service of the North Korean Armed Forces. The 6th (M-46), 70th (M-26 and M4A3) and the 73rd (M-26) Tank Battalions embark from San Francisco on July 23 and arrive by sea in Korea on 7 August. Other armor reinforcements will follow. General Ridgway, handling the hectic day-to-day operations in the Pentagon (during the absence of Collins), places all pertinent units on alert for imminent deployment in the Far East. The outfits include an airborne RCT, 11th Airborne, several tank battalions, additional artillery units and combat engineers. The U.S. Armed Forces are too few in number to properly handle the crisis, but the political climate mandates opposition to activating the reserves. Meanwhile, the General Reserve is being depleted, and if a large-scale confrontation erupts in some other part of the world, such as Europe, the U.S. is unprepared to properly react. Ironically, it is thought that the reserves would require much training to prepare for combat, but the available regular forces have not been overtrained. In other activity, at the urging of President Truman, Generals Joseph Collins and Hoyt Vandenberg, Army and Air Force chiefs of staff respectively, depart for Japan and subsequently to Korea to gather first-hand reports on the situation. — In Japan: General MacArthur is informed that the 2nd Infantry Division (Ft. Lewis, Tacoma, Washington) and some other supporting units (antiaircraft artillery and armor) are about to embark for Korea. MacArthur sends word to Washington that he would prefer the 2nd Division be at full strength. He also puts emphasis on speeding the other troops he had previously requested. In other activity, Admiral Richard Ruble, commanding officer, Carrier Division 15, and his staff arrive in Tokyo by air. Ruble reports to Admiral Joy. Ruble had been stationed in San Diego, and his assigned task up to the outbreak of hostilities had been antisubmarine warfare (hunter-killer) operations, but on the 12th of July he officially receives additional responsibilities. Another conference is held at MacArthur’s Headquarters. Admiral Doyle’s suggestion of a troop landing at Pohang-dong is accepted by members of General MacArthur’s and Admiral Joy’s respective staffs. Initially, the proposed landing site had been on the west coast at Inchon, but the swift disintegration of the South Korean forces during the early days of the hostilities cancels this option. By the following day, a special reconnaissance team is airlifted to Pohang to reconnoiter the area. Presently, Pohang-dong, about seventy miles north of Pusan, is in no immediate danger, despite the dynamic advance of the enemy. The Spartan actions of the slim forces of the 24th Division and supporting air and sea forces, including the sure-pointed naval surface fire of the cruisers and destroyers under the command of Rear Admiral John M. Higgins, have forestalled even greater successes of the enemy.

78 The proposed amphibious invasion of Korea (BLUEis aborted due to the failure of the U.S. and South Korean troops to repulse the southern attack of the enemy. However, planning for a similar type operation continues, headed by General Edwin K. Wright, MacArthur’s assistant chief of staff (G-3). The responsibility falls to Wright’s Joint Strategic Plans and Operations Group. A deputy, Colonel Donald H. Galloway, is in direct command of the JSPOG. A blueprint of the amphibious strategy will be offered on July 23. During the conference, a casual conversation between General MacArthur and General Shepherd instigates a momentous historical event. MacArthur begins discussing the accomplishments of the 1st Marine Division when it was under his authority during the New Britain campaign in 1943–44. Continuing, MacArthur says that if he had the 1st Marine Division in Japan he would employ it as his landing force for the Inchon operation. The tone moves from casual exchange to a more serious discussion between MacArthur and Shepherd, who had been the assistant divisional commander of the 1st Marine Division during the New Britain operation. Shepherd suggests that MacArthur request that the 1st Marine Division be assigned to him. MacArthur, with a genuine excitement, asks if it could be ready to launch an invasion by the 15th of September. Shepherd responds in the affirmative, then bolsters his enthusiastic boast by noting that the division is under his command and he would take personal responsibility to ensure its readiness, minus the infantry regiment and other Marines of the brigade. Of course, General Shepherd does not give General MacArthur the full story. Thanks to the gutting of the armed forces and the activation of the Marine brigade, the 1st Marine Division presently contains fewer troops than one regimental combat team, giving the Marines a full scale nightmare to bring the division to full strength and have it ready for an assault in 67 days. MacArthur requests the 1st Marine Division on this day. MacArthur, with regard to the Inchon invasion, is on record stating that the invasion will succeed, and he adds, “But I must have the Marines.” Shepherd prepares to call out the Marines, including the reserves, but first, Congress and President Truman must authorize the rebuilding of what they dismantled. MacArthur’s request for the 1st Marine Division is expeditiously dispatched to Washington. HEARTS)

July 11 The men of the 3rd Battalion, 21st Regiment, having hardly closed their eyes following the previous day’s furious fighting, are back in combat-ready positions, and they face another dense fog. At 0630, again the clanking noise of tanks can be heard. The rumble of armor approaches from the opposite side of a minefield. Meanwhile, Task Force Smith (B and C Companies) has arrived from Taejon with 205 replacements. It rejoins the 21st Regiment about two miles north of Choch’iwon and will be in place by 0730. In conjunction, Companies B and C have re-supplied at

79 Choch’iwon. This hook-up of the four companies places Lt. Colonel Brad Smith’s 1st Battalion together for the first time since the task force was initially formed. At the 3rd Battalion’s positions, four enemy tanks breach the minefield just after 0630 with a massive thrust. As the menacing tanks burst toward the battalion, enemy mortars commence fire. The shells strike the perimeter with pinpoint accuracy. The communications center is wiped out and the ammunition depot sustains a deadly blow. Apparently, the enemy had mapped out the entire 3rd Battalion area while it temporarily occupied the ground on the previous day. While the tanks and mortars inflict severe casualties on the 3rd Battalion, the enemy infantry (3rd N.K. Division) strikes against both flanks with 1,000 troops. The American defenders, having lost their command post, their ammunition and communications as well as their deployment position intelligence, are gravely threatened. The North Koreans have also established roadblocks behind 3rd Battalion, 21st Regiment’s lines, which prevents any chance of getting more ammunition. Desperate fighting continues for several hours against insurmountable odds. Nevertheless, the 3rd Battalion resists tenaciously. Heavy machine gun fire rips viciously into K Company’s command post. In this instance, return fire is anemic, but sufficient. Private Paul R. Spear single-

July 11, 1950 handedly charges the enemy position with his entire arsenal, his pistol. Spear lunges into the position, but his weapon is empty. He improvises and uses his pistol as a short pipe. The free-swinging infantryman drives the enemy from the position; however, Spear becomes severely wounded by enemy fire. The hectic morning phases out with another North Korean rout. The 3rd Battalion, which sustains 60 percent casualties, is overrun. Those who are able begin to withdraw toward Choch’iwon to avoid annihilation. About ninety percent of these are weaponless. The attack had been so thoroughly organized and swift that many of the survivors are also shoeless and without canteens. Helmets are considered a luxury. Escape is again an arduous task. During the retreat, Colonel Jensen and his S-2 officer, Lieutenant Leon J. Jacques, are cut down while trying to wade across a creek to the rear of their former command post. Other officers, including Captain O’Dean T. Cox, commanding officer, Company L, are missing in action. Some men are unwilling to continue the march due to exhaustion from their two days of incessant fighting. They choose to remain along the road. The eight officers and 142 troops avoid death or capture and reform as a provisional company, comprising three rifle platoons and a heavy weapons company. Statistics for the battalion improve slightly by July 15 when more

A General Chaffee light tank (M24) in action during mid–July.

July 12, 1950 stragglers enter U.S. lines, bringing total strength to 322 men. On July 10, the first day of this battle, the unit strength had been 667 men. The 3rd Battalion had also lost supplies, equivalent of that required to supply two rifle battalions with weapons and clothing for nearly 1,000 men. By nightfall, the grim reports of the fate of the 3rd Battalion, 21st Regiment, reach General Dean. Using his limited resources, he continues to find a solution to halt the onslaught in front of Choch’iwon and save the South Korean Main Supply Route. Another Spartan outfit, Company A, 3rd Engineer Combat Battalion, is rushed into extra duty. The men are ordered to establish every imaginable type of obstacle they can create to hold the sagging line. These engineers must also prepare to afford cover-fire if the 21st Regiment is compelled to withdraw. Earlier in the day, Dean had ordered the 13th Field Artillery Battalion and the 19th Infantry Regiment to speed from Pohang-dong and Taegu, respectively, to bolster the line at Taejon. While the N.K. 3rd Division pounds the 3rd Battalion, 21st Regiment, its 1st Battalion, about two miles away in front of Choch’iwon, has mysteriously remained unmolested. Nonetheless, the 1st Battalion realizes its positions are in jeopardy. Its lack of combat accelerates the anxiety as the troops await the imminent enemy arrival, expected prior to dawn on the 12th. Also, along the Konju Road, the 1st Battalion, 34th Regiment, which is deployed to cover the withdrawal of the 34th Regiment, engages contingents of the N.K. 4th Division. Four Light M-24 tanks, attached to the 78th Tank Battalion, support the fight; however, enemy firepower quickly neutralizes the fly-weight tanks. During an impromptu rescue operation, one tank speeds to save survivors from a jeep that had been ambushed by infiltrators. En route the tank is destroyed by infantry close-range fire. Two other tanks are decimated by enemy artillery fire. Nonetheless, the effective rearguard actions of Ayres’ 1st Battalion and some supporting artillery help the regiment reach the Kum River with only a few additional casualties. The 3rd Battalion, commanded by Major Newton Lantron, reaches Taejon. The survivors are regrouped as a composite company and moved to Konju. The remainder of the regiment crosses the Kum River on the following day. Meanwhile, during the night, a contingent of the 34th Regiment’s I&R Platoon captures a scout from the N.K. 16th Regiment, 4th Division. The prisoner, seized north of the Kum River, opposite Konju, reveals that his regiment’s objective is Konju. At Chinch’on, the S.K. Capital Division and its supporting police contingent are forced to pull out. Facing envelopment due to the collapse of their western flank by the enemy seizure of Ch’onan and Chonui, the troops of the Capital Division evacuate their positions. The bloodied N.K. 2nd Division takes the town. Its commanding officer disregards the high casualties and exhausted condition of his troops. The division, without pause, drives toward the headquarters of the South Korean I Corps at Ch’ongju. It is met there by heavy artillery fire from

80 the guns of some determined South Koreans. The effective barrage halts the N.K. 2nd Division at the steps of the town. The division sustains about 800 additional casualties. The artillery continues to plaster the enemy until the following day. On the 12th, Choch’iwon, about 12 miles west of Ch’ongju, is relinquished by contingents of the U.S. 24th Division. This forces the South Koreans at Ch’ongju to withdraw. The town is abandoned to the N.K. 2nd Division. Also, the 24th Regiment, 25th Division, commanded by Colonel Horton V. White, arrives in Korea. It is the only regiment is the U.S. Eighth Army that contains three battalions. Meanwhile, the 27th Regiment transfers from Usiong to Andong. Eastern Coastal area: The 23rd S.K. Regiment reacts to enormous enemy pressure from the N.K. 5th Division. Its command post is moved back into Yongdok. The S.K. 3rd Division has orders to hold it. In other activity, the North Koreans initiate the use of prisoners of war (POWs) for their propaganda strategy. In Seoul, Captain Ambrose H. Nugent, 52nd Field Artillery Battalion, under Communist duress, speaks in English over the radio. Nugent reads from a prepared text composed of about 1,000 words. Although most Koreans cannot understand a word he is saying, the North Koreans get good mileage from the incident. A Communist interpreter translates for the Koreans. In other activity, Captain Vincent Robinson, USMC, Lt. Commander Jack Lowentrout and Lt. JG George Atcheson III, attached to Amphibious Group One, and selected members of the First Cavalry’s Division’s staff arrive in Pohang-dong from Tokyo. They gather intelligence during their two-day stay to assure a safe landing and to seek an area to deploy the cavalry. Also, the N.K. 6th Division, trailing the N.K. 3rd and 4th Divisions south after the seizure of Seoul, reacts to recent new orders from the N.K. Army headquarters. It departs the Ch’onan area, and advances toward the west coast from where it will thrust a sturdy spear into the side of Eighth Army. The N.K. Sixth Division, subsequent to shifting off the main highway, conceals its positions. U.S. intelligence is unable to discover its location for about two weeks. In the United States: President Truman authorizes the Marine Corps to expand to two wartime strength divisions. The corps had been drastically reduced following the close of World War II. Each division will consist of about 23,000 men. The chief of naval operations authorizes the activation of ships from the reserve fleet.

July 12 By this date, the Communists occupy about one-half of South Korea. Four U.S. battalions have withdrawn across the Kum River, which had been the primary line of defense above Taejon. As dawn arrives at Choch’iwon, the uneasy men of the 1st Battalion, 21st Regiment, are afforded little time to ponder the weather or gripe about terrible cold chow. They are disinterested in everything except survival. The 21st Regimental War Diary notes that four tanks join the 1st

81

July 12, 1950

U.S. Marines (1st Provisional Brigade) board an attack transport in San Diego. A convoy transporting the Marines to Korea embarks on 12 July. Battalion at 0730, but the unit is unspecified. In conjunction, the War Diary of the 24th Division notes that Company A, 71st Heavy Tank Battalion (1st Cavalry), arrives at Taejon on this day. It deploys at the airstrip, with orders to execute reconnaissance missions “south of the Kum River between Kongju and Taepyong-ni.” The unit’s eighteen tanks are assigned to the 24th Division. Meanwhile, the North Korean 3rd Division, which passes the N.K. 4th Division, will spring the attack. The 4th Division will retrace its steps from Chonui and plunge down the Konju Road to chase the retreating 34th Regiment. A quick glance from the positions of C Company, 21st Regiment, detects an enemy patrol while it probes near the perimeter. Additional and heavier concentrations of enemy forces are then discovered by others who sight hostile troops operating on both flanks of the battalion. Soon after, at 0930, enemy artillery commences a hefty bombardment. Sheets of enemy artillery shells, synchronized with a powerful attack by a battalion strength unit, pound the American positions. The infantry contingent, composed of about 2,000 troops, propels a crushing blow into the fragile left flank. Colonel Stephens, aware that his force is primarily com-

posed of green and untried replacements, attempts to repel the attack, but again lacking air cover, sufficient men and weapons, the battle is futile. By noon, for the third day in a row, nearly dubbing the hour as the witching hour, overpowering enemy force is again able to execute envelopment tactics destined to wipe out an American force. General Dean receives another message in a long string of grim reports. Stephens enunciates the desperation of the regiment in his report: “Am surrounded. 1st battalion left giving way. Having nothing left to establish intermediate delaying position am forced to withdraw to river line. I have issued instructions to withdraw.” Colonel Smith, having become accustomed to extricating his survivors from the North Korean hordes since the disaster at Osan on the 5th, again exudes confidence to retain the discipline and morale of his strained troops (1st Battalion). Enemy pressure continues to press forward as the withdrawal is initiated. The embattled infantry companies begin their move to the rear one company at a time in an effort to reach the trucks. All the while, artillery shells ring the area; one barrage strikes against the regimental command post on the fringe of Choch’iwon. Nonetheless, the mandated retreat to more tenable positions on the south

July 12, 1950

82

Top: During the night of the 12th-13th, engineers blow the bridges across the Kum River at Konju and Taep’yong-ni. Bottom: A view of the bridge across the Kum River at Konju and Taep’yong-ni after the smoke clears.

83 bank of the Kum River, under the circumstances, is totally organized. The 1st Battalion redeploys by about 1550 near a highway bridge which spans the river at Taep’yong-ni. All units reach the new defensive line by about 1600, although some isolated small groups are still filtering into the lines at 2100. The prognosis for the regiment is hazy at best. About 325 men, including able and walking wounded troops of the 1st and 3rd Battalions, persist in defying the odds by remaining at another soon to be besieged post to buy more precious time while the South Korean troops continue to flee. While the ROKs abscond, 64 men of the 3rd Battalion and about 261 troops of the 1st Battalion attempt to hold. These survivors of 21st Regiment have fought a valiant three-day delaying action between Chonui and Choch’iwon against two crack North Korean divisions. While the massive enemy blows are being launched against the 21st Regiment, the 1st Battalion, 34th Regiment, holds positions on the Konju Road to protect the regiment’s retreat. Engagements are fought at the road against elements of the N.K. 4th Division, which had diverted from the main road and taken the right fork to drive toward Kongju. The survivors of the 34th Regiment and the 63rd Field Artillery Battalion ford the Kum River with the final contingents of infantry and Colonel Ayres, 1st Battalion commander. The crossing is completed by dusk. Orders from General Dean are delivered to Colonel Ayres, who is directed to maintain a small outpost on the north bank of the river, then “blow the main bridge, only when the enemy starts to cross.” In conjunction, Colonel Wadlington directs Company L to hold the bridge and secure the area for 600 yards to the front. During the night of the 12th–13th, engineers blow the bridges across the Kum River at Konju and Taep’yong-ni. The railroad span at Sinch’on will be blown on the 15th. During this same period, the 24th Reconnaissance Company guts all flat-bottomed boats it can locate for a distance that stretches 16 miles below Konju. In concert, General Menoher, assistant commander, 24th Division, orders identical action to be taken against all similar boats between Konju and the railroad station east of the town along the arc of the river. With the ongoing thrashing of the 24th Division, General Walker requests immediate help. He instructs his chief of staff, Colonel Landrum, to contact General Almond in Tokyo in an attempt to get the two battalions in Okinawa. On the following day, General MacArthur instructs the Okinawa Command to embark the particular battalions to Korea. In other activity, the 19th Regiment reaches the south bank of the Kum River. It relieves the 21st Infantry on the following day. Central Mountain area: The N. K. 12th Division (previously 7th Division) drives through the eastern (second) mountain corridor closing from north of Tanyang. It encroaches the S.K. 8th Division, which has just withdrawn from its east coast positions to es-

July 12, 1950 tablish a new line. Advance contingents of the N.K. 12th Division cross the Han River. Earlier, the S.K 8th Division, upon hitting the stiff resistance, failed to break through, prompting the unit to take a prolonged circuitous route to its designated area. In addition, the N.K. 15th Division (advancing through the first mountain corridor), which had followed the 7th Division to Wonju, departs there. It heads west through Yoju, then it pivots southward where it had previously engaged South Korean troops at Changhowon-ni. On this day the division moves into Koesan, about 18 miles northwest of Mun’gyong. Meanwhile, the 1st N.K. Division (moving through the 1st mountain corridor), which had diverted from its northwest advance, moves south from Ch’ungju and butts against contingents of the S.K. 6th Division just north of Mun’gyong. Vicious battles continue to ensue between these opponents for domination of the Mun’gyong pass and plateau. General Dean orders General Kean, commanding officer, 25th Division, to deploy his force where it can halt the enemy advance below Ch’ungju; however, Kean is to keep one battalion at Yonil Airfield to defend it. General Kean is also to mandate one regiment (24th) to remain at Kumch’on in reserve, poised to speed to Taejon or Ch’ungju, whichever requires the support first. Eastern Coastal area: Heavy fighting continues near P’yonghae-ri, as the S.K. 23rd Regiment continues to engage the N.K. 5th Division. On or about the following day, North Korean troops seize P’yonghae-ri and prepare to move against Yongdok. Subsequent to entering the town, the 10th Regiment, 5th N.K. Division will peel off and head west into the mountains to seize Chinbo. From there, the 10th Regiment will be poised to strike Yongdok from the rear, thus setting the stage for the imminent and first major combat on the east coast. In other activity, the 24th Regiment, 25th Division, arrives in Pusan. On the following day, the 35th Regiment, 25th Division, begins coming ashore at Pusan. By the 15th, the entire division is ashore. General Kean establishes his command post at Yongch’on, about halfway between Taegu and Pohangdong. In Air Force Activity, the 92nd Bomber Group launches its initial mission from its airbase in Japan to strike enemy marshaling yards at enemy-held Seoul. Communist fighter planes are able to down two of the bombers, one B-29 and one B-26, and one other craft, an L-4. The losses provide the enemy with their first victory in the skies. — In the United States: On the West Coast, the 1st Provisional Marine Brigade begins boarding ships that will transport them to Korea via Japan; it will be the final publicized embarkation of troops for the duration of the war in Korea. Between today and the 14th, Task Group 53.7 embarks San Diego for Korea; it travels under strict radio silence. The vessels transporting the ground troops are the LSDs USS Fort Marion, USS Gunston Hall, the

July 13, 1950 AKAs USS Alshain and Whiteside and the APAs USS Clymer, USS Henrico and USS Pickaway. The vessels Fort Marion and Gunston Hall (designated Task Unit 53.7.3) also depart today. Marine Aircraft Group 33 is ordered to embark on the transports USS Acherenar, Anderson and the carrier USS Badoeng Strait. Due to the chronic shortage of ships, the Marine Brigade departs lacking about one-third of its motor transport. In other activity, Lt. Colonel Welborn G. Dolvin, USA, receives verbal orders that he is to depart for Korea to command the 89th Medium Tank Battalion, which is hurriedly being established. Dolvin and more than 150 troops of the 2nd Armored Division embark for Japan from the West Coast on the 17th. — In Japan: At Yokohama, elements of the 1st Cavalry Division begin boarding ships, but the initial strategy to launch an amphibious landing at Inchon has been scrapped because of the ongoing fast-paced enemy advance. It has already swept south of the Han River, bulldozing the U.S. 24th Division as it advanced. The cavalry continues the boarding process until the 14th. On the 15th, the command ship (Task Force 90) USS Mount McKinley and the remaining vessels embark for the east coast of Korea. In other activity, Admiral Ruble is temporarily appointed commander, Naval Air Japan. Ruble will be responsible for providing logistical support to all naval aircraft and every Marine air squadron in the Korean Theater. Four Military Air Transport Service planes, transporting 58 3.5-inch rocket launchers (bazookas) and shaped charges arrive in Japan from the United States to the jubilation of the military, which remains in dire need of the latest weapon designed to destroy enemy tanks.

July 13 Lt. General Walton H. Walker, commanding officer, Eighth Army, assumes control of all ground forces in Korea effective 0001. He establishes headquarters in Taegu. In conjunction, the ROK transfers its headquarters from Taejon to Taegu. To Walker’s dismay, he has too few troops and he lacks the necessary equipment to stop the North Korean hordes at the steps of Taejon. The beleaguered 24th Division will be forced to retreat further. General Walker immediately initiates priority tactical objectives. The 24th Division, stretched along the south bank of the Kum River, must defend the Kongju-Taejon vicinity and hold the line there. The 25th Division is ordered to bolster the South Koreans’ effort in the central mountains. The 25th is also directed to deploy contingents to defend Yonil Airfield and the port town of Pohang-dong. At the 24th Division line along the Kum River, intelligence has placed the opposition at about two enemy divisions, supported by about 50 tanks. The advancing ground force is composed of contingents of the N.K. 3rd and 4th Divisions. Each division moves to envelop Taejon. The 24th Division, scattered along the south bank of the Kum River, is expected to halt the advance. The

84 34th and 19th Regiments form a shallow crescent on the left and right respectively and to the far left, the 24th Reconnaissance Company is deployed in several groups to guard the key river crossings below Konju. Also, the 21st Regiment, subsequent to being relieved by the 19th Regiment, deploys defensively in reserve southeast of Taejon. The battered 24th Division, composed of about only 7,400 troops, including artillery personnel, holds the perimeter. At 0440, the steel-supported bridge in the forefront of Kongju is blown, which forms a moat that separates the 3rd Battalion, 34th Regiment, from the enemy. Slightly after daybreak, a squad of North Koreans establishes a machine gun position on the opposing bank. During the early afternoon, the enemy machine gun positions initiate sporadic firing. The in-place communications of the endangered regiment remains consistent; it is less than poor, and again, the only sure way to transmit information is by messenger. The regiment’s 3rd Battalion, supported by the 63rd Field Artillery Battalion, holds staggered positions on the high ground overlooking the Kongju-Nonsan Road. The enemy launches no major attacks during this day prior to dusk, but still, the 3rd Battalion, commanded by Colonel Wadlington, incurs severe problems as its S-2 and S-3 officers come down with battle fatigue. Both officers are evacuated. Later, after dark, K Company, composed of about 40 men, is rendered unsuitable for combat due to mental and physical ailments. It is evacuated to Taejon for further disposition. Subsequent to the non-battle loss of K Company, responsibility for holding the Kum River line to the front of Kongju is relegated to two weakened rifle units, Company I and Company L, on the right and left respectively. No friendly troops are deployed to their left and there is about a two-mile gap between them and the 19th Regiment to their right. In other activity, the 35th Regiment, 25th Division, commanded by Colonel Henry G. Fisher, begins to arrive in Korea. Some contingents debark at Pusan during the next several days. Also, the 27th Division, at Uisong, is directed by Eighth Army to move out and redeploy at Andong. It is to form a defensive line behind the defending South Korean troops. Also, the N.K. 6th Division, which has been moving inconspicuously toward the west coast, pivots at Yesan, then moves south across the lower Kum River in two separate columns against Kunsan. East Coast sector: At Yongdok, Colonel Rollins Emmerich’s unit (KMAG), attached to the S.K. 3rd Division, dispatches a detonation plan to Eighth Army. It specifies the details for blowing the bridges and the coastal road at Yongdok. In contrast, the enemy has plans to demolish a strategic bridge near An’gang’ni (between Taegu and Pohang-dong) and the plan incorporates the detonation of both ends of the Ch’ongdo railroad tunnel (between Taegu and Pusan). These combined actions would clearly devastate the supply

85

July 13 , 1950

U.S. troops en route to positions in the hills south of the Kum River. routes of the U.S.–South Korean front-line troops. Two platoons of ROK troops and two U.S. officers rush to the tunnel to forestall its destruction. In other activity, General Church and his staff (ADCOM) are instructed by Tokyo to return to Japan; however, communication and intelligence personnel remain with Eighth Army while their services are still required. Also, the small reconnaissance team departs Pohang-dong for Japan, having successfully concluded that it contains a suitable landing site for the 1st Cavalry Division. In its favor is a one-track railway line that stretches west into Taegu, and from there it leads northwest into Taejon. The cavalry will have access to quick movement by rail of combat troops into the battle zone (Central front). In Air Force activity, Wonsan, a key port city along the east coast of North Korea, is the first recipient of a heavy strategic bombing mission by the Far East Air Force. The city is also a strategic communication center that acts as a conduit during the initial portion of the war. The bulk of equipment supplied to the North Koreans by the Russians moves through the city. The port there is linked by train with Vladivostok, Siberia. In other activity, Air Force planes attached to the 92nd Bombardment Group at Yokota, Japan, and the 22nd Bombardment Group at Kadena, Okinawa, drop 400 tons of bombs on Wonsan. — In the Pacific Ocean: The USS Fort Marion, one of the two advance vessels that departed California on the previous day, suffers an accident. The vessel, which is transporting Company A, 1st Marine Tank Battal-

ion, and the 1st Marine Amphibious Tractor Company, is beset by an accidental flooding of the deck well, which causes five feet of water to rise amidst the new Pershing M-26 tanks. Fourteen tanks are damaged before the pumps can flush out the water. The accidental flood also destroys 300 90-mm projectiles (already in short supply) and 5,000 rounds of .30-caliber ammunition. Urgent dispatches are sent back to Marine headquarters to inform staff of the brigade’s misfortune. Quick action is taken. Captain English, commanding officer, Company A, 1st Tank Battalion, is reassured that replacement tanks would be requisitioned at once and forwarded as soon as possible. English is ordered to discard the damaged ammunition. In the meantime, while preparations are being made to transport the new armor, it is determined that twelve of the tanks can be repaired at sea. The remaining two tanks, with the acquisition of parts, can be fixed upon arrival at Japan. The Marines consider the tanks paramount for their anticipated success against the menacing Russian T-34 tanks. The replacement ammunition is loaded aboard one of the other vessels in the main convoy and four additional tanks are to be included in the first resupply convoy. — In Japan: General MacArthur orders General Stratemeyer to commit the Far East Air Force’s B-26s and B-29s in a copious effort to halt the North Korean advance. In other activity, Generals Joseph Collins and Hoyt Vandenberg arrive in Tokyo to confer with General

July 13, 1950

86

Top: A group of U.S. infantry makes use of a captured North Korean jeep. Bottom: U.S. troops examine a captured armored car. MacArthur and other general officers, including Generals Walker and Almond, and Admiral Radford, commander, Pacific Fleet. MacArthur presses for maximum support to defeat the North Koreans, but the JCS mirror the opinions of the Truman Administration and it becomes apparent that no blank check is being drawn.

Subsequent to the meeting in Tokyo, General Collins and General Vandenberg travel by air with General Walker to Taegu, Korea, to confer with General Dean regarding the deteriorating situation in his 25th Division zone. Collins and Vandenberg return to Japan after the meeting.

87

July 14 The sober darkness combines with another nasty rainfall along the entire U.S. perimeter at the Kum River Line. These conditions temporarily eclipse the approach of the enemy, but soon after dawn, the grumble of rolling tanks echoes across the river. At about 0600, Company I, 34th Regiment, feels the sting of hostile fire. Shells, probably attributed to tank fire, pound its area, while other synchronized fire is hurled toward the positions of L Company. However, the shells near L Company explode prematurely and high in the sky, inflicting no damage. Subsequent to the enemy barrage, L Company scouts discover an enemy contingent composed of about thirty men that are crossing the Kum River about two miles below their positions. Within a couple of hours, about 500 North Koreans ford the river to threaten the south bank positions of the American force. A liaison plane attached to the 63rd Field Artillery Battalion is sent aloft. It, too, spots enemy movement, which apparently is the same two barges spotted by L Company. Although the information is dispatched to an artillery unit, a decision is made to permit the barges free passage in hopes of catching more lucrative targets. East of Kongju, one platoon of the 11th Field Artillery Battalion commences firing at the advancing enemy ground troops. At about the same time, enemy fighter planes appear and chase the liaison plane. The artillery fire then ceases. In conjunction, a third battery is attached to the 11th Field Artillery Battalion to become the first artillery battalion in Korea to contain a full complement of three batteries. Meanwhile, the North Koreans continue to thump Company L (34th Regiment, 3rd Battalion), with effective artillery and mortar fire. Lieutenant Stith, commander, Company L, attempts to locate his supporting mortar and machine gun units, but the effort is futile. Stith, convinced his company’s positions are untenable, orders a pull-back without requesting permission. Company L abandons its positions in the heights above the south bank of the Kum River. Lieutenant Stith then moves to locate 3rd Battalion headquarters. After a sustained effort, Stith encounters headquarters outside of Nonsan. When the battalion commander is informed of the withdrawal of Company L, Lt. Stith is immediately relieved of command and informed by the battalion commander (Major Lantron) that he might be receiving a court martial. Colonel Wadlington had been ordered to move his 34th Regiment south to the vicinity of Nonsan, but later, during the afternoon, General Dean orders Wadlington to pull the 34th Regiment from the Kum River Line before daylight on the 15th. The withdrawal begins, pursuant to orders, at 0100. In the meantime, the North Koreans have begun fording the Kum River. They intentionally bypass the two rifle companies (prior to retreat of L Company) and quietly drive toward the rear artillery positions. Seemingly, the North Koreans have complete knowledge of the location of the 63rd Field Artillery Battalion,

July 14, 1950 commanded by Lieutenant Colonel Robert H. Dawson, which is deployed about three miles south of the Kum River outside of Samyo. Due to poor communications, the U.S. artillerymen are unaware of the withdrawal of Company L, but some communications have been active between the artillerymen and the 34th Regimental Headquarters. Following another dreary night of rain, the weather had brightened during daylight. At about 1330, a forward position of the artillery discovers an approaching enemy force and instantly reports the activity. Orders arrive directing the men “not to fire unless fired upon.” The hesitation is deadly. The troops manning the machine gun position are quickly overrun, and the North Koreans use the captured gun to slice into the ranks of Headquarters Battery. In concert, enemy mortar fire hits Headquarters Battery with pinpoint accuracy, which verifies that enemy intelligence had advance knowledge of the location of the guns. Decimating fire crushes the command post and inflicts injuries to medical personnel. The barrage simultaneously bludgeons the communications truck, which severs radio communications. The startling attack also strikes an ammunition truck, which adds to the dilemma of Headquarters Battery. As the enemy closes the noose tighter, a ring of fire whacks the Fire Direction Center, making escape from the building extremely dangerous. Both doors, front and rear, are plastered viciously. Nonetheless, the troops inside escape and make their way to the positions of Battery B, which has not yet come under attack. During this hasty retreat, Major William E. Dressler (battalion commander), who had replaced Lt. Colonel Dawson (evacuated due to illness) on the 13th, and Corporal Edward L. McCall are not among the escapees. About two and one-half years later, American troops discover their bodies in a single foxhole. While this vicious attack is underway, Battery A also faces a ground assault, which appears to be synchronized with the attack against Headquarters Battery. The defenders of Battery A hold a fragile line about 250 yards north of Headquarters Battery. They come under assault when a contingent of about 100 screaming North Koreans (16th Regiment) sprints from a hill located west of the outpost. The artillerymen pound the attackers with small arms fire and halt the attack. The enemy troops charge back up the hill, but the reprieve is short lasting. The enemy had only changed direction, and soon after, they charge down yet another hill and reach the road. Battery A comes under fire from a range of about 150 yards. Supporting mortar fire also blasts Battery A, and causes the majority of the men to abandon their positions. The evacuation again leaves a few Americans remaining under horrendous fire while they attempt to halt the horde of attackers. One man, Corporal Lawrence A. Ray, supported by several other steadfast soldiers, pours fire into the enemy. Lawrence becomes twice wounded while overtaxing his BAR. While some Americans stand rigidly under fire, the

July 14, 1950 others head for safer quarters. Lawrence, still firing his weapon, is struck by a mortar fragment that knocks him into temporary unconsciousness. When he wakes up, his options are few. He struggles to a nearby ditch and stumbles into fifteen men of his unit, all of whom are weaponless. Corporal Lawrence and the others in the ditch escape south, but unfortunately, many who stood and fought are lost. Along the line of retreat they locate the body of Captain Lundel M. Sutherland, Battery A commander. Meanwhile, with the destruction of Headquarters Battery and Battery A, which loses its five operational guns, another powerful thrust is unfolding against Battery B. Again, the enemy, about 400 strong, has emerged behind the battery lines from where they deploy machine guns. At about 1415, a wild and confusing exchange occurs as the North Korean guns rake the area. Two U.S. machine guns, positioned outside the defense area but now within enemy lines, answer the fire. Enemy mortar shells join the battle pounding Battery B, which loses a communications jeep and two 105mm howitzers. Suddenly, a contingent of South Korean cavalry gallops past Battery B and charges toward the North Koreans, but the action fails to halt the enemy fire. The results of the charge go unknown due the confusion of the day’s events. By 1500, orders are issued to move back, but the road is permeated with enemy fire, which compels the artillerymen to desert their guns, but before abandoning the weapons, the firing locks and sights are removed to render the guns useless. This thunderous assault lasts less than two hours, but the 63rd Artillery Battalion loses ten 105-mm howitzers, about 60 to 80 vehicles and much of their ammunition. The survivors make their way back to Service Headquarters, the sole unit to escape attack. As word spreads about the disastrous encounter, Service Battery prepares to retreat. A few straggling survivors hitch rides in their trucks for the fifteen-mile trip south to Nonsan. Others file into Nonsan during the night and into the following day. A total of 125 enlisted men and 11 officers are reported missing in action subsequent to the deadly encounter. At about 1500, word of the fate of the artillery battalion reaches Colonel Wadlington, acting regimental commander, 34th Infantry, at his headquarters. Acting on previous orders from General Dean, Wadlington orders the 1st Battalion under Colonel Ayres to execute an attack to extricate the besieged battalion. Then it is to push the enemy west to forestall an attack against Taejon. Slightly after 1700, the 1st Battalion advances on an uneventful three-mile march. Suddenly, machine gun fire rakes their ranks as they approach the previously held artillery positions. Carbine fire joins the machine guns and the advance stalls. As dusk settles over the area, the 1st Battalion, ordered to retire if the mission could not be completed by darkness, returns to Nonsan. The Communists, having successfully forged the Kum River, drive toward Taejon. The shallow river per-

88 mits the tanks to easily cross. The swiftness of the advance nearly totally envelops the 24th Division’s positions at Taejon, a strategic town that contains a primary communications center. Taejon also stands at the point of a highway that winds through the mountain passes toward Pusan. The city also contains a double track railroad line that follows a parallel route to the harbor at Pusan. With this latest enemy success, the 19th Regiment, with its left flank now naked, stands against the enemy. In conjunction, I Company, 34th Infantry, had come under shelling attacks during the day, but no enemy ground attacks are launched. However, the unit becomes isolated. At about 2130, Lieutenant Hicks moves Company I over the mountains east and southeast of Kongju to rejoin its parent 34th Regiment. Before daybreak on the following day, the threatened 34th Regiment redeploys slightly east of Nonsan and braces for an attack. General Dean orders Colonel Stephens to prepare the 21st Regiment, poised east of Taejon, to move to support the 34th Regiment. Back in the 19th Regimental area, eight miles north of Taejon, the regiment, commanded by Colonel Meloy, extends from its positions east of the railroad. The perimeter follows the serpentine river line west and halts about three miles outside of Kongju. The irregular river line zig-zags, forcing the two battalion units to defend about 30 land miles. The primary defensive line is concentrated along the Seoul-Pusan Road, where it crosses the Kum River (200–300 yards wide) at Taep’yong-ni. First Battalion headquarters (Lt. Col. Otho T. Winstead) is located in the village of Palsan, about two miles south of the Kum. Company E, 1st Battalion, is deployed on the high ground overlooking the Kum River railroad crossing at Sinch’on. The railroad crossing is actually in the area of ROK responsibility. Heading west from this high ground, there is about a two-mile gap that separates Company E, 1st Battalion, from Company C; the latter is deployed about three miles east of Taep’yong-ni along three northern finger ridges of Hill 200. Another gap (1,000 yards) in the line exists between C Company and Company A, which is strung out along the Kum, downstream and to the rear of a huge dike west of the highway. Joining Company A at the dike is a platoon of Company B, 1st Battalion, but the remainder of the company is sprinkled along the high ground, which nudges down toward the river. Responsibility for the regiment continues west for another five air-miles, but there simply are not sufficient troops to adequately handle the task. A small outpost, about two miles west, is manned by one platoon of Company G, 2nd Battalion, but there are few other defenses. The final three miles of the regimental perimeter are held by about 70 men of the I&R Platoon, an artillery battery, and one platoon of engineers. The 2nd Battalion, commanded by Lt. Colonel Thomas McGrail, with two of its rifle companies, is held in reserve behind the 1st Battalion. The 1st Battalion is bolstered by two batteries of the 52nd Field Artillery Battalion, com-

89 manded by Lt. Colonel Miller Perry. These guns are deployed at Tumanni, three miles south of the river. Four other batteries are deployed farther south to augment the 19th Regiment. Two pieces are from the 11th Field Artillery Battalion and two are from the 13th Field Artillery Battalion (commanded by Lt. Colonel Charles W. Stratton). Enemy fire begins to strike the 19th Regiment at 1300. Despite air strikes during the day, the enemy remains well positioned, opposite the 19th Infantry, and it is poised to make a solid assault. However, the line holds throughout the day and no major crossings to the south bank occur. And those of lesser strength are repulsed. The news is not necessarily good, as information filters into headquarters concerning the defeat of the 34th Regiment at Konju. This distressing information seems to coincide with the disintegration of the left flank. The imperiled 19th Regiment prepares for the worst. Apparently, there is much misunderstanding among units. Although the rumors are widely spread that the 34th Regiment collapsed, according to the 24th Infantry War Diary, a collapse of the 34th Regiment did not occur. The diary (132400K July to 142400K July) states, “It is believed that this enemy force infiltrated across the Kum River to the west during the night and remained hidden in the hills until a force of 600 to 800 men, with plenty of mortars and machine guns, had assembled. The force then debouched from the hills and struck the 63rd FABn without warning. With most of its artillery lost and a large enemy force building up to even greater size to its rear, the 34th RCT was given permission to withdraw to the south under cover of darkness, commencing after midnight.” Central Mountain area: the N.K. 12th Division seizes a Han River crossing at Tanyang and afterwards, it institutes a fight to capture Tanyang Pass from the S.K. 8th Division. As the battles unfold, the S.K. 8th Division is compelled to abandon its positions. By the middle of July, the North Korean forces are breaching the Taebaek Mountain passes heading into the upper Naktong River Valley. East Coast area: the N.K. 5th Division, which had crossed the 38th Parallel on the 25th of June, has driven south over the mountains. It has moved without opposition and now encroaches Yongdok. As the enemy advances, the ROK forces begin to fold, offering little opposition. Two tunnels, two bridges and two passes, all located between Yonghae and Yongdok and each greatly needed by the enemy, are blown to slow their progress. Powerful surface guns of the U.S. Navy are committed. The huge ships move close, then blast the cliffs that overlook the coastal highway. The thunderous bombardment creates instant landslides that add more obstacles along the enemy’s path. At Yongdok, S.K. Brigadier General Lee Chu Sik, commanding general, 3rd ROK Division, proclaims that he wants to redeploy his forces south of Yongdok. He also intends to transfer his division command post to Pohang-dong, but Colonel Emmerich immediately nixes this idea. Emmerich forcefully contends that the

July 14, 1950 east coast road must be held at all costs. Although the S.K. 3rd Division is isolated from the remainder of the operational S.K. Army, replenishment of supplies and ammunition has continued by shuttling bulky fishing boats between there and Pusan. Also, it is anticipated that supplies soon will be rolling in from Pohang-dong on rail cars. The operation at Yongdok is also augmented by the South Koreans’ harsh methods of acquiring recruits and supply-bearers. The latter are used to lug immense loads (A-frames) on their backs to move supplies over the mountains. Within two days, elements of the N.K. 5th Division are poised to strike and seize Yongdok. In other activity, the South Korean Army activates its II Corps, composed of the S.K. 3rd, 6th and 8th Divisions and the 23rd Regiment; headquarters will be in Hamch’ang. The II Corps assumes responsibility for South Korean operations in the eastern mountain area and when possible, the coastal sector, defended by the S. K. 23rd Regiment. At Taegu, the South Korean Army establishes the 1st Replacement Training Center, which is to accept and train replacement troops within a ten-day schedule, passing 1,000 troops through each class. In Air Force activity, the 35th Fighter Interceptor Group (FIG) arrives at Pohang from Japan. The 35th becomes the initial U.S. Air Force fighter group to deploy in South Korea. It will operate from K-3, a recently completed airfield. Also, the 6132nd Tactical Air Control Squadron is activated at Taegu. Colonel Joseph D. Lee, USAF, is appointed commanding officer. The unit is to provide forward, ground-based air control for aircraft flying close-air missions in support of ground forces. In addition, a Fifth Air Force–Eighth Army Joint Operations Center is activated at Taegu. —In the United States: The final elements of the convoy assigned to transport the 1st Provisional Marine Brigade to Korea depart San Diego. This is the final troop deployment from the United States to be publicized for the duration of the war in Korea. Ironically, it is also the first measurable contingent of U.S. troops to depart the States and enter combat in Korea. The Marine commandant, Clifton B. Cates, stands proudly near the docks, as he has done for the past three days, to bid farewell to his Marines. Although it is apparent to the commandant that the majority of the privates and PFCs are much too young to have served during World War II, it is equally obvious to his trained eye that the majority of the company commanders, platoon leaders and the NCOs are molded from the “old breed,” from Guadalcanal, Saipan, Tinian, Tarawa, Pelelieu, Iwo and Okinawa. The “old breed” that had battled the Japanese will ensure that the new breed upholds the traditions of the corps. General Cates snaps off a mighty salute as the troops pass. During the final send off, he speaks to his Marines: “You boys clean this thing up in a couple of months, or I’ll be over to see you.”

July 15, 1950 Soon after its departure, the transport USS Henrico becomes crippled. It is inflicted with a major mechanical malfunction while passing San Clemente Island. Temporarily, the vessel is rendered unfit to sail. The 1st Battalion, 5th Marines Landing Team, and the regimental commander, Lt. Colonel Murray, and his staff are aboard. Colonel Murray and his staff transfer to the USS Pickaway, but the 1st Battalion, comprising about one-third of the brigade’s combat troops, returns to port aboard the limping vessel. No other ships are available to transport the Marines. They are compelled to wait impatiently for the repairs to be completed. The Marines are confined to the vessel, except for some training on the docks, to prevent any possible security leaks. The unfortunate gutting of the U.S. Armed Forces, subsequent to the close of World War II, has become even more obvious. The Pickaway makes two attempts to embark, but on both occasions the vessel is forced to return for additional repairs. Finally, on its third attempt, the ship sails west, moving under the Golden Gate Bridge on its solo cruise toward Japan. In other activity, General Cates directs the activation of the First Replacement Draft (800 officers and enlisted men). Their departure is scheduled for August 10. This augments General Edward Craig’s mission in the event that the hostilities in Korea mandate a premature entrance of the 1st Provisional Marine Brigade. —In Japan: General MacArthur, recently appointed commander-in-chief of the United Nations Forces, is given a U.N. flag by U.S. Army chief of staff General J. Lawton Collins during a historic ceremony atop the Dai Ichi building. This is the first United Nations command. General headquarters convenes daily ( July through mid–September) to keep abreast of the Korean hostilities during these first perplexing months. Those who attend include Major General Willoughby (Intelligence G-2), Brigadier General H.E. Eastwood (Logistics), Brigadier General E.K. Wright (Operations) and representatives of the Air Force and Navy. Ambassador Sebald frequently attends these meetings. In other activity, at Yokohama, the 1st Cavalry Division begins its loading operations for the landing at Pohang-dong. The cavalry expects to arrive in time to forestall its loss to the enemy. Preparations during the previous week have been hectic, due to the acute shortage of amphibious shipping. Nevertheless, the U.S. Navy comes through with two AKAs, six LSUs, two MSTS transports and sixteen LSTs. In addition, LCMs and LCVPs are on hand. Also, Admiral Joy, the commander of Naval Forces Far East authorizes attacks against any unidentified submarines if the action is in self-defense or if it is evident that the unidentified vessel is preparing to take action against U.S. forces. In other activity, Fifth Air Force establishes an advance headquarters at Itazuke Air Force Base.

July 15

At 0600, the remnant 21st Regiment, 24th Division, departs the Taejon airstrip. It moves east to-

90 ward Okch’on to establish a defensive position in the heights to protect the rear of the 24th Division. General Dean has expressed concern that the North Koreans might romp through the South Korean lines east of Taejon, which also prompts him to redeploy the 21st Regiment. The total regimental strength, including a provisional group of 466 men, stands at about 1,100 troops. The 1st Battalion is composed of 517 men and the 3rd Battalion stands at a mere 132 troops. Upon completion of the eight-mile march, the 21st Regiment spreads out. Its command post remains in Okch’on. The line then extends to dominate the road that leads from the Kum River ferry to the Seoul-Pusan Highway. Also, a battery of the 11th Field Artillery Battalion accompanies the 21st Regiment. Engineers wire the nearby railroad and highway tunnels for demolition. Meanwhile, at about 0700 along the Kum River Line, the North Koreans begin to ford the river near the 19th Regiment’s far left positions. The I&R Platoon streams a steady flow of machine gun fire into the ranks and planes arrive to offer assistance. The combination turns the enemy back. However, farther down the river in the 34th Regimental sector, another enemy crossing takes place. Slight skirmishing occurs when the I&R Platoon probes to establish contact with the 34th Regiment. Most of the 19th Regiment’s reserve (about 65 percent) is pushed up to help support the deficient left flank. It, too, is thinly manned by only one machine gun platoon from G Company and a contingent of 81mm mortars attached to H Company. The left flank is further bolstered by two Quad-50s attached to the 26th Antiaircraft Artillery Battalion and two light tanks. These reserve troops are commanded by Lt. Colonel Thomas McGrail, commanding officer, 2nd Battalion, 19th Regiment. Still in reserve is Company F. While General Dean continues to search for solutions to hold back the advancing enemy, the North Korean 3rd Division makes plans to launch a powerful thrust. Before the sun sets, an N.K. T-34 tank swings around a bend in the road on the opposite side of the river. Quick communication between a member of Company B and the company commander sounds the alarm, but during the conversation, eight more tanks are spotted. The tanks commence firing, but without accuracy. Two friendly planes arrive to assist the 3rd Platoon. Several tanks that had begun the barrage seek refuge in the woods. The sole tank that remains on the road is set afire by the aircraft. The planes remain overhead until dark, but after their departure, the North Koreans roll trucks crammed with troops up to the bank of the river. Soon after, new air strikes and formidable mortar and artillery barrages strike the enemy positions on the north flank of the river. Many of the huts are set afire, giving the black sky a crimson glow. The North Koreans attempt to cross in small groups and they sustain heavy casualties, but some troops make it to the south bank by swimming under cover fire afforded by their tanks. Farther up the Kum River, at Hill 200, Company C

91 repels the enemy three separate times, but friendly fire inadvertently knocks out two of its 60-mm mortars and cripples its other one. Corporal Tabor modifies a mortar, then while holding the tube in his hand, he cranks out over 300 rounds. This type of adamant resistance by the 19th Regiment forbids all crossing attempts. Undeterred, the enemy still prepares for a massive assault. East Coast area: The North Korean 5th Division continues prodding toward Yongdok. In Air Force activity, at Taegu, the 51st Fighter Squadron (Provisional) initiates its initial combat mission for F-51 Mustangs in Korea. In other activity, Fifth Air Force issues an operation order that assigns “Mosquito” call signs to airborne controllers using T-6 planes. The T-6 aircraft become known as Mosquito planes. — In the United States: General Shepherd instructs General Harry Liversedge, acting commanding general, 1st Marine Division, to increase the training and workday for the troops of the division. Coincidentally, General MacArthur places his second request for a warstrength Marine division for his plan to invade Inchon, Korea. In other activity, Generals Collins and Vandenberg arrive back in the States (14th Washington time) from the Far East; President Truman, the other JCS and Louis Johnson are brought up to date. — In Japan: A U.S. Army band gives the Navy a

July 15, 1950 proper send-off, enthusiastically playing “Anchors Aweigh” as the warships of Task Force 90, commanded by Rear Admiral Doyle, embark for Korea. Doyle is aboard the USS McKinley, which will transport the 1st Cavalry Division to Pohang-dong. Thanks to the postwar actions of Congress, the gutted Navy is unable to easily carry out the mission. Two previous military sea transportation vessels, the USS Oglethorpe (AKA-100) and the USS Titania, have been hurried to Yokosuka, Japan, to be altered for handling boat skids. Other urgently needed but unavailable equipment is quickly manufactured. Even with the zealous effort to outfit the fleet, there has been another and more desperate crisis. The U.S. Navy lacks sufficient personnel to man the ships and has been forced to commandeer personnel from the amphibious base at Coronado, California. The improvised fleet had been fabricated by reactivating six former Japanese LSUs to augment the AKAs, which have also been given a hurried transfusion and face-lift to ensure a method of landing the troops. The fleet departs to rendezvous with the Tractor Group, but it is still unclear whether General Hobart Gay’s 1st Cavalry will land unopposed. It reaches Pohang on the 18th. In conjunction, naval aircraft of Admiral John M. Hoskins’ Carrier Group are on call to provide air support if necessary. In other activity, the Far East Command notifies Major Tony Raibl (executive officer, 3rd Bn., 29th Infantry Regiment) that the regiment, based on Okinawa,

U.S. armorers load .50-caliber machine gun ammunition belts into the wing of an F-51 Mustang.

July 15, 1950

92

Top: A ground crew loads an F-51 Mustang with fragmentation bombs. Bottom: A U.S. Gun Motor Carriage (M15A1) moves to positions along the Kum River on July 15. It carries one 37-mm gun (M1A2) and two .50-caliber (M2 HB) flexible machine guns. should prepare for embarkment to Korea. Recent plans for the 29th Regiment included about six weeks of combat training, but the deteriorating situation in Korea scraps the preparation. The 29th Regiment, as is the case with most others in Korea, will be composed of just two battalions. Headquarters remains on Okinawa to form a base for another regiment, which will be formed to assume responsibility for the defense of the island. The 1st and 3rd Battalions, 29th Regiment, are

the first of the eleven infantry battalions initially requested by MacArthur to bolster the effort to turn back the Communists in Korea. In other activity, General MacArthur, in an effort to decrease the huge numbers of airlifts from Korea to Japan, suggests supplementing the effort by use of the Japanese railroads and sea ferries. MacArthur’s headquarters contacts Eighth Army, suggesting the implementation of daily ferry service. They originate in the

93 Hakata-Moji area of Japan and move to Pusan, fed by a conveyor belt of rails that funnel express trains from the Tokyo-Yokohama vicinity, which essentially is a modified version of the famed World War II Red Ball express. The first train will depart Yokohama on July 23.

July 16 (See also, BATTLE OF THE KUM RIVER, this entry.) In the Kum River area, the 24th Division sector, 21st Regimental zone, a message arrives at 0500 from Division G-3. It directs the 21st Regiment to dispatch one platoon of tanks from Company A, 71st Tank Battalion, to the positions of the 19th Regiment north of Taejon, but the tanks do not advance. In conjunction, the G-3 Periodic Operations Report Number 11, 24th Infantry Division notes that Company A, 71st Tank Battalion (1st Cavalry Division), is attached to the 19th Regiment. The report also stipulates that there is no change with Company A, 78th Tank Battalion (24th Division), on July 16; the 71st Bn. tanks bolster the 24th Division tanks. East Coast area: The North Koreans begin flooding into the area near Yongdok, but rather than offer serious opposition, the South Korean 23rd Regiment, which holds positions in front of the imperiled town, gives way and begins rushing south. The KMAG advisors become perplexed as they become aware that the critical situation that confronts them may become insurmountable. A message of inquiry from Eighth Army Headquarters is received by Colonel Emmerich, who dispatches a stark response, informing headquarters that about 75 percent of the S.K. 23rd Regiment has absconded, fleeing south. The message says: “Advisors threatening and shooting in the air trying to get them [23rd S.K. Regiment] assembled. Commanding general (lee chu sik) forming a straggler line. If straggler line is successful we may be able to reorganize and reestablish the line. If this fails I am afraid that the whole thing will develop in complete disintegration.” In other activity, thirty B-29s attached to Far East Air Force attack the enemy railroad yards at Seoul. During the raid the railroad bridge that spans the Han River, which has survived several previous air raids, is finally destroyed. Also, the 40th Fighter-Interceptor Squadron (35th Group), USAF, transfers from its base at Ashiya, Japan, to Yonil Airfield, located in the eastern corridor below the Naktong River. A contingent of U.S. planes detects a column of enemy armor in the vicinity of Choch’iwon and takes it under attack. One plane, flown by Lieutenant Donald B. Russell, is hit and severely damaged by antiaircraft fire during the first strafing run. His plane loses its left wing tip and the tip tank and his plane’s flaps also become damaged. Nevertheless, Russell, at great risk to his life, continues the attack and knocks out one tank with a rocket and on successive passes, he damages one other tank and destroys several vehicles. Afterwards, he nurses the plane back to the base and is compelled to make an emergency landing without flaps in total darkness. Russell receives a Silver Star for his tremendous heroism on this flight.

July 16, 1950 BATTLE OF THE KUM RIVER In the 19th Regiment, 24th Division sector along the Kum River, the enemy strikes early. During the predawn hours, at about 0300, a flash of brilliance bursts in the air as a flare is shot from a passing North Korean plane. This brief illumination signals the attack. The north bank of the Kum roars with violent sounds of artillery, and in cadence, swarms of North Koreans initiate the crossing using many methods, including rafting and swimming. The massive assault is met by blistering fire; however, again the Americans are too under-strength and their communications become confusing. As the 1st Battalion attempts to dilute enemy strength with return fire, signals get crossed. At the main crossing site, a contingent of the 11th Field Artillery Battalion pivots the guns toward the wrong location and the requested flares do not appear. The mistake is deadly. The 1st Battalion’s 1st Platoon, C Company, commanded by Lt. Thomas Maher, feels the first heavy thud. Enemy troops that have penetrated a large hole between C and E Companies at about 0400 initiate a furious attack. During the brutal combat, Lieutenant Maher is called by Lieutenant Henry McGill and asked to check on the situation; Maher responds: “We’re doing fine.” And then, in less than a minute, a shot from a burp gun slays Maher. It is the beginning of the end. C Company, which has thrown back several attacks during the night, is unable to repulse this fourth thrust. Their positions are quickly overrun, and only about thirteen men escape. They don’t retreat, but rather hold steady on the middle finger of Hill 200. Meanwhile, the North Koreans have begun to deeply pierce the lines to initiate envelopment of the 1st Battalion. They launch a series of attacks coordinated with heavy infiltration to the rear. Company B, deployed to the right, also comes under attack. An enemy force composed of 300 to 400 men has crossed the river prior to daybreak. By first light of day, additional separate groups, composed of about 30 men each, are spotted as they bolt across the river, wading through shoulderhigh water with their weapons extended over their heads. It becomes apparent to Captain Monroe Anderson that once across the river, most of the North Koreans, their uniforms adorned with bushes and shrubs, conceal themselves in the hills, while others bypass Company B. Soon after, North Koreans are crossing all along the regimental front, imperiling the entire line. By 0630, unyielding enemy pressure forces the 1st Battalion to begin pulling back. Artillery and mortar fire fails to break up the attack, and the expected air cover is absent. Colonel Winstead, 1st Battalion Commander, informs Colonel Meloy of his predicament. Winstead’s command post and the positions of the Heavy Mortar Company sustain severe fire, but the enemy surge jeopardizes the entire battalion. The Communists overrun a Company B platoon, which is deployed behind the dike. About 15 survivors of the decimated platoon make it to safety. In conjunction, a portion of Company A is also leveled as the North Koreans plow

July 16, 1950 through the rice paddies and advance to capture the heights at Kadong-ni. Colonels Meloy and Winstead attempt to mount a counterattack with their remaining force. One tank, one Quad-50 antiaircraft artillery half-trac and an array of troops that includes cooks and clerks mount a desperate but successful counterattack. By 0900 the Americans drive the enemy from the high ground at Kadongni. During the bloody struggle, the 1st Battalion Executive Officer, Major John Cook, the Battalion S1, Captain Alan Hackett and the Battalion S-3, Wayne B. Macomber, are killed. Despite the lack of air support, the 19th Regiment prevails; General Dean is informed that as he requested, it can retain its positions until dark. However, another unexpected entity enters the battlefield strategy. Although the 19th Regiment is confident it can hold the line, it becomes evident that Colonel Meloy has no troops to defend his infiltrated rear against the North Koreans who had earlier bypassed Company B and Company F at the Kum. By now, these Communists have established formidable roadblocks at a sharp turn along the primary road about three miles behind the lines near Tuman-Ni. Urgent calls are placed for the airstrikes that had been promised on the previous day. The enemy takes great advantage of the battered 19th Regiment. A small American force attempts to procure additional ammunition for the weary 1st Battalion, but it is halted by the obstacle. Lieutenant Robert Nash, leading the contingent, is instructed by Colonel Meloy to head back and direct Colonel McGrail to commit Company G and Company H, 2nd Battalion, to attack and demolish the roadblock. En route, enemy fire destroys Nash’s jeep. Undaunted, he eventually walks into the 13th Field Artillery Battalion positions, gets another jeep and then speeds to Sangwang-ni to give Colonel McGrail his new orders. While this unexpected setback is unraveling, additional enemy troops begin to pummel the 19th Regiment’s artillery, which increases the urgency of reinforcements. Horrendous stress pushes the beleaguered 1st Battalion to the brink of endurance. Colonel Perry, commanding officer of the 52nd Field Artillery Battalion, peers westward from his command post that stands outside of Tuman-ni. He detects a prolonged line of enemy troops, clothed in white and about two miles distant in the mountains. These enemy troops scamper over one ridge, then disappear over another ridge to the south. Colonel Perry orders Battery A to commence firing on the moving column. Simultaneously, he informs the 13th Field Artillery Battalion, which is deployed below his positions, that North Koreans are encroaching his lines. Events begin to rapidly change. While the 13th Field Artillery Battalion prepares for the attack, a portion of the enemy force tails off and advances against Company B, 52nd Field Artillery Battalion. The morning lingers like a plague, and the necessary airpower and additional ammunition are unavailable. Since dawn,

94 only six friendly aircraft have sortied over the front. More urgent pleas for airstrikes go unanswered. However, one platoon of tanks (Company A, 71st Tank Battalion) is en route from the 21st Regiment’s positions to bolster the beleaguered 19th Regiment and the 52nd FABn. A furious exchange, beginning with American artillery fire, erupts between Company B, 52nd Field Artillery Battalion and the North Koreans. During the first enemy salvo, the battery commander and his first sergeant are both slain; and about five other top people are badly wounded. The executive officer, Lieutenant William Steele, assumes command. He continues to direct the fire while he regroups his command. In conjunction with this skirmish, another improvised group of soldiers that includes medical personnel is mobilized to initiate a counterattack in synchronization with artillery fire of Company B to crush the enemy’s flank. The combined effort succeeds and this enemy attack is thwarted. The North Koreans retire southward and head toward the hills. However, the situation continues to become more grave for the 19th Regiment. Its only escape route from the battlefield is blocked. As the hours pass, the enemy continues to fortify the roadblock and the nearby hills to gain domination of the entire area. In addition to the imperiled 19th Regiment, the positions of the 11th and 13th Field Artillery Battalions (both deployed farther south) are barraged from inaccurate long range small arms fire, signaling yet another alarm. The vehicles that had been halted at the roadblock are increasing in numbers. Colonel Meloy arrives there with Major Edward Logan (Regimental S-3), only to discover chaos and a definite lack of discipline. The Americans return fire, but the enemy positions remain concealed, causing the fire to be wasted. Meloy attempts to rally the men and initiate an attack to secure the hills, but he becomes wounded. Command of the Kum River Line is then assumed by Colonel Winstead (1st Battalion Commander). Time flashes by at a furious pace, and the battle-weary troops must contend with yet another enemy, the temperature, which surges to more than 100 degrees. By about 1300, General Dean is informed of the ongoing crisis, including the wounding of Colonel Meloy. Dean informs Major Logan that reinforcements will arrive to destroy the roadblock. However, Dean specifies that Logan must hold until about 1530, the estimated time of arrival of the fresh troops. Following the conversation between Dean and Logan, enemy fire destroys the communications vehicle, ceasing all communications. Soon after, Colonel Winstead directs Logan to form an assault group at the roadblock and attempt to reduce it. Logan is ordered to dispatch a messenger to establish contact with the advancing reinforcements. Colonel Winstead then begins to move back to the positions of the 1st Battalion at the river. By about 1330, he orders it to pull back. During his return to the Kum

95 River, Winstead is slain. The withdrawal is overtaxing, as the men of the 19th Regiment are not accustomed to the steep hills, the high humidity and the summer sun over Korea. Many of the men from Company C are reluctant to move from their foxholes on Hill 200 because of an ongoing ferocious enemy artillery attack that has the company pinned down. One soldier, Corporal Jack Arawaka, becomes seriously wounded when his machine gun blows up in his face, costing him most of his sight and all of his hearing. Arawaka, undaunted by his horrendous wounds, clasps a BAR and fiercely resists the enemy advance. Corporal Arawaka never leaves the hill. During the withdrawal, Company C discovers dead enemy soldiers scattered along a rice paddy ditch. The bodies are partially covered with water. One corpse still firmly clutches a grenade as Lt. Augustus Orr is passing. Suddenly, Orr spots an air bubble, then he sees the corpse open his eyes. Orr quickly liquidates the bornagain soldier. The Americans ensure that the rest of the North Koreans in the paddy are truly deceased, and then they resume their desperate journey. When Company C reaches the road, it encounters a contingent of enemy troops, but the Communists turn and head back toward the bridge rather than initiate a skirmish. Companies A and B, also heading south, are barely visible in the forward distance as C Company also moves south along the highway. Along the way, about six enemy machine guns, manned on the hill east of Palsan-ni, commence firing on Company C. The enfilade disrupts the disciplined withdrawal. The blistering fire stuns the unit and causes the troops to disperse haphazardly. The survivors break south, some forming small groups and others moving individually. The wounded have trouble escaping, but as usual brave corpsmen remain behind, rendering aid and sacrificing their own safety. Company B moves along the west side of the highway as it pulls back under the protection of F Company, but while providing this cover, Company F is struck at its left rear and left flank. In the meantime, the crisis at the roadblock heightens as more vehicles arrive to lengthen the line of stalled trucks. All the while, the enemy fire from the overlooking heights becomes more incessant. Some officers mount attacks to destroy the enemy positions containing automatic weapons, but all fail miserably. The two available light tanks at the roadblock are unable to locate the exact positions of the enemy guns because they are using smokeless powder. Nevertheless, the tanks commence fire in hopes of striking the concealed positions, but to no avail. While attempts are in progress to silence the guns in the high ground, four F-51s appear overhead. The planes pound the hill and create a new problem for the attacking American troops. During one of the assaults by a 50-man contingent, the leader, Lieutenant Lloyd Smith, and one other officer suddenly find themselves alone after advancing about three hundred feet. Lacking the remainder of the assault unit, the two officers move back down the hill toward their positions at the

July 16, 1950 roadblock. In the meantime, heavy enemy fire continues to pulverize the area near the U.S. vehicles. Most of the soldiers remain in the ditches to avoid being shot. As the dreadful day continues, other means of penetrating the roadblock continue, all scoring little success. Repeated attempts are made to move the crippled vehicles, but this only results in more casualties. Consequently, each time the vehicles begin to move, the enemy fire rains upon them. Supporting air strikes also fail to terminate the enemy machine gun fire. Orders go out to Company F, which has been held in reserve, to attack and break through the roadblock; however, its circumstances are also bleak since it is under siege and totally surrounded. By 1430, Major Logan places Captain Edgar Fenstermacher in command of the troops at the roadblock while he leads about twenty men east, then south to find a circuitous route around the blockage. After a harrowing two-hour trek, the contingent encounters the 13th Field Artillery Battalion, which has already begun moving farther south. Shortly thereafter, Major Logan confers with General Dean. Meanwhile, 2nd Lt. Robert Nash completes his eventful journey to Colonel McGrail’s command and from there, he speeds to Taejon airstrip to receive permission from General Menoher, assistant division commander, to commandeer vehicles to transport Companies G and H to support the 19th Regiment at the Kum River. During the swiftly changing events, General Dean instructs Major Logan to continue moving south to establish a new line of defense west of the Taejon airstrip and he also orders Colonel McGrail to lead the reinforcements to help stall the attacking North Koreans at the Kum. In the meantime, five jeeps, each containing wounded men that had breached the roadblock, race through the perimeter of the 13th Field Artillery. While running the gauntlet under sheets of fire, the wounded are each wounded again at least one time. The convoy, led by Lt. Colonel Homer Chandler, who sustains a leg wound, continues racing south, while Colonel McGrail moves forward with the relief force, bolstered by two light tanks and four antiaircraft vehicles, each crammed with troops. The advance is short-lived. After traveling about one mile, the reinforcements round a sharp curve that places the relief convoy about 300 to 400 yards from the final curve prior to reaching the roadblock. Without warning, enemy fire, seemingly from all directions, pounds the vehicles and inflicts a startling and crushing blow. The U.S. antiaircraft vehicles return fire to no avail. All four vehicles are destroyed. The majority of the infantry bolts from the vehicles to seek refuge in nearby ditches. The two surviving light tanks commence firing and blast the suspected enemy positions. By 1600, having expended all their ammunition, both tanks head south. The casualty rate becomes extremely high: personnel in the vehicles either wounded or killed stand at 90 percent. Back behind the roadblock, the entrapped survivors remain unaware of the rescue attempts. Undaunted,

July 16, 1950 they continue to search for a way to break through. Finally, at about 1800, amidst the burning debris, several officers decide to ram the barricade with a tank to get Colonel Meloy (wounded) to safety where he can receive medical help. Subsequent to four attempts, the charging tank plows the burning vehicles and other incinerated obstacles out of the center of the road to create sufficient space to break out. The roaring tank, trailed by about twenty trucks, darts through the enfilade just before another hurricane of enemy fire again forbids passage. During the hurried trip south, the tank that permitted the breakthrough stalls and it is transporting Colonel Meloy. All the other vehicles refuse to stop and give assistance. These retreating vehicles express no concern for their fellow troops nor their wounded commanding officer, nor the tankers that made the breakthrough possible. However, a contingent of Captain Michael Barszcz’s troops provide protection for Meloy and soon after, the 2nd Battalion gets him to safety. About one hour later, at 1900, the 500 entrapped men receive orders from Captain Fenstermacher to prepare to walk out. They are directed to head east subsequent to destroying all 100 vehicles. During this activity, Fenstermacher is slain when he sustains a shot in the neck. Not all the defending troops have regrouped at the roadblock; rather, many have scattered individually and in small groups, retreating east toward Taejon. Meanwhile, as the ambush of the relief force under McGrail is taking place, Company H is rushing to the scene. Company G, near Kongju, is still halted, awaiting transportation to the roadblock. At the same time, the I&R Platoon is diligently destroying the road at Kongju to create obstacles in the path of the expected enemy advance. Soon after, at Yusong, Company G, commanded by Capt. Barszcz, arrives and receives instructions from General Menoher to fall out and deploy on the river bank to resist some expected tanks, but this order is changed and G Company is directed to head for the roadblock. While rushing to the front, a retreating truck transporting a military policeman on the front fender causes a false alarm as the policeman screams, “Tanks! Tanks!” The truck keeps racing south, but Capt. Barszcz places his jeep across the road to block it, then he deploys his men to attack the tanks. However, the alarm had been false. After the unnecessary waste of time, Company G advances on foot and after a short walk, the unit encounters General Dean. He instructs Barszcz to advance and establish contact with the enemy, then launch an attack to demolish the roadblock. The advance continues, however, without results, just additional casualties. G Company reaches a point about two miles south of Tuman-ni and six miles north of Yusong, still about one-half mile from the enemy positions, when it comes under long range fire. The unit drives forward and ascends a hill to approach the enemy to their left. The troops reach the summit at sundown and establish fortified positions, but soon af-

96 terward orders reach them instructing them to withdraw. This withdrawal terminates the effort to break the roadblock and rescue the trapped contingents. While Company G pulls back toward Yusong, it comes upon the stalled tank, Colonel Meloy and some other wounded men. An officer returns with a vehicle. The wounded, including Meloy, who had been abandoned earlier by the others in their convoy, are sped to Yusong. As the enduring day comes to a close, the battered survivors cling to hope, but again the valiant efforts of the majority are shortchanged by the callous actions of a minority. About one hour before midnight, the final survivors at the roadblock are heading east toward the hills. The ascent is tough, and many of the wounded (about 30 men) are being carried on litters by able-bodied troops. During the climb many of the litter bearers vanish, abandoning the wounded. And those who reach the crest with the seriously wounded maintain that the injured can be carried no farther. Captain Linton J. Buttrey, medical officer, and the regimental chaplain, Herman G. Felhoelter, decide to remain with the wounded from this group. Chaplain Felhoelter then advises Captain Buttrey to escape as the two men realize that the enemy is extremely close to their defenseless positions. Buttrey departs and sustains a serious wound as he gets away. Soon after, the North Koreans pounce on the wounded men. Sergeant James W. Haskins, Headquarters Company, observes the slaughter though his binoculars. While the chaplain is praying over the wounded, the enemy massacres him and all of the wounded Americans. By the following day, survivors of the 19th Regiment begin to reach Taejon and Yusong. The grueling contest has cost the regiment heavily, but Companies G and E remain operable. Company E, deployed at the railroad bridge on the east flank, has not yet come under attack. Of the regiment’s 900 men at the beginning of the battle, only 434 are reported on the roster in Taejon on the 17th. Company C sustains 122 casualties out of 171 men. The Regimental Headquarters Company suffers 57 casualties out of a strength of 191 men. The 1st Battalion, composed of 785 men, sustains a 43 percent casualty rate (338 men). The 2nd Battalion sustains lesser casualties, 86 troops out of 777 men. Also, the 52nd Field Artillery Battalion, composed of 393 men, sustains 53 casualties. The 19th Regiment in its entirety, including artillery components, suffers 19 percent casualties (650 men). During the afternoon of the 17th, following its devastating defeat, the 19th Regiment moves to Yongdong to be reequipped and await replacement troops. The North Korean 3rd Division had failed repeatedly to permanently penetrate the frontal positions of the 19th Regiment during the day, except for the positions of Company C on Hill 200; the defenders successfully repelled the attacks or drove them back by counterattack. Nonetheless, the enemy’s attack again over-

97

July 16, 1950

Yongdong, located southeast of Taejon. U.S. contingents prepare for action against the enemy that controls the hills there. The town is abandoned on 26 July. whelmed the American units by penetration and envelopment, although no enemy tanks had been committed south of the Kum River during this engagement. By now, the N.K. 3rd and 4th Divisions have crossed the Kum River, and they are closing on Taejon. In conjunction, the N.K. 2nd Division, which had been hitting stiff ROK resistance, is unable to join the other divisions in time for the fight for Taejon. The Americans continue to withdraw to their next designated delaying positions, much closer to Taejon. Shortly after sunset, the 34th Regiment pulls back from its positions near Nonsan. It moves south about twenty miles, where it redeploys several miles west of Taejon with responsibility for the immediate area north and west of the city. However, the 34th Infantry, like the other two regiments of the 24th Division, has been seriously weakened and is able to muster only about one battalion to defend its perimeter. Responsibility for the area was to have been shared with the 19th Infantry, but the 19th is now rendered ineffective for battle. Colonel Charles Beauchamp arrives from Japan to

assume command of the 34th Regiment, replacing Colonel Martin (killed on July 8). Also, all 24th Division artillery units, except the 105-mm howitzers of the 11th Field Artillery Battalion, are merged into a composite battalion and ordered to spread out to defend the Taejon airfield. Colonel Meloy and Colonel Chandler both receive medical attention in a hospital. —In the United States: The Advance Echelon of the 1st Marine Air Wing departs the West Coast by air for Japan. Brigadier Generals Edward A. Craig, commanding officer, 1st Provisional Marine Brigade, and Thomas J. Cushman, his chief of staff, and several staff members are aboard the transport plane. The entourage stops at Pearl Harbor to confer with General Shepherd, USMC, and subsequently Admiral Radford, prior to pushing to the Far East. During the brief meetings in Hawaii, General Craig reiterates his sharp concerns about inadequate amounts of equipment and a crucial shortage of replacement troops for the Marine ranks, which already are dangerously thin. Following the conferences, the plane departs, arriving in Japan on the 19th.

July 17, 1950

July 17

General Walton H. Walker, subsequent to instructions from General MacArthur, assumes command of all Republic of Korea ground troops. South Korean President Syngman Rhee has requested this action, but there is nothing in writing to this effect. As the conflict progresses, U.N. command of ROK forces occasionally becomes a strained endeavor. Later in the day, General Walker is presented a United Nations flag from a representative of the U.N. The flag is hung at Eighth Army Headquarters. At Taejon, General Dean concentrates on trying to establish a solid line in front of the town. Dean and two other officers remain at Taejon, but the remainder of Headquarters, 24th Division, departs by rail to Yongdong. By mid-afternoon, the 34th Regiment is in place in front of Taejon, but the other two regiments expected to share responsibility are unavailable. Again, the defenses are implemented for the purpose of slowing the enemy, not halting the attack. The key to success depends on the arrival of sufficient numbers of reinforcements. In other activity, the 24th Division Operations Instructions No. 7 at Taejon (0900) dictates changes with attached tanks: “Company A, 71st Tank Battalion, 1st platoon relieved from attachment 19th RCT and reverts to company control.” It is attached to 21st Regiment. Also, the instructions order the 24th Division tanks, Company A, 78th Tank Battalion, to move to Yongdong by rail. East Coast area: the North Koreans easily seize Yongdok as the undisciplined S.K. 23rd Regiment collapses. Eighth Army, stunned by the lightning quick capture of the town, reacts immediately. The 159th Field Artillery Battalion, the first artillery unit brought into the area to support the South Koreans, initiates its mission during the afternoon by pounding enemy positions. In conjunction, the South Koreans regroup and prepare to mount a counterattack on the following day to regain the lost terrain. The contest for control of Yongdok bounces back and forth until finally on the 2nd of August, the South Koreans terminate the battle and gain control of the town. In other activity, forty-seven B-29s attack Hungnam along the northeast coast of North Korea; the primary target is the Chosin Nitrogen Plant there. A group of 3 B-29s accidentally bomb friendly civilians in Andong.

July 18

A shipment of 3,000 antitank mines arrives in Pusan from Japan; Japanese factories have been manufacturing these mines since the beginning of July to aid the U.N. cause. Also, the fleet transporting the 1st Cavalry Division arrives off Pohang-dong on the southeast coast of Korea at 0558. The flotilla moves without incident into Yongil Bay and the landing occurs without opposition. With the good news at hand, Admiral Doyle informs the Seventh Fleet planes that their services would not be required to cover the ground troops. Admiral Struble then orders the Seventh Fleet to proceed north into the Sea of Japan to implement the

98 air strikes that have been scheduled subsequent to covering the landing. Carrier based planes attack and devastate North Korean airfields, railroads, factories and an oil refinery at Wonsan. And, the planes strike targets at Hamhung, Hungnam and Numpyong. The raids continue into the following day. One naval plane is lost (on the 19th) during the missions. It is the initial naval plane that is lost during the conflict. Meanwhile, the fleet’s (CTF 90) signal is raised: “Land the Landing Force.” The administrative (Plan B — unopposed) landing gets a rousing approval from Commander Noel, Admiral Doyle’s planning officer, as the beaches are not considered suitable against opposition, and especially because now a sinister typhoon, dubbed “Helene,” is arriving. The first contingent of troops (8th Cavalry Regiment) debark slightly after 0600 and are greeted by Lt. General Walton H. Walker. At 0630, the smiling general welcomes the 5th Cavalry. Soon after, the landing is temporarily aborted, thanks to Helene (“Grace” in Marine records), the rampaging typhoon. The 7th Cavalry Regiment and the 82nd Field Artillery Battalion become temporary sailors, a tedious task for ground troops untrained for conquering seasickness. Despite the nasty storm, by midnight the LSTs unload about 60 percent of their cargoes; the Mount McKinley, Oglethorpe, Titania and the Union are totally unloaded. A total of 10,027 troops debark and 2,022 vehicles plus 2,729 tons of supplies are unloaded. The inclement weather also suspends the unloading of supplies at Pusan, which dangerously depletes Eighth Army’s rations. Meanwhile, back at Pohang-dong, trains stand ready to shuttle the cavalrymen north to the battle zone. Some armored units of the 1st Cavalry Division flow ashore within the first twenty-four hours. Before one week passes, they engage Communist forces on the Taegu-Pusan Highway. At Taejon, General Dean prepares to abandon the city on the following day. In conjunction, Colonel Stephens’ 21st Regiment is at Okch’on. Engineers with the regiment work east of Taejon, wiring the tunnels for demolition. However, General Walker, following a stop at General Gay’s positions at Pohang, arrives at Taejon Airstrip during the morning and plans change. By day’s end, evacuation plans are aborted. Walker, having acquired a detailed report of all available troops and of those reinforcements en route, decides to hold Taejon with the 24th Division and ROK troops, bolstered by the 1st Cavalry, which deploys around Okch’on and south of Taejon along the Kumsan Road. Walker’s strategy calls for halting the North Koreans between Taejon and Taegu. General Walker is convinced that if the North Koreans compel a withdrawal beyond the Naktong River, the U.S.–ROK troops can hold there until a bolstered Eighth Army can initiate an offensive. Ultimately, Dean is informed by General Walker that the 24th Division must hold Taejon for 48 hours. Consequently, this extends Dean’s plan by 24 hours. In accordance with Walker’s wishes, Dean readjusts his strategy. He goes to

99

July 18, 1950

A U.S. Army contingent loads into a landing craft July 18 off Pohang-dong on the Korean east coast. the 24th Division command post at Yongdong and orders the 2nd Battalion, 19th Regiment, to return from there to Taejon. In conjunction, Battery B, 13th Field Artillery Battalion, is directed to depart its positions at Okch’on and redeploy at the Taejon airstrip. Also, the Reconnaissance Company (attached to the division) at Kumsan is transferred to control of the 34th Regiment

to afford the regiment more immediate information concerning its southern flank. However on the 19th, the new regimental commander, Colonel Beauchamp, orders it to move to Taejon. When the reconnaissance company abandons Kumsan, the southern flank becomes defenseless and without eyes, giving the enemy great advantage.

July 18, 1950

100

Top: Landing craft head for the beach in vicinity of Pohang-dong. LSTs are on the left. Bottom: A U.S. infantry contingent (1st Cavalry Division) lands at Pohang-dong. General Dean, unaware of the movement of the Reconnaissance Company, confers with Colonel Stephens and informs him that the 21st Regiment should remain along the Taejon-Okch’on Road and in the hills northwest of Taejon, between it and Okch’on to keep the enemy from breaking through ROK lines. The 21st Infantry, however, is directed to dispatch frequent patrols

into Taejon. In conjunction, the combination of tanks, including the 24th Division’s Company A, 78th Tank Battalion, and those of the 1st Cavalry, Company A, 71st Tank Battalion, gives the 24th Division added strength; the latter includes six officers and 122 enlisted men. In other activity, the N.K. 2nd Division departs

101 Ch’ongju to hook up with the N.K. 3rd and 4th Divisions to bolster the attack to seize Taejon. The 2nd Division has sustained severe casualties along its march and is unable to reach the objective on time. In still other activity, General John H. Church is promoted to major general. East Coast area: Elements of the South Korean 3rd Division form to attack and regain Yongdok. U.S. planes converge over enemy positions at Yongdok at 0545 and deposit enormous amounts of menacing firepower on the North Koreans. This blow is followed by a huge barrage launched by the naval surface guns of the fleet. The enemy receives no interlude. At 0600, the light cruiser Juneau blasts two star shells into the sky to signal the attack. The South Koreans, their numbers swelled by reinforcements, race forward under the umbrella coverage of the massive naval guns. The exhaustive sprint carries them to positions from where their small-arms weapons become effective. Other naval guns, firing in concert with the ground troops’ support fire, pound the enemy’s rear. The combined thrust compels the North Koreans to evacuate and regroup about three miles north of the town. Although the South Koreans take the objective, it is lost again on the following day. Contingents of the N.K. 5th Division counterattack and push the South Koreans back out of the Yongdok. Determined to revenge their loss, the South Koreans open another attack on the 21st, which opens a new segment of the roller coaster ride for domination of the area. The bulk of the ground fighting is at close quarters, causing gruesome results. In the meantime, more warships arrive and the tenacity of the naval vessel’s surface guns accelerates in concert with the aircraft. The planes and naval vessels give a repeat performance over Yongdok and deliver an early wake-up call to the occupants. The destroyers USS Higbee, DeHaven, Mansfield, and Swenson and the HMS Belfast, a British cruiser, are offshore. The incessant barrage, when enjoined by artillery and mortar fire, peels the skin from the earth and ignites raging fires that torch the arid battle zone. Fierce combat propels the South Koreans back into the coveted town; however, the enemy, despite the enfilade of U.N. air and naval support, takes advantage of its own artillery support and retakes the lost ground by dusk. By day’s end, the entire area, including the hills, stands stark naked. The terrain stretching from Kanggu-dong through Yongdok and several miles beyond is denuded of vegetation. The landscape is cluttered with clusters of mangled corpses. Every tiny village in the vicinity has been decimated. Although the North Koreans recapture Yongdok, the naval armada remains offshore to keep them under check for a while. Aircraft continue to dominate the skies. From dawn to dusk, planes deliver a steady stream of ravaging fire to restrict the enemy’s movement. On occasion, contingents emerge from the burning rubble of Yongdok and attempt to maneuver through the mountains to circle

July 18, 1950 the ROK forces, but they become conspicuous targets and sustain heavy losses. Today, it is estimated that effective fire, initiating solely from the Juneau (according to observers), accounts for the deaths of about 400 North Korean troops. Several days later, on the 24th, according to information from captured prisoners, about 800 North Koreans are killed after getting snagged, immobilized and annihilated by the combined power of planes attacking from the west in synchronization with the naval surface guns that lambaste the grid area from the east. The struggle for control of the town decreases slightly while the N.K. 5th Division regroups and the South Koreans receive reinforcements. But several more fiercely contested battles occur. The reformed S.K. 22nd Regiment and contingents of the ROK Naval Combat Team arrive to bolster the assault force. Also, U.S. forces have been deployed to the rear of the S.K. 23rd Regiment, near Pohang-dong. On the 23rd, the U.S. 1st Battalion, 7th Cavalry, deployed behind the S.K. 23rd Regiment and restricted by orders to support the ROK forces with “fire only,” discovers a problem; the men of Company C, deployed on Hill 181 (Round Top), stare spellbound as the North Koreans and South Koreans badger each other on the southern fringes of Yongdok. The Americans must refrain from giving assistance. The directed passiveness pays no dividends as the North Koreans await darkness and surround Hill 181, but no enemy attack is mounted during the night. In another instance on the 23rd, an 81-mm mortar platoon attached to Company D becomes encircled by North Korean troops, but they are driven back. On the 24th, the S.K. 23rd Regiment again recaptures Yongdok; using a preconceived strategy it takes the objective, then pulls out to form a strong night perimeter. During the action, the U.S. 21st Regiment relieves the 1st Battalion, 7th Cavalry, and takes responsibility for guarding the rear of the ROK forces at Yongdok. Later, the N.K. 5th Division moves into Yongdok and is greeted by more overpowering air strikes and naval surface vessel bombardments. Despite the gargantuan strikes that inflict heavy casualties, the enemy retains its tenacity. Nonetheless, the S.K. 3rd Division is determined to gain absolute victory, although initially the commanding general, Lee Chu Sik, had only reluctantly agreed to renew the attack. The big push, scheduled for July 27, commences on time. At 0830, the artillery in cadence with the navy’s long guns announces the attack and initiate a thunderous bombardment. Swarms of aircraft join the attack and enunciate the intentions of the South Koreans. The ROKs fearlessly attack and hammer the North Koreans. In turn, the Communists batter the South Koreans, dealing out equal punishment. The slugfest ensues nearly without pause. The fate of Yongdok is finally decided on the 2nd of August, when a victorious S.K. 3rd Division routs the enemy and chases them north. This victory culminates the first effective holding

July 19, 1950 action against the enemy since the outbreak of hostilities. Victory had been tilted to the South Koreans because of the tremendously effective methods and firepower of the aircraft and ships. Also, the terrain did not permit the Communists to unfold their usual envelopment tactics. West Coast area: The unopposed N.K. 6th Division continues to move south along the west coast; it encroaches Kunsan, which possesses a port. In Naval activity, seven planes (VF-51), led by Commander A.D. Pollock from the Valley Forge, take off during the morning and swoop up the northeast coast beyond Wonsan, where they locate an operable oil refinery that has survived three previous bombing raids. During the latter part of the afternoon (1700), twentyone aircraft are launched from the Valley Forge. Ten F4U Corsairs, equipped with two rockets each and ample supplies of 20-mm ammunition, led by Lt. Commander W.R. Pittman (VF-53), and eleven AD Skyraiders, each carrying two rockets (high velocity) and one 500 pound bomb, augmented by one 1,000 pound bomb, led by Lt. Commander N.D. Hodson (VA-55), execute the mission. The thunderous chain of explosions, columns of swirling flames and mountains of smoke attest to its success. The refinery is reduced to ruins, but when the planes are 60 miles away, returning to the Valley Forge, the smoke-filled sky remains in view. The Chosin Oil Refinery, capable of producing 1,700,000 barrels of oil a year, is rendered useless. Ironically, according to the Key West Agreement (1948), the Chosin Refinery should have come under “strategic warfare,” a target for the Air Force rather than the Navy. (See also East Coast area, this date.) — In the United States: Major General Oliver P. Smith, USMC, who had been commissioned a second lieutenant during World War I and later served in the Pacific during World War II, departs Washington, D.C., to assume command of the 1st Marine Division; Brigadier General Harry B. Liversedge is temporary commanding officer of the division. General Smith succeeds Major General Graves B. Erskine, who is assigned to the State Department for a secret mission in Southeast Asia. July 19–20 1950 THE BATTLE OF TAEJON At 0730, the North Koreans attack to topple the city, which is defended by about 4,000 men of the U.S. 24th Division. Six enemy planes strike the positions of the 21st Regiment. The airstrike damages a railroad slightly northwest of Okch’on, but before noon, engineers (3rd Platoon, Company B) repair it to permit resumption of two-way traffic. Taejon airstrip is also struck. During the attack, the planes drop statements that had been coerced from several captured American officers and three noncommissioned officers. Outside of Taejon, near Yusong, at least two enemy Yaks are blown from the sky by troops of Battery A, 26th Antiaircraft Battalion. The ground attack is launched by elements of the N.K. 4th Divi-

102 sion. Its 16th and 18th Regiments, lacking both tanks and artillery, drive from the south and west. The stunning maneuver envelops the city and simultaneously permits the North Koreans to erect a formidable roadblock east of Taejon, along the Okch’on Road. The exact routes of the enemy’s movement are not available, but speculation attributes the enemy descent upon Taejon as having come through the mountains from the Nonsan-Taejon Road and by forced march from Nonsan along the highway from Kumsan. Later, other evidence provides proof that at least a portion of the envelopment force had moved through Kumsan. Although no T-34 tanks accompany the 16th and 18th N.K. Regiments, some tanks (107th Tank Regiment, 105th N.K. Armored Division) attached to the 4th N.K. Division since the initial invasion across the 38th Parallel break into the city during the morning. Later, during the afternoon, additional tanks (203rd Tank Regiment) attached to the N.K. 3rd Division penetrate the city limits. Meanwhile, U.S. Air Force planes scour the skies in search of enemy positions near the Kum River. The aircraft plaster suspected locations west and southwest of Taejon, but again, the North Koreans are undeterred. They unleash their assault. In the meantime, General Dean is heading for Yongdong. En route, at about 1000, while pausing at Okch’on, he decides to return to Taejon to recheck the defending positions of the 34th Regiment at the front entrance of the city. At about the same time, the 24th Reconnaissance Battalion arrives at Taejon and it is immediately directed to dispatch one platoon, composed of 39 men, southwest along the Nonsan Road. At 1030, when the unit reaches a point about three miles west of the Kap-ch’on River, near the positions of L Company, 34th Regiment, the enemy springs an ugly ambush. The platoon gets snagged in a deadly cross-fire by elements of the N.K. 4th Division (probably contingents of the N.K. 5th Regiment). The platoon pivots quickly, then sprints to the east bank of the river to join a contingent of L Company. Soon after, the balance of L Company arrives to support a roadblock on the Nonsan Road. The enemy buildup for the attack has been huge. During the morning, Taejon airstrip is pounded by artillery that has escaped harm by U.S. air strikes. The rain of fire against the airstrip and the perimeter of the 34th Regiment originates from the north and northwest and remains incessant throughout the day. It reaches proportions that rival bombardments of World War II. By the time General Dean arrives back at Taejon, the enemy attack is operating at full throttle. He rushes to the roadblock to direct the battle. By 1300, Colonel McGrail’s 2nd Battalion, 19th Regiment, arrives in Taejon; it too speeds directly to the L Company roadblock, which nears collapse due

103

July 19, 1950

Top: U.S. soldiers in action on 20 July in the vicinity of Taejon. The weapon is a 3.5-inch rocket launcher (super bazooka). It is capable of destroying the previously invincible T-34 tank. Bottom: A 3.5-inch rocket launcher (M20) team in action during the fighting at Taejon. The weapon weighs 15 pounds and is composed of two parts for easy handling and transporting. to enormous enemy pressure. Meanwhile, General Dean coordinates the fire of two U.S. tanks to forestall disaster until McGrail arrives. Contingents of the N.K. 3rd Division bolster the N.K. 5th Regiment (4th Division) and provide a heavy punch to bolster the frontal assault. The vicious sting of the

enemy also pounds the 19th Regiment, particularly Company F, deployed on the left perimeter of Taejon. During the afternoon, it becomes more evident that the enemy is poised to launch a major ground attack against the beleaguered and slimly numbered

July 19, 1950 group of Americans. Colonels Ayres and Beauchamp discuss a night withdrawal. Beauchamp tells Ayres that Taejon can be held for an additional 24 hours, and he has so informed General Dean. The Communists maintain momentum throughout the day, but the roadblock holds. As the tedious ordeal continues, darkness, accompanied by sporadic rainfall, settles over the battlefield. The rain, a byproduct caused by a typhoon that had spared the immediate area, eradicates the choking dust that has been swirling around all day. Enemy infiltrators use the elements to their advantage. They discover a large hole separating the 1st Battalion, 34th Regiment, and the 19th Infantry’s Company F (2nd Battalion) and penetrate with impunity. The darkness and temporary tranquility do little to reassure the defenders, and the utter silence raises the edginess of most of the troops that are scattered in front of Taejon. All anticipate a major night assault. Nearly all of the 1st Battalion’s vehicles have been moved into the city to prevent capture if the forward positions are overrun. The artillery, which had been deployed at the airstrip to bolster the 34th Regiment, has been pulled back and redeployed on the southern fringes of the city. Not surprisingly, at about 2200, the peculiar silence is crushed when the clanking noise of approaching tanks is detected along the right flank of the 1st Battalion, 34th Regiment. The roar of the T-34s signals imminent battle. A patrol dispatched to probe the strength of the enemy movement vanishes without trace. Colonel Ayres confers with Colonel Beauchamp and again suggests a pull-back, but no withdrawal plans are implemented. Intertwined with the mysterious loss of the patrol, more foreboding sounds are picked up along the Kumsan Road, about six miles south of Taejon. This discovery clearly indicates more enemy infiltration. Again, the information is transmitted to the 34th Regimental Command Post. A nine-man patrol, composed of troops of the 24th Reconnaissance Company, led by Lieutenant George Kristanoff, is dispatched to probe the strength of the enemy. The patrol moves cautiously down the Kumsan Highway and encounters an impassable roadblock. In an instant, the enemy commences firing and inflicts yet another disaster on the Americans. All four jeeps in the convoy are decimated and the bodies of the troops are scattered along the roadway. A report regarding the ambush reaches Taejon at about 0200 (20 July). The news that the jeep had been ambushed is considered only an isolated incident, rather than a major enemy infiltration. Dean is not informed of the roadblock. At about 0300, a security patrol, composed of one platoon, ventures down the road to inspect its defenses. It, too, halts abruptly at the roadblock. Shortly thereafter, the enemy increases the pressure. The North Koreans quickly destroy the advance observation post of the 1st Battalion, 34th Reg-

104 iment; then by use of the usual envelopment tactics, they plow through key battalion defenses. Simultaneously, enemy armor and infantry strike a powerful blow against the right flank. Other units spring from the north and they also hammer the right flank. The defenders’ positions are becoming untenable, and to make matters worse, the enemy armor is closing fast. The 1st Battalion command post comes under severe attack by 0400. Colonel Ayres is unable to raise communications with his front-line troops as enemy tanks begin to bang against the door. Infantry bazooka teams, deployed to guard the road approaches, initiate an abandonment of their positions, and the rifle companies expend only sparse amounts of ammunition before they pull back. Having few remaining options, Colonel Ayres orders the command post to pull back. Before the first light of dawn, about 200 troops led by Major Leland Dunham begin to march out of the Yudung valley heading south. Ayres follows shortly thereafter. Later, about three miles south of Taejon, Major Dunham is mortally wounded near the Kumsan Road. Several others in his party are less seriously wounded. Those who are able head west toward Masuri. Meanwhile, Taejon jumps with activity as additional information arrives from the front lines. Then, suddenly, communications are severed between Colonel Beauchamp and the 1st Battalion. Patrols are sent to inspect the wire and make repairs, but the troops are unable to complete the task because the enemy has gained control of the road, nearly to the airfield. Colonel Beauchamp, still unconvinced of the enemy’s deep penetration, ventures forward in a jeep to verify the reports. He reaches the junction of the Seoul Highway and Nonsan Road, about onehalf mile outside the town. Here, he receives firsthand verification when his jeep encounters an enemy tank that pummels his vehicle with machine gun fire. The jeep is set afire, but Beauchamp sustains only a superficial wound. Undaunted and apparently greatly aggravated, he crawls several hundred yards, locates a bazooka team and prepares to take on the tank. The imminent encounter holds a surprise for the mighty T-34 tanks. New ammunition, recently perfected after about five years of experimentation, has arrived in Korea and it is about to confront the near impenetrable enemy armor. Beauchamp disregards his wound and returns to the road junction with the bazooka team and high hopes that the initial test of the weapon will be a huge success. Soon after, the bazooka fires upon the tank and the results are immediately known, to the jubilation of the Americans. The T-34 is quickly reduced to burning scrap and its startled crew is captured. Two additional enemy tanks arrive on scene and they, too, are introduced to the new bazookas. Both are blown away. Nonetheless, the destruction of the three tanks is not enough to halt the ground attacks. Back at Taejon,

105 word of the destruction of the tanks fails to reach the commanders. Meanwhile, due to the fear of being enveloped, the 1st Battalion, 34th Infantry, moves into the mountains instead of heading for Taejon. With the seizure of more ground, the enemy is able to direct more confusion; using a captured jeep radio, the North Koreans plant false information concerning the condition of the 1st Battalion, 34th Regiment. In conjunction, the gap between the 2nd Battalion, 19th Regiment, and the 1st Battalion, 34th Regiment, begins to dangerously widen. The 3rd Battalion, 34th Regiment, mounts an attack to seal the hole. Company K and a contingent of M Company advances; however, an enemy battalion and six T34 tanks disperse the attackers. During these blazing contests, SFC Robert E. Dare attempts to get the besieged troops of the advance platoon to safety. Despite the nasty opposition, the U.S. 3rd Battalion (34th Regiment) troops make it back to their starting point, but SFC Dare sacrifices his life to ensure the safety of his buddies. For his gallantry under fire, Dare receives the Distinguished Service Cross posthumously. Earlier, at 0131, an entry is posted in the 21st Regiment War Diary that about 200 guerrillas had infiltrated behind the lines of the 34th Regiment, but it is not known if this information had been passed on to General Dean or Colonel Beauchamp. Within the city, General Dean is awakened by small-arms fire at 0530. Slightly thereafter, an enemy tank rolls by the 34th Regimental Headquarters. Dean, supported by two bazooka teams, chases the tank as it heads out of town. The hunting trip is unsuccessful, but when the tank reenters the city, it is destroyed by a howitzer. Dean and his group miss two other tanks; however, by 0900, four of the five tanks that penetrate Taejon are decimated by American fire. Later, at about 1400, Dean’s contingent finally bags a tank. Dean, a squad of the 3rd Engineering Combat Battalion, and Lieutenant Arthur Clarke take credit for the kill. Clarke relates: “I remained by the corner of the building in front of the tank to use my Molotov cocktail on it if it began to move. The first round (fired from second story) hit the tank and the occupants began to scream and moan. The second round quieted most of the screaming and the third made it all quiet.” General Dean, attempting to inspire his troops to become tank killers, remarks: “I got me a tank.” Meanwhile, east of the airstrip, the 3rd Battalion, 34th Regiment, commanded by Major Lantron, remains unmolested throughout the morning, except for sporadic artillery and mortar fire. At about 0930, Major Lantron, without explanation, departs the command post and vanishes. In his absence, Colonel Wadlington orders Captain Jack E. Smith to assume command of the 3rd Battalion (34th Regiment). Subsequently, it is determined that Major Lantron had been captured by the North Koreans.

July 19, 1950 In the 19th Regimental sector, the 2nd Battalion has sustained penetration along the Nonsan Road throughout the night, but some reports on the deteriorating situation there have been erroneous. The battalion has not been overrun. Company F buckles under the enormous pressure and pulls back by about dawn, but Company E stands firmly at the bridge. Major Dunham guides the 1st Battalion (34th Regiment) and the 34th Infantry Headquarters Group south by maneuvering behind the lines of Company F, 19th Regiment. A smaller contingent led by Colonel Ayres trails the larger group. Slightly after daybreak, while Dunham and Ayres are retiring, fierce fighting continues between Company F and the enemy, but F Company is compelled to abandon the hill to the west. Dunham’s contingent heads south toward the hills. Colonel Ayres’ unit encounters heavy enemy fire at the bridge over the Yudung River, but it avoids getting trapped and joins Dunham in the heights south of Taejon. By about noon, Ayres turns over command of his 150-man 1st Battalion to Major Dunham and instructs him to redeploy three miles south of Taejon along the Kumsan Road to guard the rear of the city. Ayres and a small group depart separately and are soon struck by enemy fire. Only four men, including Ayres, escape. Wilson Fielder, a Time magazine correspondent, is killed and his body is discovered several months later. Ayres and the three other survivors evade nearby enemy contingents until nightfall, then escape to safety. Meanwhile, Second Lieutenant Robert L. Herbert (G Company, 19th Regiment), upon orders from Colonel McGrail, leads his 2nd Platoon toward Taejon to clear the road. En route he encounters and commandeers a rifle company (B Company, 34th Regiment) and a bazooka team. Soon after, the contingent meets up with Lieutenant Little and a reinforced squad that is protecting the fork in the road. During this enduring morning of confusion, enemy pressure forces more miscalculations. Colonel McGrail, at his 2nd Battalion, 34th Regiment command post east of the Yudung bridge, had dispatched Lieutenant Herbert to Taejon. By then, more distressing reports filter into headquarters. Word reaches McGrail his Company F has been forced to withdraw. McGrail also learns that the 1st Battalion has been shoved back. Captain Montesclaros volunteers to go to regimental headquarters in Taejon and he is soon surprised to find the road open when he meets Lieutenant Herbert at the roadblock. Montesclaros enters headquarters and informs General Dean about the positions of the 2nd Battalion, 19th Regiment, and he requests orders to carry back to Colonel McGrail. Dean tells him, while patting him on the back, “My boy, I am not running the show, Beauchamp is.” Dean then instructs him to go to Colonel Beauchamp, commanding officer, 34th Regiment. Beauchamp dispatches Montesclaros with orders that direct McGrail to bring

July 19, 1950

106

Top: U.S. soldiers man a machine gun (.30-caliber Browning light M1919A6) position in the vicinity of Taejon. Bottom: U.S. troops are deployed in the vicinity of Taejon with a .50-caliber Browning machine gun (M2 HB). the 2nd Battalion back to the city, but upon his return to battalion headquarters, Montesclaros discovers it abandoned. McGrail had attempted to relocate his command post on a hill south of the road, but even that fails. McGrail orders E Company to pull back, but then his radio becomes inoperable and enemy troops converge on his positions.

In the meantime, McGrail’s force heads for the mountains instead of Taejon, unaware of the orders instructing him to head for the city. Unable to locate McGrail, despite a one-hour search, Montesclaros returns toward Taejon. He encounters Company E, which reports it had been overrun and forced to climb the hills. Montesclaros then looks north and

107 spots a large enemy contingent that is less than two miles from Taejon. He chooses to join Company E, rather than return to Taejon. As noon approaches, no units of the 19th Regiment are in place west of Taejon. The last unit positioned close to the besieged city, Company G, pulls out by 1300. Its 3rd Platoon protects the rear and is scheduled to depart after the weapons section, but the latter requests that it be the final unit to withdraw. The mortar men choose to fight first and expend their mortars before moving back. This command, composed of eighteen enlisted men and the one officer, is lost to the enemy. The situation in the city continues to deteriorate. Persistent enemy penetration causes more complications as the day drags out. Snipers ring shots in all directions. At the 2nd Battalion, 19th Regimental compound, enemy tanks commence firing. The barrage kills some troops and detonates an ammunition vehicle. Following this, the tanks speed away and begin blasting other targets. Subsequent to the departure of the enemy armor, bazookas are located. The bazooka fire attempts to eliminate the snipers, but during the operation, the fire ignites many of the poorly constructed dwellings. Within a short time, much of the city is in flames. Meanwhile, enemy tanks return on scene and commence incessant fire. Point-blank fire knocks out two jeeps at the medical company’s headquarters; both vehicles are crammed with troops and all but two men are killed. The two survivors are wounded, and one of these lies in the street, unable to move. The crew of one of the Communist tanks spots the wounded man. Soon after, the tank advances and drives right over the soldier, crushing him. Eventually, two of the three tanks are destroyed and the third one takes a wicked hit that severs its turret, but it escapes. During its first day of use, the new 3.5 rocket launcher destroys a total of eight T-34 tanks. Two others are destroyed by artillery fire. In addition, the U.S. Fifth Air Force destroys at least five tanks. Finally, the T-34 meets a formidable adversary. These 3.5 rocket launchers prevent the enemy tanks from causing panic in the city of Taejon. Back at the roadblock with Lieutenant Herbert, the enemy is closing fast from the northwest. Herbert requests that the howitzers be repositioned to meet the threat, but the artillery officer refuses to redirect the fire without authorization. Herbert contacts the battalion operations officer, but his request is denied. The artillery is pointed in three different directions, but not toward the attacking enemy. In contrast, unrestrained enemy mortars and artillery begin to bellow. The barrages kill several defenders at the roadblock. New orders arrive instructing Herbert to hold the line until reinforcements arrive to evacuate the artillery. About fifty men led by Lieutenant William Wygal rush to the scene to bolster Herbert’s

July 19, 1950 cause. Eventually, Herbert is ordered to join the evacuation. In conjunction, the artillerymen abandon their howitzers. A counterattack is ordered to retrieve them. Nonetheless, it becomes apparent that Taejon will fall. General Dean and Colonel Beauchamp, still unaware that their lines of defense outside the city have been uprooted, discuss evacuation plans during lunch (C-Rations). At about 1400, in an effort to save the vehicles, Dean advises a daylight abandonment of the city. By 1500, the 34th Regiment’s 3rd Battalion heads the march, trailed by the artillery, the medical company, 34th Regimental Command Group and the 2nd Battalion, 19th Regiment. The 1st Battalion, 19th Regiment, holds the rear. However, the 1st and 2nd Battalions, 34th and 19th Regiments respectively, never receive the word because the runners cannot locate their positions. Apparently, General Dean and Colonel Beauchamp have no knowledge that the word to evacuate does not reach the two battalions. When the convoy initiates its departure, Colonel Beauchamp takes a jeep and moves to the southeastern fringes of the city where he discovers four U.S. light tanks (24th Reconnaissance Company). Immediately, he directs them to defend the Okch’on Road exit and the southeastern tip of the city. As Beauchamp moves back into the city, he notices that the tanks are abandoning their positions. Beauchamp makes an abrupt U-turn and catches them, but simultaneously he comes under small-arms fire. Beauchamp bolts from the jeep and takes two of the tanks to form a temporary line of defense. The armor moves to a strategic pass about three miles south of Taejon to permit a safe withdrawal. Several anti-aircraft half-tracs join the barricade. From his vantage point at the pass, Beauchamp spots an incoming locomotive that is being held up at an approach tunnel by enemy fire. The train, originating in Iwon’ni, is attempting to retrieve a ten-car ammunition train that was previously abandoned by a Korean crew. Beauchamp contacts 21st Regimental headquarters to report the incident, and he is told by General Menoher to come to Okch’on to give a “detailed report” on the situation; Beauchamp also informs General Menoher and Colonel Stephens of the unfolding disaster east of the city. Meanwhile, the 21st Regiment has not been dispatched to support the 34th and 19th Regiments at Taejon, because until now, Stephens claims that he had no prior knowledge of the disaster in Taejon. At this time, the 21st Regiment remains in the heights at Okch’on and it cannot arrive in time to reinforce the city. Menoher and Stephens are informed about the deadly roadblock at Taejon, and this, too, had been unknown by the patrols that had been dispatched from headquarters to probe the highway. In the meantime, Captain Hatfield, who had dispatched the earlier train from Taejon, continues to hold at the station to protect the ammunition train,

July 19, 1950 but the anticipated locomotive never arrives with the armed train to evacuate the ammunition. Hatfield steadfastly guards the ammunition until he is slain at the rail yard. The train is blown by U.S. aircraft on the following day to prevent its capture. At about 1700, General Dean, during the unexplained absence of Colonel Beauchamp at Okch’on, orders Col. Wadlington to depart with the convoy. The lead portion of the 34th Regimental convoy, the 3rd Battalion and some artillery safely pass through the tunnel, but then the trap-door closes as the enemy severs the escape route from the city and isolates the remainder of the 34th RCT. Meanwhile, heavy skirmishing occurs near the rail yards. North Korean infantry overrun an artillery battery. In response, Dean orders a counterattack. Elements of the 3rd Battalion, commanded by Major McDaniel and supported by the guns of Company L, recapture the lost equipment. In the meantime, Captain Jack Smith, upon orders from Major William McDaniel, deploys a contingent of Company L, 3rd Battalion, to cover the withdrawal, while the remainder of the battalion joins the convoy. Due to the serious shortage of tractor drivers, some of the recaptured guns are left behind, but they are inoperable. Other guns are towed to safety. At an undetermined time during the battle for Taejon, Major McDaniel is captured and summarily executed by his captors. The stalled convoy adds to the dilemma in Taejon. Dean takes measures to clear the destroyed vehicles to reopen the passage. He places an urgent call to the 24th Division headquarters to request armor to clear the eastern exit from Taejon. All the while, enemy troops continue to converge on the city. The stand of L Company gains more importance as throngs of North Koreans stampede out of the airfield. Dean tells Captain Jack Smith that he must hold for forty-five minutes to provide just enough time for the convoy to escape. Immediately thereafter, Smith and L Company are to pull back with great haste. During the evacuation, the city becomes totally engulfed in flames. Shells burst in the staging areas, boosting casualties. Meanwhile, more snipers have infiltrated the city to further hinder the evacuation. Nevertheless, by about 1800, the principal convoy takes off. Subsequent to its departure, Captain Jack Smith and L Company (34th Regiment) make a hasty and disciplined withdrawal. They travel out of Taejon in trucks and come under tenacious fire as they move. Smith attempts to follow the route of the convoy via the Okch’on Road, but complications develop. Colonel Wadlington expects to lead the convoy, but in an effort to get to the point of the column, his jeep takes a circuitous route. The journey is hair-raising and includes several harrowing and life threatening experiences. The ride unexpectedly terminates with the intentional destruction of the jeep, which gets caught on a dead-end street and

108 under heavy enemy fire. Wadlington’s group then initiates a long climb up the mountain. In the meantime, as expected, the convoy rolls out under a rain of sniper fire. One vehicle goes out of control and plows into a building, nearly trapping the rest of the column from passing. More confusion occurs. A segment of the beginning of the convoy takes a wrong turn and terminates its journey on the same dead end that netted Wadlington. About fifty vehicles are abandoned and about 150 troops, led by several officers, make for the hills on foot. As the night progresses, this group becomes scattered and many lose their bearings. Some of the troops reach U.S. lines on the following morning and others straggle into the perimeter on the 22nd. However, many of the troops vanish. During the anguishing withdrawal, the remainder of the convoy continues to move in the right direction, but the city becomes even more of an inferno. There is scarce breathing room between the vehicles and the burning buildings that consume both sides of the streets. General Dean rushes to the front of the convoy and barely misses the turn for the Okch’on Road. Raging fires prevent Dean’s jeep and an accompanying vehicle from reversing direction. Both vehicles must take the Kumsan Road. Along the road, Dean and his party halt to pick up several wounded Americans. The two vehicles then continue, but shortly thereafter, they encounter an enemy roadblock and become the recipients of a storm of fire. Lieutenant Clark is wounded during the ambush. The Americans avoid a calamity by reaching the bank of the Taejon River, where they conceal themselves until darkness. Later, they cross to the west bank and disappear into the hills near Nangwol. General Dean moves back down the mountain at about midnight to fetch water for the wounded; however, he never rejoins the group and word of his whereabouts remains unknown for several years. (See also, July 21, 1950.) Meanwhile, the main convoy continues down the Okch’on Road until it is hammered by enemy mortar fire that pulverizes the lead vehicle to create an impassable blockage. Instantly, an armored vehicle pushes the disabled vehicle to the side, but another salvo of blistering fire takes out the Amtrac and kills the driver. This is followed by deadly machine gun fire that rakes the line of stalled vehicles. Instinctively, the troops bolt from the endangered vehicles, only to find themselves in equally devastating circumstances. Lurking North Korean soldiers rise from the nearby rice paddies and unleash another firestorm. Burp guns rip through the ranks. As the mortar fire strikes the column, one soldier, SFC Joseph Szito, grabs a 60-mm mortar and begins pounding an enemy position just slightly up a hill south of the Okch’on Road. Next Szito commandeers an 81-mm mortar; he fires about thirty smoke shells to afford the Americans an opportunity to push the disabled burning Amtrac off the road.

109 Few volunteers venture out on the road to remove the obstacle, increasing the severity of the ordeal. At about this time, the enemy inundates the shattered column with another thunderclap of fire, which quickly ignites several more vehicles at the front of the convoy. With sparse recourse available, the survivors torch the remaining vehicles, then begin to head on foot into the mountains. Soon after, the next section of the convoy reaches the stalled convoy. Bedlam occurs as these men are

July 19, 1950 also forced to abandon their vehicles under sheets of withering fire. They scatter for safety and in one particular area encompassing about fifty square yards, about 250 soldiers are crammed together, most praying for the sun to set. Soon after darkness, 2nd Lieutenant Ralph Boyd and a few men attempt to clear the road and search for some operable vehicles. After a Herculean effort and thanks to the assistance of an artillery prime mover, a passage is cleared. The small contingent of troops and its six vehicles resume the

In the Eighth Army rear area near Taejon, troops stand by for orders to move up to the front. One soldier grabs a catnap in a shelter half. His M1 rifle is leaning against a tree.

July 19, 1950

110

U.S. troops maintain a forward command post. The soldier using a field telephone has a modified M1 (sniper’s rifle, .30-caliber MIC) close by against his left shoulder. retreat. They are ordered to remain silent and they receive explicit instructions not to return enemy fire. The convoy soon gets attacked. A sudden burst of enemy machine gun fire slices into their thinning ranks. Lieutenant Boyd sustains a superficial wound, but he loses consciousness when he is thrown from

the vehicle. When he regains consciousness, he discovers that he has been left behind; despite his wound, he sprints two and one-half miles and reaches the lines of the 21st Regiment. Back at Okch’on, Colonel Beauchamp had arrived from the pass and informed General Menoher about

111 the North Korean roadblock. It is unclear why the patrols of the 21st Regiment have not informed Menoher or Colonel Stephens. Beauchamp, under orders from Menoher, leads five light tanks (released from 21st Regiment) from Okch’on en route to the roadblock. He collects a contingent of about sixty men attached to I Company, 34th Regiment. At about darkness, the rescue team advances to positions just short of the pass and at that point one of the tanks strikes a mine. At about the same time, a well-camouflaged enemy soldier, using an electrical switch, detonates a whole pattern of strung mines. The reinforcements are then struck by more blistering fire. Undeterred, the riflemen advance toward the blocked pass and the highway tunnel. Several troops actually reach the tunnel; however, within two hours, they expend their ammunition and are compelled to return to Okch’on without seizing the objective. About 500 enemy troops are deployed on each flank along the evacuation route. Estimates of enemy troop strength to the immediate front of the 34th Regiment stand at about 2,500 to 3,000 North Koreans. The losses at Taejon are extremely heavy. Colonel Beauchamp gazes at the devastation near the tunnel and easily spots the scattered corpses of the heroic engineers. Beauchamp had earlier ordered them to defend the pass. Some of the engineers had escaped. The two tanks and the antiaircraft vehicles are evacuated. Nonetheless, the extensive roadblock, which extends from about two miles east of Taejon along the Okch’on Road outside of the village of Chojon and stretches from there to the first highway and rail tunnels east of Taejon, remains a gauntlet of devastating fire throughout the night. Company L, 3rd Battalion, 24th Regiment, which had fought the rear-action to cover the withdrawal, moves at a furious pace, but it, too, misses the turn at the Okch’on Road and heads directly down the Kumsan Road. The column passes a steady line of abandoned and burning vehicles as Captain Jack Smith attempts to lead his contingent through several enemy roadblocks. Using the services of about 150 men, including approximately fifty wounded, Smith breaks through several minor blockages and then overcomes a final obstacle just before dusk. Eventually, Smith reaches Chinju, not far from the southern tip of Korea. A hospital train rushes to Chinju from Pusan. Captain Smith leaves the wounded at Pusan, then he departs for Taegu to rejoin the 3rd Battalion survivors who had made it out of Taejon. While the incessant combat ensues east of Taejon, the 21st Regiment, deployed a mere three to four miles away, remains unscathed. The positions held by the 21st Regiment at Okch’on and the official statements by Colonel Stephens concerning the activity of the 21st Regiment during the day (20th) seem to add confusion to the unfolding events. Colonel Stephens makes it clear that he had dispatched motorized patrols, pursuant to earlier orders from Gen-

July 19, 1950 eral Dean, along the highway between Okch’on and Taejon to keep the highway open for evacuation. Stephens states that the patrols operated until dusk (20th). Ironically, the North Korean roadblock had been established during the afternoon, closing the road and making it unlikely that the patrols could have reached Taejon without encountering the roadblock. In addition, at this time of the year, darkness rolls in about 2100. Colonel Stephens states that it was subsequent to darkness when he first discovered that the enemy had established the roadblock at Taejon and it was at that time that he was informed that the troops in Taejon were being thrashed. The available medical supplies of the 1st Battalion, 21st Regiment, save the lives of many of the wounded survivors as they wander into the 21st Regimental perimeter and receive assistance at the first aid center near Okch’on. The wounded are so numerous that all medical supplies are expended. Stragglers continue moving through the hills and mountains for several days. Many survivors eventually filter into the 24th Division positions about 20 miles farther east, near Yongdong on the 22nd and 23rd of July; Colonel Wadlington reaches there on the 22nd. Several instances of extraordinary bravery occur during the abandonment of Taejon. In one instance, as the engineers of Company C, 3rd Engineer Combat Battalion, attempt to extricate themselves from the besieged city, Pvt. Charles Zimmerman exhibits extraordinary valor. Despite being wounded eleven times, including one wound from a mortar fragment, he escapes death when his jeep is destroyed by enemy fire and then he wipes out five enemy soldiers and destroys two machine guns to preserve the lives of the other members of his contingent. Zimmerman receives the Silver Star for his gallantry under fire. Another example of selfless courage is that of Sergeant George Libby, Company C, 3rd Engineer Combat Battalion. When the truck that is transporting him crashes through an enemy barricade, enemy fire strikes it and kills or wounds everyone except him; Libby halts an M-5 artillery tractor as it moves to crash through the roadblock. He carries the nearby wounded and places them on the vehicle and then rides on the outside of it to return fire. The tractor continues through the menacing fire and makes frequent stops along the route to pick up additional wounded. Sergeant Libby becomes seriously wounded, but he continues to hold his position on the vehicle. Upon reaching a second roadblock, he is again struck by enemy fire. The wounds are mortal, and Libby fades into unconsciousness before bleeding to death. But Libby’s heroism saves the lives of the others; they reach friendly lines. Sergeant Libby is posthumously awarded the Medal of Honor. Darkness finally blankets the area, but the bloodshed continues as the survivors still attempt to escape the fiery meat-grinder. Meanwhile, back at the positions of the 21st Regiment, Colonel Stephens and General Menoher realize that the North Koreans

July 19, 1950 are preparing to overrun their positions. Stephens requests permission to pull back from Okch’on and establish a delaying action; he believes that if they stay in Okch’on, the unit might be annihilated. By midnight (20th–21st), General Menoher departs for Yongdong, and Colonel Stephens makes preparations to evacuate. Before dawn (21st), engineers blow the tunnels north of Okch’on, but the detonations only partially seal the tunnels and only slow the enemy.

112 At daybreak (21 July), it becomes evident that the North Koreans have funneled through the tunnel and are unfolding an envelopment tactic destined to isolate the 21st Regiment. Heavy exchanges of fire occur on the 21st Regiment’s west flank, which prompts Stephens to order the withdrawal of his regiment and the 52nd Field Artillery Battalion from their positions at Okch’on. In an effort to buy some time for the South Korean forces, which are deployed east of the Kum River, engineers detonate the final

U.S. soldiers (Eighth Army) are in position near the Kum River in the vicinity of Taejon. The two troops are manning a heavy machine gun (M1917A1).

113

July 19, 1950

A U.S. soldier shares a defensive position with an ROK soldier at Taejon. The American is using a .30caliber Browning automatic rifle (M1919A2). bridge across the Kum at about 1100. The Americans successfully pull back twenty miles to their prearranged positions, less than five miles northwest of Yongdong. Here, along a highway that stretches southwest to Kumsan, they establish and fortify a new line of defense that includes a roadblock. In addition to the capture of Taejon, the North Korean forces also seize Iris and Nonsan. Once again, the 24th Division has purchased precious time for the U.N. cause; however, the price is exorbitant. When the survivors of the 24th Division finally regroup during the next several days, it is determined that the division has sustained a 30 percent casualty rate. Of nearly 4,000 troops engaged against the enemy, 1,150 casualties are sustained. Two hundred and twenty-eight are wounded, 48 are slain and 874 troops are listed as missing in action; the majority of the latter are presumed dead. Company L (34th Regiment) sustains 107 casualties from their force of 155 men while fighting a delaying action at Taejon. Also, the equipment losses at Taejon are extremely high. Only 35 regimental vehicles escape the wrath of the enemy. Of 34 trucks assigned to the 24th Quartermaster Company, four remain unscathed.

July 19 President Syngman Rhee, despite the dire circumstances, remains confident. He proclaims that his South Korean forces would unify all of Korea by

advancing to the Manchurian border. Presently, the U.S. and other U.N. forces are simultaneously concerned with keeping from being pushed back to Pusan, while attempting to shove the Communists back across the 38th Parallel. In other activity, contingents of the 1st Cavalry Division, ashore since the previous day, move to the front; the 5th Cavalry heads toward the Taejon vicinity. On the following day, the 8th Cavalry moves by vehicle and by rail to Yongdong; both regiments will be under the command of the division artillery commander, Brigadier General Charles D. Palmer. The Eighth Army War Diary, G-3 section, July 19, states: “1st Cavalry Division ordered to concentrate in Taegu-YongdongKumchon area.” The day’s diary also stipulates that effective July 20, Company A, 71st Heavy Tank Battalion, is to be detached from the 24th Division, reverting to control of the 1st Cavalry Division, its parent division. Also, there is some confusion as to the exact destination of the 1st Cavalry and its schedule to relieve the 24th Division. Much has been written stating that the 1st Cavalry is to relieve the 24th Division at Taejon; but the Eighth Army War Diary, G-3 section, for today states that the 1st Cavalry is “ordered to concentrate in Taegu-Yongdong-Kumchon area.” The diary further stipulates that the 1st Cavalry should be “prepared to relieve the 24th Division on Army Order.” East Coast area: A contingent (one of the two

July 19, 1950 advancing columns) of the N.K. 6th Division seizes Kunsan without incident. Soon after, both enemy columns converge on Ch’onju, about thirty miles southeast of the prize. Effortlessly, they eliminate the defending contingent of S.K. Police. On the 20th (approximate departure date), the N.K. 6th Division drives east toward the fragile left flank of Eighth Army. On the 23rd, the N. K. 6th Division splits its three regiments at Kwangju, but all converge on Sunch’on about the 25th. In Air Force activity, a contingent of Fifth Air Force F-80s engage and destroy three enemy Yaks in the skies over Taegon. In other activity, a contingent of 7 F-80s attached to the 8th Fighter-Bomber Group (FBG), led by Lt. Colonel William T. Samways, attacks an enemy airstrip near Pyongyang and destroys 15 planes that are parked on the field. Lieutenant Ralph A. Ellis (36th Fighter Bomber Squadron, 8th Fighter Bomber Group), piloting an F-80, attacks the airfield at Pyongyang and destroys two parked fighters, both single-engine planes, type unknown. Lieutenant Roy W. Marsh receives credit for destroying two of the aircraft. Also, a patrol attached to the 36th Fighter Bomber Squadron (8th Fighter Bomber Group) led by Lieutenant Robert D. McKee intercepts a Communist force of Yaks in the vicinity of Taejon. McKee downs one of the four planes at about 0800. Also, Lieutenant Robert A. Walsh (80th Fighter Bomber Squadron, 8th Fighter Bomber Group), flying an F-80, spots concealed aircraft

114 at Pomgyang. He strafes the airfield and destroys two planes at about 1500. — In the United States: President Truman, reacting to the expanding crisis in Korea, requests that Congress appropriate ten billion dollars for the purpose of rearming the U.S. Armed Forces, which had rapidly been disarmed at the conclusion of World War II. Truman, upon the recommendation of the Joint Chiefs of Staff, also activates the Organized Marine Corps Reserve. In turn, General Clifton B. Cates, Marine commandant, informs the Marine Reserve of its impending call to active duty. Beginning on the following day and continuing until the 4th of August, in response to the Korean crisis, the entire complement of 47,000 men and women of the Marine Ground Force Reserve is called up and placed on active duty. Marine aviators are not included in the activation process. — In the Pacific Ocean: The USS Henrico (subsequent to repairs) trails the main convoy, sailing alone from the States toward Japan. The vessel encounters some unexpected danger during its second night at sea. Radar detects two “unidentified Submarines” that are closing toward the ship. This prompts the sound of general quarters and the trailing noise of sailors rushing to their posts. With battle stations ready, the pitchdark sea is scanned for possible enemy contact, but according to American intelligence, no North Korean warships remain afloat. Following about one hour of uneasiness, the alleged hostile bleeps on the radar screen

U.S. sailor Hospitalman Philip A. Barome, USN, shares C rations with Korean child.

115 vanish, releasing the tension. Subsequent to the strange encounter, the Henrico continues toward the Far East without further incident. — In Japan: The Forward Echelon 1st MAW lands at Haneda airport, near Tokyo; General Craig heads directly for Admiral Joy’s (Craig’s Naval superior officer) headquarters. Following this meeting, Craig and his staff confer with Army Generals Edward Almond and Edwin Wright to give them the details concerning the particulars on the Marine brigade’s air-ground team. Also, Generals Craig and Cushman are escorted into MacArthur’s office for a cordial and candid meeting. MacArthur takes great pains to alleviate any pressure. He quickly jokes about what he calls “unfounded rumors” that he had been prejudiced against the Marines during World War II and proclaims that he “had always held the greatest admiration for the Corps.” MacArthur is completely briefed on the Marine brigade and its capabilities, despite its frail numbers. MacArthur is stunned to learn that the brigade is at peacetime strength with only two rifle platoons per company and only four guns to each battery as opposed to six guns. The revelation that each Marine company contains 50 fewer men than specified in the Marine war tables had been a complete surprise to MacArthur. Nonetheless, MacArthur is delighted to know the Marines are en route to lessen this burden. Subsequently, General MacArthur requests that the Marine brigade be immediately upgraded to wartime strength, and again he requests that the Joint Chiefs of Staff authorize and provide one complete war strength Marine division, including its normal contingent of air support, for duty in Korea. The Marine generals are jubilant to learn from MacArthur that the brigade is to remain in Japan under the operational control of Admiral Joy, rather than Eighth Army. The stipulation guarantees the Marines the freedom to make ready for the anticipated amphibious invasion. In other activity, Lt. Colonel Tom Dolvin, commanding officer of the newly created 89th Medium Tank Battalion, arrives in Tokyo. Seventy additional troops join the unit to increase its strength to about 225 men. The 89th Medium Tank Battalion embarks to Korea by sea on July 24.

July 20

(See also July 19–20 THE BATTLE OF TAEThe North Koreans overrun Taejon and push the 24th Division back. North Korean tanks lead the infantry through the defenses. During the withdrawal, General Dean remains behind with the rear echelon troops to reassure them and instill confidence. These under-strength units fight bravely, but their weapons, carbines and obsolete bazookas, are outclassed against tanks. General Dean becomes listed as missing in action. Because of his heroic actions and superlative leadership at Taejon, Dean becomes a recipient of the Medal of Honor. Later, his name turns up on a POW list. At Okch’on, General Menoher and Colonel Stephens JON)

July 20, 1950 review the various details of the day’s events. The conversation results in Stephens believing that his 21st Regiment, 24th Division is in danger of being isolated by the North Koreans. Stephens requests authority to fight a delaying action while withdrawing, rather than attempting to stand and fight. Menoher replies affirmatively and informs Stephens that it is up to his discretion as to the time to pull back and how to accomplish the withdrawal successfully. At about midnight (20th–21st), General Menoher departs for Yongdong. Meanwhile, additional American reinforcements continue to arrive in Korea. The fall of Taejon opens a giant hole on the U.N.’s west flank. Communist units are quick to exploit the inefficiencies and follow their victory with another offensive. They commence a four-pronged attack toward Pusan. Also, the 1st Cavalry Division (Infantry), commanded by Major General Hobart R. Gray, advances to deploy on the U.N. right flank and replace ROK forces there. The 25th Division, commanded by General William B. Kean, drives toward a point about 50 miles northeast of Taejon to hold the line, regroup the ROK troops and block the Communists before they reach Taegu. In conjunction with the buildup, contingents of the 29th Regimental Combat Team move into Korea from Okinawa about a week after the 1st Cavalry. The combat team lands on the west shores, then moves to positions near Chinju about 50 miles outside of Pusan. These reinforcements, which are fully in place by the end of July, forge a greater line of defense for General Walton Walker to forestall defeat or annihilation. During the last two weeks in July, Communist troops seize the entire area between Mokp’o and Sunchon, and then they swivel eastward to obliterate everything between them and Pusan. But, MacArthur’s men have other plans. The orders of the day from General Walker become “Stand and fight or die.” General Dean describes the war effort with apparent reference to the limitless numbers of enemy troops: “Trying to stop the Gooks is like trying to stop rainwater with a fish net.” Also, Advance Headquarters, Fifth Air Force, becomes operational in Taegu. In conjunction, forward contingents cooperate with the ground troops. These teams consist of a forward air controller, radio operator and radio repairman; the latter doubles as a jeep driver. Six of these forward groups combine with the 24th Division during the first days of the conflict. The Fifth Air Force uses trainer aircraft (T-6s) to locate enemy targets; they often remain behind their lines until the arrival of fighter planes; these planes are dubbed Mosquitos. Each Mosquito plane carries a Very High Frequency (VHF) radio that enables the crew to communicate with Tactical Air Control Teams on the ground and simultaneously with the fighters in the sky. In addition, the Mosquitos also carry an SCR-300 radio which gives them contact with the ground troops. During the observation flights, advancing enemy contingents are discovered south of the Kum River

July 20, 1950 moving toward the west coast, but when the information is forwarded to Intelligence, the units are considered to be components of the N.K. 4th Division. Subsequent reports flowing from Far East Command to Washington attribute these recently detected N.K. 6th Division units to the N.K. 4th Division. General MacArthur interprets this misinformation as a sign that North Korean Headquarters is assuming that the U.N. forces are corralled in the area northeast of the Kum River. Central Mountain area: The ROK I Corps, which had defended the right flank of the U.S. 24th Division during the early part of July, is now under strength due to a high rate of casualties and deserters. Combined efforts by U.S. and South Korean officers to reorganize and make the unit battle-ready have proceeded haphazardly. Subsequent to the engagements east of the Seoul-Taejon Highway, the S.K. 1st, 2nd and Capital Divisions are now each composed of between 3,000 and 3,500 troops and possess a total of eleven guns, split between the three remaining artillery batteries. The I Corps also possesses about thirty 81-mm mortars, none of which have sights. The dilemma will be acted upon on the 24th, when the South Korean Army reorganizes. General Walker, concerned about the ability of the ROK forces to repulse the advancing enemy forces at the Mun’gyong Plateau, has issued instructions to the U.S. 25th Division to focus on Sanju to back up the ROK forces defending the Mun’gyong Plateau; Walker expects this action to safeguard the central mountain corridors. At Sangju, conditions are atrocious, as panicstricken refugees are flooding into and through the town. The roads become jammed and compound the problem, but even more critically, the streams of retreating ROK troops further complicate the predicament. Contingents of the 24th Regiment, 25th Division, the first Negro regiment to arrive in Korea, ventures into the vicinity of Yech’on. Elements of the 3rd Battalion unsuccessfully attack an enemy-held ridge on the fringe of the town. In the meantime, K Company, 3rd Battalion, 24th Regiment, led by Lieutenant Jasper Johnson, advances, apparently without incident and enters the town during the day. The failed attempt to capture the ridge prompts Lieutenant Johnson to request permission to pull out of Yech’on before nightfall. He receives an affirmative response. By the following morning, Colonel Henry G. Fisher, commanding officer of the 35th Regiment, is informed that the North Koreans have driven the 3rd Battalion, 24th Regiment, from Yech’on. Instinctively, Fisher races from Hamch’ang toward Yech’on to evaluate the situation. He locates the 3rd Battalion west of the town and it is unharmed. Colonel Fisher attempts to get a reasonable explanation and clarification from the battalion commander, but none is forthcoming. Colonel Fisher and his anxious entourage race five miles and enter an uninhabited Yech’on, which is consumed by flames ignited by U.S. Artillery fire. It is undetermined whether North Korean troops occupied Yech’on on the 20th.

116 A well-recognized journalist, Tom Lambert, accompanies Colonel Fisher on the trip to Yech’on. Subsequently he has a two-page article titled “Battle of Yech’on” published in a magazine, but the story which suggests a great victory by the Negro regiment prompts a pointed response from Colonel Fisher: “If his [Lambert’s] are the facts, then I wasn’t there.” In Air Force activity, Fifth Air Force planes support the fighting in Taejon, but they are unable to halt the enemy from seizing the city. In related activity, a contingent of FOs engages enemy aircraft and two enemy planes are downed. — In the United States: The commandant of the Marine Corps (General Cates) assumes that the JCS will eventually authorize the expansion of the 1st Provisional Marine Brigade and agree to upgrade the 1st Marine Division to wartime strength. He phones Admiral Sherman, CNO, and offers plans ABLE and BAKER, two recently created procedures that detail the blueprint for the buildup of the two units. At present the entire corps is comprised of a mere 74,279 officers and enlisted men: operating forces, 40,364; supporting establishment (administrative and supply personnel), 24,592; special assignment, 3,871; non-available hospitalized personnel, confined personnel or personnel en route, 5,492. However, Cates’ emergency request to activate the Marine aviation units is refused by the JCS. In the meantime, MacArthur has already agreed that Marine air squadrons will cover the infantry. The press in the U.S. begins to cover the perceived intentional slight of the Marine Corps. In other activity, General Collins and Admiral Sherman depart the U.S. by plane to meet with General MacArthur in Japan. — In Japan: Marine Generals Edward Craig and Thomas Cushman, domiciled at General Headquarters Tokyo, meet with General Stratemeyer, USAF. They discuss the Marine brigade and clarify General MacArthur’s decision to keep the 1st Provisional Marine Brigade unaltered; Marine air dominates the discussion and by the conclusion of the meeting, Stratemeyer makes it emphatically clear that MAG 33 will remain available to support the Marine ground troops for the duration. In other activity, General MacArthur decides on Inchon as the site for the amphibious invasion, but he deliberates for a long time with Generals Almond and Wright on the alternatives. The blueprint for the operation, dubbed Operation CHROMITE, will be distributed to General Headquarters on the 23rd. — In Okinawa: The USS Walker arrives at Naha, Okinawa, transporting about 400 replacement troops; the recruits disembark quickly and are permitted to carry with them only their toilet articles. Without realizing what is occurring, they are hustled to the battalion sectors and given instant assignments to companies prior to receiving their field equipment and weapons. Nearly without pause, the troops are shuttled back to the dock area from where they will

117 embark to Korea on the following day. It is not a harassment drill. Along with the remainder of the 29th Regiment, the unseasoned troops are scheduled to move to the front lines in Korea. However, the regiment is supposed to receive training near Pusan before being thrown into the fighting.

July 21

Troops of the 21st Regiment, 24th Division, spot an enemy contingent on their west flank. The threatening force, listed as battalion-sized, closes from a distance of two miles. Colonel Stephens orders the 21st Regiment to abandon its positions east of Taejon and at Okch’on. At about 1100, the 21st and the 52nd Field Artillery Battalion move toward the southern edge of Korea. After traveling about twenty miles along the highway that heads southwest, between Yongdong to Kumsan, the 21st Regiment establishes a roadblock about four miles northwest of Yongdong. On the previous night, during the retreat from Taejon, General Dean had gone back down a mountain to fetch water for the wounded in his party. He never returned to the group, due to a fall that rendered him unconscious. The remainder of the party, after a prolonged wait for Dean, moves on toward Yongdong. Meanwhile, General Dean regains consciousness only to find that he has a severe head wound and a broken shoulder. Although it is thought that General Dean had been killed or captured, there is no news of his fate. He roves around the mountains concealed from the enemy for thirty-six days while trying to reach American lines. It is a futile attempt. The laborious trek drains his strength and he loses about sixty pounds. Finally, on the 25th of August, he is captured about 35 miles south of Taejon. Central Mountain area: The S.K. 8th Division attempts to retain control of the area encompassing An-

July 21, 1950 dong and the upper Naktong River crossing there. It engages the approaching N.K. 12th Division, which is supported by about thirty Soviet T-34 tanks. The elite N.K. 12th Division is composed of seasoned troops, most of whom have served during the Chinese wars. The enemy had earlier crossed the upper Han River at Tanyang en route to Andong. The S.K. forces launch the attack and plow into the enemy at a point between Yongju and Andong. This ignites a vicious string of severe actions which last until the end of the month. The N.K. 12th Division, at about this time, receives new orders from N.K. II Corps instructing it “to capture Pohang-dong by 26 July.” Even without the stiff opposition offered by the ROK, the task is difficult, if not insurmountable. The objective is about 75 air-miles away, and to reach it by foot, the North Koreans must trudge over the beastly mountains beyond Andong. The routes of passage are primitive paths, unaccessible except by foot or oxcart. The N.K. 12th Division reinitiates daylight movement, which exposes its troops to air attack. In other activity, the S.K. 18th Regiment, Capital Division, assumes responsibility for the defense of Yech’on. It relieves the 3rd Battalion, U.S. 24th Regiment. The Capital Division will engage the N.K. 8th Division in a series of skirmishes that last until the end of July. Meanwhile, the 25th Division concentrates on holding Sangju. To guarantee its safety, General Kean’s force must hold the strategic road that runs across the Mun’gyong plateau, then through Hamch’ang into Sangju. The 25th Division also must hold the other primary road, which leans farther west as it moves over the plateau, then over the mountains converging on Sangju from the east. The enemy attacks the 25th Division on the following day. The inclement weather prevents aerial observance flights that would otherwise

The Communist offensive continues to pressure Eighth Army. This is the scene of a burning village between Yech’on and Andong on 21 July.

July 22, 1950 chart the progress of the advancing N.K. 6th Division, which is being mistaken as elements of the N.K. 4th Division. General Walker’s command is aware of the enemy movement toward southwestern Korea. Intelligence attempts to dispatch an armored reconnaissance patrol to probe the area, but there are no available personnel. Fairer skies return to the area on July 23. — In Japan: Initially, when General MacArthur had accepted the commitment of Marines for duty in Korea, it had been proposed to base the ground forces in Sasebo and the air units at Kobe Air Field, separating the units by about 400 miles. General Craig, USMC, aware of the impending burden, has recently requested that the troops be garrisoned together near Kobe in order to continue training. He is so confident that the request will be affirmed that he directs Generals Craig and Cushman to depart Tokyo and inspect the areas. The two generals and their accompanying staff return to Tokyo on the 23rd. —In Okinawa: The 1st and 3rd Battalions, 29th Infantry Regiment, commanded by Lt. Colonel Wesley C. Wilson and Lt. Colonel Harold W. Mott, respectively, embark for Korea during a torrential rainstorm aboard the vessels Fentriss and Takasago Maru. The ships arrive at Pusan on the 24th. Due to circumstances, the scheduled training in Japan is canceled and soon after their arrival in Korea, the units ship out for the front lines.

July 22

More 24th Division stragglers from the battle of Taejon reach Yongdong. Its relief, the 1st Cavalry Division, is less than full strength, despite picking up more than 1,400 replacements (including about 100 men who had been residing in the stockade) prior to departing Japan. Each regiment is composed of two battalions rather than the necessary three, and each artillery battalion is composed of only two batteries. Also, only one tank company, composed of light M24s, is with the division. At 1200, the 1st Cavalry Division assumes responsibility for the front line positions of the Yongdong perimeter (Taejon-Taegu corridor), relieving the battered 24th Division. Following seventeen days of vicious combat against two seasoned North Korean divisions, the strength of the 24th Division has been reduced to 8,660 troops. At Yongdong, the 8th Cavalry Regiment replaces the 21st Regiment, 24th Division. With the whereabouts of General Dean still unknown, since his disappearance during the evacuation of Taejon, General John H. Church is directed by Eighth Army to take command of the 24th Division. The 24th Division had been plagued by enormous disadvantages during the initial combat against the enemy, including but not limited to the total lack of coherent communications, atrocious lack of proper equipment and ammunition, obsolete maps and improper discipline, all fueled by erroneous and ludicrous rumors. The troops had also been ill-trained for the extraordinary ordeal which had been thrust upon them. At Taegu, General Walker emphatically cautions General Gay that Yongdong must be held. Walker also

118 reminds Gay that no friendly troops bolster his rear, but that the cavalry must keep the highway open to ensure replenishment of ammunition. According to Walker, the ammunition will be the substance of life for the cavalry, taking priority even over food. After the short meeting with General Walker, General Gay departs for Yongdong, where he becomes involved in a controversial meeting with a representative of Eighth Army, Colonel Allan D. MacLean (G-3 Section). Colonel MacLean had instructed General Palmer to split the 8th Cavalry, deploying its two battalions on opposing sides of the Kum River. The 1st Battalion is to be posted about two miles southwest of Yongdong to protect a key position, the Taejon-Taegu Road, and the 2nd Battalion is to deploy south of the river and about four miles northwest of the town to guard the Chosan-ni-Muju-Kumsan Road. The strategy seems suicidal to General Palmer and to General Gay; to them it is obvious that the divided force will resemble the 7th Cavalry at